Pioneer DVR-520H Operating Instructions
DVD Recorder DVR-420H DVR-520H DVR-720H Operating Instructions î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 1 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT W ARNING: The apparatus is not waterproofs, to prevent fir e or shocks hazard, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture and do not put any water source near this apparatus, such as vase, flower pot, cosmetics container and medicine bottle etc. D3-4-2-1-3_En CAUTION This product contains a laser diode of higher class than 1. T o ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. The following caution label appears on your unit. D3-4-2-1-8_En The ST ANDBY/ON switch is secondar y connected and therefore, does not separate the unit from mains power in ST ANDBY position. Therefore install the unit suitable places easy to disconnect the MAINS plug in case of the accident. The MAINS plug of unit should be unplugged from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time. D3-4-2-2-2a_En W ARNING: BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION CAREFULL Y . The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or r egion. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area wher e this unit will be used meets the requir ed voltage (e.g., 230V or 120V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_En This product complies with the Low V oltage Directive (73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC), EMC Directives (89/336/EEC, amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC). D3-4-2-1-9a_En DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Do not connect either wire to the earth terminal of a three pin plug. NOTE After replacing or changing a fuse, the fuse cover in the plug must be replaced with a fuse cover which corresponds to the colour of the insert in the base of the plug or the word that is embossed on the base of the plug, and the appliance must not be used without a fuse cover . If lost replacement fuse covers can be obtained from your dealer . Only 5 A fuses approved by B.S.I or A.S.T .A to B.S.1362 should be used. D3-4-2-1-2-2_En The wires in this mains lead are colour ed in accordance with the following code: Blue : Neutral Br own : Live If the plug provided is unsuitable for your socket outlets, the plug must be cut off and a suitable plug fitted. IMPOR T ANT FOR USE IN THE UNITED KINGDOM The cut-off plug should be disposed of and must not be inserted into any 13 amp socket as this can result in electric shock. The plug or adaptor or the distribution panel should be provided with 5 A fuse. As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows ; The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured black. The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured red. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified ser vice personnel. W ARNING: No naked flame sources, such as lighted candle, should be placed on the apparatus. If naked flame sources accidentally fall down, fir e spread over the apparatus then may cause fir e. D3-4-2-1-7a_En VENTILA TION: When installing this unit, make sure to leave space ar ound the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear , and 10 cm at each side). W ARNING: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensur e reliable operation of the product and to pr otect it from overheating, to prevent fir e hazard, the openings should never be blocked and covered with items, such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains, etc. Also do not put the apparatus on the thick carpet, bed, sofa, or fabric having a thick pile. D3-4-2-1-7b_En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 úC â 35 úC ( 41 úF â 95 úF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install in the following locations ⢠Location exposed to direct sunlight or strong artificial light ⢠Location exposed to high humidity , or poorly ventilated location D3-4-2-1-7c_En This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long- term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period. K041_En This pr oduct includes F ontAv enue î fonts licenced b y NEC corpor ation. F ontAvenue is a r egist er ed tr ademark of NEC Corpor ation. POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized ser vice center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
4 En Contents 01 Before you start Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 WhatâÂÂs in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . . 8 Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Disc / content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . 9 About the internal hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 02 Connecting up Rear panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Front panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Extra features for use with compatible TVs . . . . . . . . 13 Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Using other types of audio/video output . . . . . . . . . . 15 Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver . . . . . 16 Connecting an external decoder box (1) . . . . . . . . . . 17 Connecting an external decoder box (2) . . . . . . . . . . 18 Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver . . . . . . . . . . 19 Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Plugging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 03 Controls and displays Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 04 Getting started Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Selecting the hard disk or DVD for playback and recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Making your first recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Using the built-in TV tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Basic playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Using the Home Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Displaying disc information on-screen . . . . . . . . . . . 33 05 Playback Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Navigating discs and the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Switching DVD soundtracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 06 Recording About DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 About HDD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Recording time and picture quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Setting the picture quality/recording time . . . . . . . . 47 Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Setting a timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Timer recording FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Simultaneous recording and playback . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Recording from an external component . . . . . . . . . . 56 Automatic recording from a satellite tuner . . . . . . . . 56 Recording from a DV camcorder (DVR-520H/720H only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Recording from the DV output (DVR-520H/720H only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Playing your recordings on other DVD players . . . . . 59 Initializing a DVD-RW disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 07 Copying and back-up Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 One Touch Copy (HDD to DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 One Touch Copy (DVD to HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Copying from HDD to DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 HDD to DVD Copy List menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Recording the Copy List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 HDD to DVD Copy List commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Copying from DVD to HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 DVD to HDD Copy List menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Recording the Copy List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 DVD to HDD Copy List commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Using disc back-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 08 Editing The Disc Navigator screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Disc Navigator menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Editing VR mode Original, Video mode and HDD content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Editing HDD groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Creating and editing a VR mode Play List . . . . . . . . . 84 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
5 En 09 Disc History Using the Disc History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 10 The PhotoViewer Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 11 The Disc Setup menu Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Initialize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 HDD Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Finalize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 12 The Video/Audio Adjust menu Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Setting the picture quality for disc playback . . . . . . 95 Audio DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 13 The Initial Setup menu Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Tuner settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Video In / Out settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Audio In settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Audio Out settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Recording settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Playback settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 14 Additional information Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . 112 Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 About DV (DVR-520H/720H only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Manual recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Country code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 On-screen displays and recorder displays . . . . . . . 120 Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Storing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Damaged discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Moving the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 15 Index DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 6 En Chapter 1 Before you start Features ⢠HDD recording You can record up to 102 hours of video (in EP mode) on the internal 80GB (gigabyte) hard disk (HDD) on the DVR- 420H/520H, or up to 204 hours on the 160GB DVR-720H. With both recordable DVD and a high-capacity HDD in the same recorder, you have the flexibility to keep recordings on the HDD for quick access anytime, or record to DVD for archiving or playing on other DVD players. ⢠Copy between HDD and DVD You can copy recordings from the HDD to recordable DVD, or from DVD to the HDD. Usually you can use the high-speed copy feature, which can copy an hour of video in under two minutes (when recorded in EP mode using a DVD-R Ver. 2.0 / 8x disc). You can also choose to copy material at a different recording quality from the original. For example, you might want to copy a FINE mode (highest quality) recording on the HDD to SP (standard play) quality on a DVD so that you can fit other recordings on the same disc. ⢠One Touch Copy One Touch Copy makes copying the currently playing title from HDD to DVD, or DVD to HDD as simple as pressing a button. ⢠Chase play Using chase play you can start watching a recording before the recording has finished. For example, you could set a timer recording for a program that youâÂÂre going to miss the first 15 minutes of, then start watching while the recorder is still recording the program 15 minutes ahead of you. ⢠Simultaneous recording and playback Playback and recording for both DVDs and the built-in hard disk drive (HDD) are completely independent. For example you can record a broadcast program to either a recordable DVD or the HDD, while watching another recording you already made on the same DVD or on the HDD. ⢠Disc Navigator The on-screen Disc Navigator makes finding your way around the contents of a disc or the HDD easy. For recordable DVD and HDD content, moving thumbnail images are displayed for ease of use. The Disc Navigator is also where you can edit HDD and recordable DVD content. ⢠Disc History The Disc History screen shows disc information, including how much free space remains for recording, for the last 30 recordable discs loaded in the recorder. Every time you load a recordable disc, the Disc History is automatically updated with the latest information. ⢠Home Menu The Home Menu gives you on-screen access to all the recorderâÂÂs features in one convenient place, from setting up the recorder, to programming a timer recording and editing a recording. ⢠Cinema surround sound in your home Connect this recorder to a Dolby Digital and/or DTS- compatible AV amp/receiver to enjoy full surround sound effects from Dolby Digital and DTS DVD discs. ⢠Easy Timer Recording Setting the recorder to record a program is simple from the Easy Timer Recording screen. Set the channel to record and the recording quality, then graphically set the start and end times of the recording. ThatâÂÂs it! ⢠Program up to 32 timer recordings You can program the recorder to record up to 32 programs, up to a month in advance, using the VIDEO Plus î system * for easy programming if you want. As well as single programs, you can specify daily or weekly recordings, too. This recorder is also compatible with VPS/PDC systems, which ensure you donâÂÂt miss a timer recording, even if the broadcast is not running to schedule. *1 is a registered trademark of Gemstar Development Corporation. The VIDEO Plus system is manufactured under license from Gemstar Development Corporation. ⢠One Touch Recording Use One Touch Recording to start recording immediately in 30 minute blocks. Each time you press the î REC button, the recording time is extended by another 30 minutes. HDD VR mode HDD VR mode HDD î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 7 En ⢠Optimized recording Optimized recording adjusts the recording quality automatically if a timer recording will not fit onto a disc with the settings that you made. ⢠Auto Start Recording from satellite receiver or other set top box With a satellite receiver or other set top box connected to the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) inputs of this recorder, you can start and stop recording automatically according to the timer settings of the set top box. ⢠High quality 16-bit Linear PCM audio When recording using one of the high quality record settings ( FINE or MN32 ), the audio is recorded in uncompressed 16-bit Linear PCM format. This delivers great sounding audio to accompany the high picture quality. ⢠Picture quality adjustment features During playback, you can adjust various picture quality settings to improve the picture. You can also adjust the recording picture quality. For example, if you want to make a DVD copy of an old video tape, you can optimize the picture quality before transferring it to disc. ⢠Find what you want to watch quickly and easily Unlike video tape that needs to be wound to the correct place, you can jump right to the part of a DVD disc or the HDD that you want to watch. Search for a point on a disc by title, chapter or time. ⢠Manual recording In addition to the four preset recording quality modes ( FINE , SP , LP and EP ), the manual recording mode allows you to access 32 different recording quality/time settings, giving you precise control over the recording. ⢠Record to and from a DV camcorder (DVR-520H/ 720H only) This recorder has a built-in DV (Digital Video) input/ output jack for connection to a DV camcorder. This makes it ideal for transferring camcorder footage to DVD or HDD for editing. You can also transfer DVD or HDD content back to the camcorder if you need to. ⢠Safe, non-destructive editing When you edit a DVD-RW, the actual content of the disc (the Original content) is not touched. The edited version (the Play List content) just points to various parts of the Original content. ⢠Chapter marking You can easily add chapter markers anywhere in your recordings for easy editing. ⢠Play Video mode recordings on a regular DVD player Discs recorded using the Video mode can be played back on regular DVD players, including computer DVD drives compatible with DVD-Video playback * . * âÂÂDVD-Video formatâ recording: The use of the DVD- Video format for recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs is referred to as recording in âÂÂVideo modeâ on PioneerâÂÂs DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-R / DVD- RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD playback equipment, and there is DVD playback equipment that does not play DVD-R or DVD-RW discs recorded in the DVD-Video format. Note: âÂÂFinalizationâ is required. ⢠WMA, MP3 and JPEG file playback This recorder can play WMA and MP3 audio files and JPEG picture files on CD-R, CD-RW or CD-ROM discs. ⢠Disc Back-up The disc back-up feature gives you a convenient way to back-up important material on DVD to another recordable DVD disc. The material is first copied to the HDD, then on to a second DVD disc. ⢠Recovery Recording When a timer recording is set to use DVD but the disc loaded at the time of the recording is unrecordable, the program will automatically be recorded to the HDD. ⢠Auto Replace Recording This feature is useful for regular timer recordings of a TV program which you donâÂÂt want to keep after watching. Each time the program is recorded, it replaces the one currently on the HDD. ThereâÂÂs no need to manually delete it later. VR mode VR mode HDD Note on copying: Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners. Video mode HDD HDD DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 8 En WhatâÂÂs in the box Please confirm that the following accessories are in the box when you open it. ⢠Remote control ⢠AA/R6P dry cell batteries x2 ⢠Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow) ⢠RF antenna cable ⢠Power cable ⢠These operating instructions ⢠Warranty card Putting the batteries in the remote control 1 Open the battery compartment cover on the back of the remote control. 2 Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the battery compartment following the indications ( î , î ) inside the compartment. 3 Close the cover. Note Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting. Please observe the following: ⢠DonâÂÂt mix new and old batteries together. ⢠DonâÂÂt use different kinds of batteries togetherâ although they may look similar, different batteries may have different voltages. ⢠Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartment. ⢠Remove batteries from equipment that isnâÂÂt going to be used for a month or more. ⢠When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instructionâÂÂs rules that apply in your country or area. Using the remote control Please keep in mind the following when using the remote control: ⢠Make sure that there are no obstacles between the remote and the remote sensor on the unit. ⢠Remote operation may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unitâÂÂs remote sensor. ⢠Remote controllers for different devices can interfere with each other. Avoid using remotes for other equipment located close to this unit. ⢠Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the operating range of the remote. ⢠When the batteries run down or you change the batteries, the remote control mode and TV preset codes are automatically reset. See Remote Control Set on page 99 and Setting up the remote to control your TV on page 112 to reset them. ⢠Use within the operating range and angle, as shown. ⢠You can control this recorder using the remote sensor of another Pioneer component using the CONTROL IN jack on the rear panel. See Rear panel connections on page 12 for more information. 30 30 7m DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 9 En Disc / content format playback compatibility General disc compatibility This recorder is compatible with a wide range of disc types (media) and formats. Playable discs will generally feature one of the following logos on the disc and/or disc packaging. Note however that some disc types, such as recordable CD and DVD, may be in an unplayable formatâÂÂsee below for further compatibility information. ⢠Also compatible with KODAK Picture CD ⢠is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation. ⢠is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd. This recorder also supports the IECâÂÂs Super VCD standard. Compared to the Video CD standard, Super VCD offers superior picture quality, and allows two soundtracks to be recorded. Super VCD also supports the widescreen size. DVD-R/RW compatibility This recorder will play and record DVD-R/RW discs. Compatible media: ⢠DVD-RW Ver. 1.1, Ver. 1.1 / 2x and Ver. 1.2 / 4x ⢠DVD-R Ver. 2.0 and Ver. 2.0 / 4x / 8x Recording formats: ⢠DVD-R: DVD-Video format (Video mode) ⢠DVD-RW: Video Recording (VR) format and DVD- Video format (Video mode) Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD writers may reject DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 / 4x discs. If you want to share DVD-RW discs between this recorder and an older recorder/writer, we recommend using Ver. 1.1 discs. The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recorder compatibility with DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 / 4x discs. 1 Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized VR mode and Video mode discs may not play. 2 Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback. 3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play. CD-R/RW compatibility This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs. ⢠Compatible formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/Super VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA or JPEG files * ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this recorder. ⢠Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD-Audio and Video CD/Super VCD) ⢠Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio only Compressed audio compatibility ⢠Compatible media: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW ⢠Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio (WMA) ⢠Sampling rates: 44.1 or 48kHz ⢠Bit-rates: Any (128Kbps or higher recommended) ⢠Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback: Yes ⢠VBR WMA playback: No ⢠WMA encoder compatibility: Windows Media Codec 8 (files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR) ⢠DRM (Digital Rights Management) file playback: No (see also DRM in the Glossary on page 122) ⢠File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files â do not use for other file types) ⢠File structure: Up to 99 folders / 999 files (if these limits are exceeded, only files and folders up to these limits are playable) DVD-Video DVD-R DVD-RW Video CD Fujicolor CD Audio CD CD-R CD-RW VIDEO CD Su per Video CD (Super VCD) Model Playable Recordable DVR-7000 Yes 1,2,3 No DVR-3100/ DVR-5100H Yes 1 No DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 10 En WMA (Windows Media Audio) compatibility The Windows Media î logo printed on the box indicates that this recorder can playback Windows Media Audio content. WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by using Windows Media î Player version 7, 7.1, Windows Media î Player for Windows î XP, or Windows Media î Player 9 Series. Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. JPEG file compatibility ⢠Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2* still image files * File format used by digital still cameras ⢠Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:4:2, 4:2:0 ⢠Horizontal resolution: 160 â 5120 pixels ⢠Vertical resolution: 120 â 3840 pixels ⢠Progressive JPEG compatible: No ⢠File extensions: .jpg, jpeg, jif, jfif (must be used for the recorder to recognize JPEG files â do not use for other file types) ⢠File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders / 999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders that this on the disc then more can be reloaded) PC-created disc compatibility Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be playable in this unit due to the setting of the application software used to create the disc. In these particular instances, check with the software publisher for more detailed information. Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are not compatible with this recorder. Check the DVD-R/RW or CD-R/RW software disc boxes for additional compatibility information. Frequently asked questions ⢠WhatâÂÂs the difference between DVD-R and DVD-RW? The most important difference between DVD-R and DVD-RW is that DVD-R is a record-once medium, while DVD-RW is a re-recordable/erasable medium. You can re-record/erase a DVD-RW disc approximately 1,000 times. For more information, see About DVD recording on page 45. ⢠WhatâÂÂs VR mode? VR (Video Recording) mode is a special mode designed for home DVD recording. It allows flexible editing of recorded material compared to âÂÂVideo modeâÂÂ. On the other hand, Video mode discs are more compatible with other DVD players. ⢠Can I play my recordable discs in a regular DVD player? Generally, DVD-R discs and DVD-RW discs recorded in Video mode * are playable in a regular DVD player, but they must be âÂÂfinalizedâ first. This process fixes the contents of the disc to make them readable to other DVD players as DVD-Video discs. DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode are playable in some players. This label indicates playback compatibility with DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode (Video Recording format). However, for discs recorded with a record-only-once encrypted program, playback can only be achieved using the CPRM compatible device. Note that Pioneer cannot guarantee that discs recorded using this recorder will play on other players. * âÂÂDVD-Video formatâ recording: The use of the DVD- Video format for recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs is referred to as recording in âÂÂVideo modeâ on PioneerâÂÂs DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-R / DVD- RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD playback equipment, and there is DVD playback equipment that does not play DVD-R or DVD-RW discs recorded in the DVD-Video format. Note: âÂÂFinalizationâ is required. This recorder supports the recording of âÂÂcopy-onceâ broadcast programs using the CPRM copy protection system (see CPRM on page 46) on CPRM-compliant DVD-RW discs in VR mode. CPRM recordings can only be played on players that are specifically compatible with CPRM. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 11 En ⢠Do I need two DVD recorders for editing? What kind of editing can I do? Unlike editing video tape, you only need one DVD recorder to edit discs. With DVD, you edit by making a âÂÂPlay Listâ of what to play and when to play it. On playback, the recorder plays the disc according to the Play List. Throughout this manual, you will often see the words Original and Play List to refer to the actual content and the edited version. ⢠Original content refers to whatâÂÂs actually recorded on the disc. ⢠Play List content refers to the edited version of the discâÂÂhow the Original content is to be played. About the internal hard disk drive The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile piece of equipment. Please use the recorder following the guidelines below to protect against possible HDD failure. We recommend that you back up your important recordings onto DVD-R/RW discs in order to protect against accidental loss. ⢠Do not move the recorder while it is on. ⢠Install and use the recorder on a stable, level surface. ⢠Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan. ⢠Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid places, or in places that may be subject to sudden changes in temperature. Sudden changes in temperature can cause condensation to form inside the recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure. ⢠While the recorder is switched on, do not unplug from the wall socket or switch the electricity off from the breaker switch. ⢠Do not move the recorder immediately after switching it off. If you need to move the recorder, please follow the steps below: 1 After the message POWER OFF is shown in the display, wait at least two minutes. 2 Unplug from the wall socket. 3 Move the recorder. ⢠If thereâÂÂs a power failure while the recorder is on there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be lost. ⢠The HDD is very delicate. If used improperly or in an unsuitable environment, it is possible that the HDD will fail after a few years of use. Signs of problems include playback unexpectedly freezing and noticeable block noise (mosaic) in the picture. However, sometimes there will be no warning signs of HDD failure. If the HDD fails, no playback of recorded material will be possible. In this case it will be necessary to replace the HDD unit. Original Title 1 Play List Title 2 Title 1 Title 3 Title 2 Chapt er 1 C hapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 2 Chapt er 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 1 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 12 En Chapter 2 Connecting up Rear panel connections 1 ANTENNA IN/OUT Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA IN jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA OUT jack for connection to your TV. 2 OUTPUT jacks Stereo analog audio, video and S-video outputs for connection to a TV or AV amplifier/receiver. 3 AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector Audio/video output SCART-type AV connector for connecting to a TV or other equipment with a SCART connector. The video output is switchable between video, S-video and RGB. See page AV1 Out on page 102 for how to set this up. 4 AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector Audio/video input/output SCART-type AV connector for connecting to a VCR, or other equipment with a SCART connector. The input accepts video, S-video and RGB. See AV2/L1 In on page 102 for how to set this up. 5 CONTROL IN Use to control this recorder from the remote sensor of another Pioneer component with a CONTROL OUT terminal and bearing the Pioneer î mark. Connect the CONTROL OUT of the other component to the CONTROL IN of this recorder using a mini-plug cord. 6 DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL For connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver, Dolby Digital/ DTS/MPEG decoder or other equipment with optical digital input. 7 AC IN â Power inlet Front panel connections On the left side of the front panel a flip-down cover hides a second audio/video input, consisting of an S-video and standard (composite) video jack, and stereo analog audio jacks. DV-520H/720H only: On the right side is the DV input/ output i.LINK connector. This is for connection to a DV camcorder. DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CONTROL IN IN OUT ANTENNA RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV 1 (RGB) - TV 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 PULL-OPEN STANDBY/ON DVD HDD OPEN/CLOSE REC ONE TOUCH COPY î DV IN/OUT VIDEO S-VIDEO DV IN/OUT DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 13 En Extra features for use with compatible TVs When this recorder is connected to a TV that features T-V Link, EasyLink, MegaLogic, SMARTLINK, Q-Link, DATA LOGIC or NexTView Link using a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable (not supplied), the following functions are available: ⢠Direct TV recording ⢠Channel preset download ⢠Electronic Program Guide (EPG) download ⢠TV auto power on ⢠System configuration Direct TV recording Direct TV recording allows you to record the TV program that youâÂÂre watching, without having to worry about whether this recorder is set to the same channel. See Direct recording from TV on page 48 for more on this feature. Channel preset download This feature allows you to set up the channel presets of this recorder very simply using the channel presets and preset names already in your TV. See Switching on and setting up on page 25 and Auto Channel Setting : Download from TV on page 100 for more on this feature. EPG download EPG download allows you to program a timer recording directly from the electronic program guide displayed on your TV. See the manual that came with your TV for more information on how to use this feature. Note that the SP and LP options displayed on your TV correspond to the SP and LP recording modes on this recorder. TV auto power on When you play a disc in this recorder, the TV automatically turns on and switches to the correct video input. See the manual that came with your TV for how to use this feature. System configuration Basic settings, including language, country and TV screen size (aspect ratio), can be downloaded from your TV to help set up this recorder for use. Note ⢠For further details and compatibility information, see also the manual that came with your TV. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 14 En Easy connections The setup described below is a basic setup that allows you to watch and record TV programs, and play discs. Other types of connections are explained starting on the following page. Important ⢠These connections use SCART cables (not supplied). If your TV (or VCR) does not have a SCART connection, see the following page for connecting up using the supplied audio/video cable. ⢠The AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector can output ordinary (composite), S-video or RGB video, plus stereo analog audio. The AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) connector accepts ordinary, S-video and RGB video input, as well as stereo analog audio. See AV1 Out on page 102 and AV2/L1 In on page 102 for how to set them up. ⢠Before making or changing any rear panel connections, make sure that all components are switched off and unplugged from the wall outlet. 1 Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV outlet to the antenna input on your VCR. ⢠If you are not connecting a VCR in the chain, connect it to the ANTENNA IN jack on this recorder and skip the next step. 2 Use an RF antenna cable (one is supplied) to connect the antenna output of your VCR to the ANTENNA IN of this recorder. 3 Use another RF antenna cable to connect the ANTENNA OUT of this recorder to the antenna input on your TV. 4 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector on this recorder to the SCART AV connector on your TV. 5 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2/ AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your VCR. Note ⢠See the following page if you want to use one of the other kinds of audio/video connection. Tip ⢠This recorder has a âÂÂthroughâ function which allows you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner in this recorder while watching a video playing on your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in standby, Power Save must be set to Off âÂÂsee Power Save on page 98). TV VCR Antenna/cable TV wa ll outlet DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CONTROL IN IN OUT ANTENNA RL AU DIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV 1 (RGB) - TV SCART AV CONNECTOR SCART AV CONNECTOR ANTENNA IN ANTENNA OUT ANTENNA IN 1 2 4 5 3 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 15 En Using other types of audio/video output If you canâÂÂt use the SCART AV connector to connect your TV to this recorder, there are standard audio/video output jacks, as well as an S-video output. Using the supplied audio/video cable 1 Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT jack to a video input on your TV. Use the yellow jack of the supplied audio/video cable for the video connection. 2 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the corresponding audio inputs on your TV. Use the red and white jacks of the supplied audio/video cable for the audio connection. Make sure you match up the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound. Using the S-video output 1 Use an S-video cable (not supplied) to connect the S-VIDEO OUTPUT to an S-video input on your TV, monitor (or other equipment). 2 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the corresponding audio inputs on your TV. You can use the supplied audio/video cable, leaving the yellow video plug disconnected. Make sure you match up the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound. TV DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CONTROL IN IN OUT ANTENNA RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV 1 (RGB) - TV VIDEO INPUT AUDIO INPUT 1 2 TV DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CONTROL IN IN OUT ANTENNA RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV 1 (RGB) - TV S-VIDEO INPUT AUDIO INPUT 1 2 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 16 En Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver If you have a cable or satellite receiver with a built-in decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this page. If you are using a separate decoder box for your cable/satellite TV, set up following the instructions on the next page. Using the setup on this page you can: ⢠Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box/satellite tuner. Important ⢠Do not connect this recorder âÂÂthroughâ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver. 1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown. This enables you to watch and record TV channels. 2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your TV. This enables you to watch discs. 3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2/ AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your satellite/cable box. This enables you to record scrambled TV channels. Note ⢠The diagram shows SCART video connections, but you can alternatively use any of the other audio/video connections. Tip ⢠This recorder has a âÂÂthroughâ function which allows you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner in this recorder while watching a video playing on your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in standby, Power Save must be set to Off âÂÂsee Power Save on page 98). TV Antenna/cable TV wa ll outlet DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CONTROL IN IN OUT ANTENNA RL AU DIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV 1 (RGB) - TV Cable/Satellite box SCART AV CONNECTOR SCART AV CONNECTOR ANTENNA IN ANTENNA OUT ANTENNA IN 1 1 2 3 1 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 17 En Connecting an external decoder box (1) If you have an external, dedicated decoder box for your satellite or cable TV system, use the setup described on this page. Important ⢠Do not connect your decoder box directly to this recorder. ⢠Information from the decoder (for example, relating to pay TV services), is only viewable when this recorder is off (in standby). ⢠For timer recording to work properly on this recorder, the VCR/satellite receiver/cable box must also be switched on during recording. ⢠It is not possible to watch one TV program and record another using this setup. 1 Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV outlet to the antenna input on your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box. 2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect your decoder to your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box. See the manual for your decoder box for more detailed instructions. 3 Use a SCART cable to connect your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box to the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector on this recorder. 4 Use a SCART cable to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to your TV. TV Antenna/cable TV wa ll outlet VCR/Satellite receiver /Cable box Decoder DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CONTROL IN IN OUT ANTENNA RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV 1 (RGB) - TV SCART AV CONNECTOR SCART AV CONNECTOR SCART AV CONNECTOR ANTENNA IN 1 4 2 3 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 18 En Connecting an external decoder box (2) If you only have a decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this page. Using the setup on this page you can: ⢠Record scrambled channels received using the recorderâÂÂs built-in TV tuner. Important ⢠Do not connect this recorder âÂÂthroughâ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver. 1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown. This enables you to watch and record TV channels. 2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your TV. This enables you to watch discs. 3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2/ AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your decoder box. This enables you to record scrambled TV channels. Note ⢠In order to use this setup, you will need to make the following settings from the Initial Setup menu: â Set the AV2/L1 In setting to Decoder from the Initial Setup menu (see AV2/L1 In on page 102). â From the Manual CH Setting screen, set the Decoder setting for the scrambled channels to On (see Manual CH Setting on page 100). TV Antenna/cable TV wa ll outlet Decoder DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CONTROL IN IN OUT ANTENNA RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV 1 (RGB) - TV SCART AV CONNECTOR SCART AV CO NNECTOR ANTENNA IN 1 2 3 1 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 19 En Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver To enjoy multichannel surround sound you need to connect this recorder to an AV amplifier/receiver using the digital optical output. In addition to a digital connection, we recommend also connecting using the stereo analog connection for compatibility with all discs and sources. YouâÂÂll probably also want to connect a video output to your AV amplifier/receiver. Use the ordinary video output (as shown here), or the S-video output. Important ⢠Noise may be output from your speakers if the recorder is not set up to work with your AV amplifier/receiver properly (see Audio Out settings on page 104). 1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown. This enables you to watch and record TV channels. 2 Connect one of the DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL jack on this recorder to an optical digital input on your AV amplifier/receiver. This enables you to listen to multichannel surround sound. 3 Connect the analog AUDIO OUTPUT and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks on this recorder to an analog audio and video input on your AV amplifier/receiver. 4 Connect the AV amplifier/receiverâÂÂs video output to a video input on your TV. Note ⢠The diagram shows ordinary video connections, but you can alternatively use an AV connector or S-video connections, if theyâÂÂre available. Important ⢠Do not connect this recorder to your TV âÂÂthroughâ your VCR using A/V cables. Always connect it directly to your TV. TV AV amp/ receiver Antenna/cable TV wall outlet DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CONTROL IN IN OUT ANTENNA RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV 1 (RGB) - TV ANTENNA IN VIDEO IN DIGITAL IN OPTICAL A/V IN 1 VIDEO OUT 1 3 2 1 4 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 20 En Connecting other AV sources Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder 1 Connect a set of audio and video outputs on your VCR or camcorder to a set of inputs on this recorder. This enables you to record tapes from your VCR or camcorder. ⢠You can use ordinary video or S-video cables for the video connection. ⢠The front panel connections make convenient connections for a camcorder. 2 Connect a set of audio and video inputs on your VCR or camcorder to a set of outputs on this recorder. This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR or camcorder. ⢠You can use ordinary video or S-video cables for the video connection. ⢠Alternatively, you can use the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART connector for audio/video input and output with just one SCART cable. Connecting a DV camcorder (DVR-520H/720H only) Using the front panel DV IN/OUT jack, it is possible to connect a DV camcorder or video deck, or DVD-R/RW recorder and digitally transfer DV tapes or DVD-R/RW discs to DVD-R/RW. Important ⢠This jack is for connection to DV equipment only. It is not compatible with digital satellite tuners or D-VHS video decks. 1 Use a DV cable (not supplied) to connect the DV in/out jack on your DV camcorder/deck to the front panel DV IN/OUT jack of this recorder. Plugging in Before plugging in for the first time, make sure that everything is connected properly. 1 Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC IN inlet and the other end into a standard household power outlet. Analog camcorder VCR AUDIO/VIDEO OUTPUT AUDIO/VIDEO INPUT 1 2 AUDIO/VIDEO INPUT AUDIO/VIDEO OUTPUT DV IN/OUT DV camcorder DV IN/OUT DV IN/OUT DV IN/OUT AC IN DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 21 En Chapter 3 Controls and displays Front panel 1 î STANDBY/ON Press to switch the recorder on/into standby. 2 HDD Press to switch to the hard disk drive (HDD) for recording and playback. The button lights when HDD is selected. 3 DVD Press to switch to DVD for recording and playback. The button lights when DVD is selected. 4 IR remote sensor (page 8) 5 Disc tray 6 Front panel display See Display on page 22 for details. 7 DV IN/OUT jack (DVR-520H/720H only) (page 12, 20, 56, 57, 59, 104, 117) Digital input/output jack for use with a DV camcorder. 8 /â (page 29, 31, 48) Use to change TV channels, skip chapters/tracks, etc. 9 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 62) Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing title to DVD or the HDD. 10 î REC Press to start recording. 11 î Press to stop recording. 12 î Press to start or restart playback. 13 î Press to stop playback. 14 î OPEN/CLOSE Press to open/close the disc tray. 15 Front panel inputs (page 12) Pull the cover down where indicated to access the front panel input jacks. Especially convenient for connecting camcorders and other portable equipment. PULL-OPEN STANDBY/ON DVD HDD OPEN/CLOSE REC ONE TOUCH COPY î DV IN/OUT 1 2 3 4 6 5 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 9 10 Illustration shows DVR-520H DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 22 En Display 1 î / î Arrows indicate the copy direction between the HDD () and DVD ( ). 2 î PLAY / î REC indicators Lights during playback / recording; blinks when playback / recording is paused. 3 î î (page 28) The â î â and â î â indicators light to indicate that the HDD or DVD is selected for recording/playback. 4 PL (page 78, 84) Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the recorder is in Play List mode. 52 3 (page 99) Shows the remote control mode (if nothing is displayed, the remote control mode is 1). 6 REM Lights when the character display is showing the remaining available recording time. 7V Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is loaded. 8R / RW Indicates the type of recordable DVD loaded: DVD-R or DVD-RW. 9 (page 49) Lights when a timer recording has been set. (Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but there isnâÂÂt a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has been set to HDD but the HDD is not recordable.) AUTO (page 56) Lights when Auto Start Recording has been set, and during Auto Start Recording. 10 Recording quality indicators (page 46) FINE Lights when the recording mode is set to FINE (best quality). SP Lights when the recording mode is set to SP (standard play). LP Lights when the recording mode is set to LP (long play). EP Lights when the recording mode is set to EP (extended play). MN Lights when the recording mode is set to MN (manual recording level) mode. 11 Character display 12 (page 104) Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast are recorded. 13 VPS / PDC (page 49) Lights when receiving a VPS/PDC broadcast during a VPS/PDC-enabled timer recording. 14 NTSC Lights when playing NTSC format video. 15 OVER (page 104) Lights when the analog audio input level is too high. 13 12 14 15 11 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 2 1 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 23 En Remote control 1 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 62) Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing title to DVD or the HDD. 2 Remote control indicator Lights when setting up the remote control for use with a TV (page 112) and when setting the remote control mode (page 99). 3 î STANDBY/ON Press to switch the recorder on/into standby. 4 î OPEN/CLOSE Press to open/close the disc tray. 5 HDD (page 28) Press to select the hard disk (HDD) for recording or playback. 6 DVD (page 28) Press to select the DVD for recording or playback. 7 DVD playback functions AUDIO (page 29, 43, 44) Changes the audio language or channel. (When the recorder is stopped, press to change the tuner audio.) SUBTITLE (page 43) Displays/changes the subtitles included in multilingual DVD-Video discs. ANGLE (page 44) Switches camera angles on discs with multi-angle scenes. 8 PLAY MODE (page 40) Press to display the Play Mode menu (for features such as search, repeat and program play). 9 TV/DVD (page 29) Press to switch between âÂÂTV modeâÂÂ, in which you get the picture and sound from the TVâÂÂs tuner, and âÂÂDVD modeâÂÂ, in which you get picture and sound from the recorderâÂÂs tuner (or an external input). 10 Alphanumeric buttons and CLEAR Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title selection; channel selection, and so on. The same buttons can also be used to enter names for titles, discs and so on. Use CLEAR to clear an entry and start again. 11 INPUT SELECT (page 56) Press to change the input to use for recording. 12 CHANNEL /â (page 29) Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner. 13 VIDEO Plus (page 52) Press, then use the number buttons to enter a PlusCode î programming number for timer recording. 14 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 36, 76) / TOP MENU (page 31) Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top menu if a DVD-Video disc is loaded. 15 PLAY LIST (page 78, 84) / MENU (page 31) Press to switch between Original and Play List content on VR mode discs, or display the disc menu if a DVD-Video disc is loaded. 16 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) and ENTER Used to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to select the currently highlighted option. 17 HOME MENU (page 33) Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can navigate all the functions of the recorder. 18 RETURN Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or display. DVD RECORDER STANDBY/ON ONE TOUCH COPY OPEN/CLOSE TOP MENU MENU RETURN DISC NAVIGAT OR PLAY LIST HOME MENU DISC HISTORY NAVI MARK CASE SELECTION CHP MARK EASY TIMER INPUT SELECT INPUT SELECT TV/DVD ABC AUDIO HDD DVD SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR TV DIRECT REC DISPLAY ENTER CLEAR TV CONTROL CHANNEL CHANNEL VOLUME REC PREV PA USE STOP OK CM SKIP REV SCAN PLAY FWD SCAN NEXT STEP/SLOW STOP REC REC MODE TIMER REC î î î î î î VIDEO Plus 1 2 4 8 12 15 18 3 5 13 14 16 17 19 20 23 7 21 6 11 9 22 24 10 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 24 En 19 Playback controls (page 30) î REV SCAN / FWD SCAN î (page 38) Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press again to change the speed. î PLAY Press to start playback. î PAUSE Press to pause playback or recording. î STOP Press to stop playback. CM BACK (commercial back) Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward through the audio or video playing. CM SKIP (commercial skip) Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward through the audio or video playing. î PREV / NEXT î Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/ track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu page. î STEP/SLOW î (page 39) During playback, press to start slow-motion playback; while paused, press to show the previous or next video frame. 20 Recording controls (page 28) î REC Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the recording time in blocks of 30 mins. î STOP REC Press to stop recording. REC MODE (page 47) Press repeatedly to change the recording mode (picture quality). TIMER REC (page 51) Press to set a timer recording from the standard Timer Recording screen. EASY TIMER (page 50) Press to set a timer recording from the Easy Timer Recording screen. 21 DISC HISTORY (page 89) Press to display summary information (disc name, recording time left, etc.) from the last 30 recordable discs loaded. NAVI MARK (page 37) Press to select a thumbnail picture for the current title for use in the Disc Navigator screen. CHP MARK (page 81) Press to insert a chapter marker when playing/ recording a VR mode DVD-RW disc or the HDD. 22 DISPLAY (page 33) Displays/changes the on-screen information displays. 23 TV CONTROL (page 112) After setting up, use these controls to control your TV. 24 TV DIRECT REC (page 48) Press to start recording whatever channel your TV is set to. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 25 En Chapter 4 Getting started Switching on and setting up When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you can make several basic settings using the Setup Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the clock, the internal TV tuner and the video and audio output settings. If youâÂÂre using the recorder for the first time, we strongly recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting to use the recorder. 1 Switch on your TV and set the video input to this recorder. 2 Press the î STANDBY/ON button on the remote control or the front panel to switch on. When you switch on for the first time, your TV should display the Setup Navigator screen. (If the Setup Navigator doesnâÂÂt appear, you can also access it from the Initial Setup menu; see page 99). ⢠If this recorder is connected to a compatible TV using a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable, the recorder will take a few seconds to download country, TV screen size and language information. (Check the manual that came with your TV for compatibility information.) 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to choose a language, then press ENTER . 4 Press ENTER to start setting up using the Setup Navigator. ⢠If you donâÂÂt want to use the Setup Navigator, press î (cursor down) to select Cancel , then press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator. 5 Select the Auto Channel Setting (â Auto Scanâ or âÂÂDownload from TVâÂÂ), or âÂÂDo not setâÂÂ, then press ENTER. DVD RECORDER STANDBY/ON ENTER î Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Language English français Deutsch Italiano Español Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Start Cancel Complete this setup before you start using your recorder . Please use the Initial Setup if you want to make more detailed settings. Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Auto Channel Setting Auto Scan Download from TV Do not set Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 26 En ⢠Select Do not set if you want to skip setting up the channels (because they have already been set up, for example). ⢠You can only use the Download from TV feature if you connected this recorder to your TV using a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable connected to the AV1(RGB)-TV connector, and if your TV supports this function (check your TVâÂÂs instruction manual for more details). ⢠Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to choose your country, then press ENTER. ⢠Auto-tuning channels The Auto Scan option automatically scans and sets the channel presets. ⢠Downloading channels from your TV Use the Download from TV option to download all the channels that your TV is tuned to. 6 Select âÂÂAutoâ for automatic time setting, or âÂÂManualâ to set the clock manually, then press ENTER. ⢠Auto clock setting Some TV channels broadcast time signals together with the program. This recorder can use these signals to set the clock automatically. Set âÂÂClock Set CHâ to the channel preset number that broadcasts a time signal, then move the cursor down to âÂÂStartâ and press ENTER. The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After you see that the time has been set, select Next to proceed. If the time could not be set automatically, press RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select Manual . ⢠Manual clock setting If no stations in your area are broadcasting time signals, you can set the clock manually. Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to set your time zone. You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative to GMT. Press î (cursor down) then use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂOnâ or âÂÂOffâ for summer time, then press ENTER . Select On if you are currently using summer time. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Country Selection Country UK Initial Setup T uning 11/107 Cancel Downloading Cancel Pr 5 Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Clock Setting Auto Manual Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Auto Clock Setting Date T ime Clock Set CH Pr 1 Start Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Auto Clock Setting Date T ime Clock Set CH Pr 1 Start Next Initial Setup 01 01 2004 THU 11 20 Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Manual Clock Setting T ime Zone Summer Time Off 1/ 2 England London Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator On England London Manual Clock Setting T ime Zone Summer Time 1/ 2 Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 27 En Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then press ENTER to make all the settings. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to change the value in the highlighted field. Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to move from one field to another. ⢠You can go back to the previous screen at anytime in the Setup Navigator by pressing RETURN . 7 Select the TV screen type, âÂÂStandard (4:3)â or âÂÂWide (16:9)âÂÂ. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select, then press ENTER . 8 Is this recorder connected to an AV amplifier/ receiver for digital audio? Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select Connected , or Not Connected , then press ENTER . ⢠If you select Not Connected , that completes the setup. Press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator, or select Go Back if you want to go back and start again. ⢠Select the digital audio formats your AV amplifier/ receiver is compatible with. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select Dolby Digital , Dolby Digital, DTS or PCM only , then press ENTER . ⢠Check the operating instructions that came with your AV amplifier/receiver if youâÂÂre not sure what itâÂÂs compatible with. 9 Is your AV amplifier/receiver compatible with 96 kHz PCM digital audio? Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select Compatible , Not Compatible , or DonâÂÂt Know , then press ENTER . ⢠Check the operating instructions that came with your AV amplifier/receiver if youâÂÂre not sure. 10 Press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator, or select âÂÂGo Backâ if you want to start again. That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator. Other settings you can make After setting up using the Setup Navigator, you should be ready to start enjoying your DVD recorder. ItâÂÂs possible, however, that you may want to make a couple of additional settings, depending on how the recorder is set up for terrestrial TV broadcasts. ⢠Manual channel setting â This setting lets you skip channels where there is no station, as well as manually tune to stations. See Manual CH Setting on page 100. ⢠VIDEO Plus channel setting â This setting lets you assign guide channels to ensure that the VIDEO Plus programming system works correctly. See Set VIDEO Plus CH on page 101. ⢠Setting up the remote to control your TV â You can set up the supplied remote control to control many brands of TV. See Setting up the remote to control your TV on page 112. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Manual Clock Setting 2/2 Date T ime T ime Zone Summer Time 01 01 2004 THU 00 00 England London On Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control SetSetup Navigator Setup Navigator TV Screen Size Wide (16:9) Standard (4:3) Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator AV Amp Digital Connect Connected Not Connected Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator AV Amp Compatibility Dolby Digital Dolby Digital , DTS PCM only Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator 96kHz PCM Compatible Compatible Not Compatible Don't Know Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Setup is complete! Enjoy using your DVD recorder! Finish Setup Go Back Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 28 En Selecting the hard disk or DVD for playback and recording The HDD and DVD buttons (remote control and front panel) are used to select the hard disk (HDD) or DVD for playback and recording. The indicator in the front panel display shows which is currently selected. Making your first recording This quick guide shows you how to make a basic recording of a TV program on either the HDD, or to a recordable DVD. Recording is covered in much more detail in chapter 6 ( Recording ). 1 If they arenâÂÂt already on, switch on your TV and this recorder. Press î STANDBY/ON to switch on. ⢠Make sure that the video input on your TV is set to this recorder. 2 Press HDD to record to the HDD, or DVD to record to a recordable DVD. If you choose to record to the HDD, skip to step 5 now. 3 Press î OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray. 4 Load a blank DVD-R or DVD-RW disc with the label side face-up, using the disc guide to align the disc. ⢠When you load a new, blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder will take a moment to initialize it for recording. 5 Use the CHANNEL /â buttons to select the TV channel you want to record from. ⢠You can also use the /â buttons on the front panel if the recorder is stopped. ⢠Channel presets are numbered 1âÂÂ99. ⢠If the recorder is connected to your TV using a SCART cable and your TV supports Direct Recording, itâÂÂs possible to quickly start recording whatever channel your TV is tuned to. See Direct recording from TV on page 48 for detailed instructions. 6 Press î REC to start recording. ⢠By default, the recording will be in SP (standard play) mode, which will give you around two hours of recording from a blank DVD disc. ⢠You can pause recording by pressing î PAUSE . Press î REC or î PAUSE again to restart recording. 7 When you want to stop recording, press î STOP REC. Playing back your recording The TV program you just recorded should be on the HDD or DVD disc as a single title with one or more chapters. ⢠Press î PLAY to start playback. If you want to stop playback before the end of the recording, press î STOP . HDD DVD î î DVD RECORDER STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE HDD DVD CHANNEL REC STOP PLAY STOP REC î î î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 29 En Using the built-in TV tuner Changing TV channels There are three different ways to select TV channels. Note that you canâÂÂt change the TV channel during playback, recording or during recording standby. ⢠CHANNEL /â buttons on the remote ⢠Number buttons on the remote â For example, to select channel 4, press 4 then ENTER ; for channel 34, press 3 , 4 , ENTER . ⢠/â buttons on the front panel Note ⢠Channel presets are numbered 1âÂÂ99. ⢠You canâÂÂt change TV channels during playback or recording, or while in recording standby. Changing audio channels You can change the audio channel of the broadcast or external input signal. ⢠Press AUDIO to change the audio. The current audio channel is displayed on-screen. ⢠If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM Select on page 103) is set to NICAM and you are watching a NICAM broadcast, you can switch between NICAM and Regular (non-NICAM) audio. ⢠If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also select the language. ⢠You can also select the language for a non-NICAM bilingual broadcast. ⢠When watching a recording made from an external input with Bilingual recording selected (see External Audio on page 103), you can switch the audio channel between left ( L ), right ( R ) or both ( L R ). Note ⢠When recording to the HDD, or in Video mode, or in VR mode using the FINE / MN32 setting, only one channel of a bilingual broadcast is recorded. In this case, decide which language you want to record before recording by setting the Bilingual Recording setting (see Bilingual Recording on page 104). Switching between TV and DVD When the recorder is stopped or recording you can choose whether to have the audio/video from the built-in TV tuner (or external input) play on your TV (âÂÂDVD modeâÂÂ), or watch the channel that the TV is currently set to (âÂÂTV modeâÂÂ). During playback or when a menu is being displayed on- screen, the sound and video is always routed to your TV and is unaffected by the TV/DVD mode setting. Note that the recorder must be connected to your TV using a SCART cable to be able to use this feature. ⢠Press TV/DVD to switch between TV mode and DVD mode. ENTER CHANNEL AUDIO NICAM Regular NICAM A NICAM B Regular NICAM A B A (L) B (R) A B (L R) LR L R TV/DVD DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 30 En Basic playback This section shows you how to use your recorder for playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of video from the HDD. More playback features, such as repeat and program play, are covered in the next chapter. Important ⢠Throughout this manual, the term âÂÂDVDâ means playback-only DVD-Video discs and DVD-R/RW. If a function is specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it is specified. ⢠Some DVD-Video discs donâÂÂt allow certain playback controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This is not a malfunction. 1 Press î STANDBY/ON to switch on. Also turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the correct video input. 2 Press HDD to playback from the HDD, or DVD to play a DVD. If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 5 below. 3 Press î OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray. 4 Load a disc. Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if youâÂÂre loading a double- sided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to play face down). ⢠If you want to play a DTS audio CD, please first read the note on page 32. 5 Press î PLAY to start playback. ⢠If youâÂÂre playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc menu may appear when you start playback. Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor) buttons and ENTER to navigate DVD disc menus, and the number buttons and ENTER for Video CD menus. ⢠When playing video from the HDD, playback will automatically stop after the end of a title is reached. ⢠See the following sections for more details on playing specific kinds of discs. 6 To stop playback, press î STOP. 7 When youâÂÂve finished using the recorder, eject the disc and switch the recorder back into standby. ⢠To open/close the disc tray, press î OPEN/CLOSE . Remove the disc before putting the recorder into standby. ⢠Press î STANDBY/ON to switch the recorder into standby. DVD RECORDER STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE ENTER STOP PLAY î î î î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 31 En Playing DVD discs The table below shows the basic playback controls for DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs. Playing from the HDD The table below shows the basic playback controls when playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD). P ress to start playback. If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play- back starts from the place last stopped. P ress to stop playback. Y ou can resume playback from the same point by pressing î PLAY . (P ress î STOP again to cancel the resume function.) P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. P ress to start scanning. P ress repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. P ress to skip to previous/next chapter/title. (Y ou can also use the front panel / â but- tons to do this during playback.) Except VR mode: During playback, enter a chapter number then press ENTER to skip directly to that chapter within the currently playing title. On some discs, you can also use the num- ber buttons to select numbered items in the disc menu. VR mode only: During playback, enter a title number then press ENTER . All: P ress CLEAR to clear a number entr y and start again. (Commercial back/skip) Each press skips backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of 10 minutes forward or three minutes back. During playback, press to start slow- motion playback. P ress repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. P ress to display the âÂÂtopâ menu or menu of a DVD-V ideo disc (these are often the same). Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVD- Video disc menus; press ENTER to select items. P ress to return to the previous level of a DVD-V ideo disc menu. PLAY STOP PA USE REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT CLEAR ENTER SKIP CM BACK STEP/SLOW î î TO P MENU MENU ENTER RETURN P ress to start playback. If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play- back starts from the place last stopped. Playback automatically stops after the end of a title is reached. P ress to stop playback. Y ou can resume playback from the same point by pressing î PLAY . (P ress î STOP again to cancel the resume function.) P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. P ress to start scanning. P ress repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. P ress to skip to previous/next chapter/title. (Y ou can also use the front panel / â but- tons to do this during playback.) During playback, enter a title number then press ENTER to skip directly to that title. P ress CLEAR to clear a number entr y and start again. (Commercial back/skip) Each press skips backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of 10 minutes forward or three minutes back. During playback, press to start slow- motion playback. P ress repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. PLAY STOP PA USE REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT CLEAR ENTER SKIP CM BACK STEP/SLOW î î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 32 En Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs The table below shows the basic playback controls for audio CDs, and WMA/MP3 files. Note ⢠If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/ receiver with a digital connection. Noise will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is selected using the AUDIO button (see Switching audio channels on page 44). ⢠Scanning doesnâÂÂt work with WMA tracks. Playing Video CD/Super VCDs The table below shows the basic playback controls for Video CD/Super VCDs. Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short) menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you load them and display a menu on-screen from where you can select what to watch. P ress to start playback. P ress to stop playback. P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. CD and MP3 only: P ress to start scanning. P ress again to increase the scanning speed. (There are two scan speeds; the current scan speed is shown on-screen.) P ress to skip to previous/next track (or folder for WMA/MP3 disc). (Y ou can also use the front panel / â buttons to do this during playback.) During playback, enter a track number then press ENTER to skip directly to that track. P ress CLEAR to clear a number entr y and start again. PLAY STOP PA USE REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT CLEAR ENTER P ress to start playback. Video CD only: If RESUME is displayed on- screen, playback starts from the place last stopped. P ress to stop playback. Video CD only: Y ou can resume playback from the same point by pressing î PLAY . (P ress î STOP again to cancel the resume function.) P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. P ress to start scanning. P ress repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. P ress to skip to previous/next track. (Y ou can also use the front panel / â buttons to do this during playback.) When a PBC menu is displayed, press to display the previous/next page. During playback, enter a track number then press ENTER to skip directly to that track. P ress CLEAR to clear a number entr y and start again. While a PBC menu screen is displayed, use to select numbered menu items. Video CD only: Each press skips backward/ forward progressively up to a maximum of 10 minutes forward or three minutes back. Note that this function doesnâÂÂt work when playing in PBC mode. During playback, press to start slow- motion playback. P ress repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame (forward direction only). P ress to display the disc menu of a Video CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode. PLAY STOP PA USE REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT CLEAR ENTER SKIP CM BACK STEP/SLOW î î RETURN DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 32 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 33 En Note ⢠When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and program play are not available. You can play a PBC Video CD /Super VCD in non-PBC mode by pressing î to start playback instead of î PLAY . Using the Home Menu From the Home Menu screen you can access all the features of the recorder. Press HOME MENU to display the Home Menu screen: Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor) buttons followed by ENTER to select the option you want. To exit the Home Menu, press HOME MENU . Note ⢠Some options in the Home Menu may be grayed out sometimes, indicating that they are not available at the present time. For example, the Photoviewer option is grayed out unless there is a disc loaded that contains JPEG image files. Displaying disc information on- screen You can display various on-screen information about the disc loaded or the HDD. 1 Press DISPLAY repeatedly to display/change the on-screen information. ⢠Press once to show the HDD and removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the status of just the currently selected playback/ recording device (HDD or removable disc). ⢠The on-screen display automatically disappears after 150 minutes. 2 To hide the information display, press DISPLAY repeatedly until it disappears. The example displays below are a guide only; actual displays vary according to the disc loaded, etc. Home menu options Timer Recording (page 49) Disc Setup (page 92) Disc Navigator (page 36, page 76) Initial Setup (page 97) Copy (page 61) Video/Audio Adjust (page 94) Disc History (page 89) Play Mode (page 40) PhotoViewer (page 90) DV Record (DVR-520H/ 720H only) (page 57) Timer Recording Disc Navigator Copy Disc History PhotoViewer Disc Setup Initial Setup V ideo/Audio Adjust Play Mode DV Record DVR -520H/720H screen RETURN HOME MENU ENTER HDD DVD DISPLAY î î î î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 33 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 34 En HDD and removable disc activity display Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity. Use the HDD and DVD buttons to switch between the two kinds of display. The example displays below show high-speed copying from HDD to DVD, and HDD chase playback. Stop display 1 1 DVD-RW Original / Play List If a VR mode disc is loaded, this shows whether playback is currently set to Original or Play List . During preview playback of the Copy List, this shows Copy List . 2 Disc type and mode Shows the disc type ( HDD , DVD-R , DVD-RW , CD , etc.), and the disc mode for recordable DVD, if applicable ( VR or Video ). 3 Recording mode and time Shows the current recording mode ( FINE , SP , LP , etc.), and the total recording time of the disc. 4 Resume Shows Resume if playback can be resumed from the last place stopped. 5 Recording time remaining Shows the approximate recording time left on the disc in the current recording mode. 6 Preset name and number Shows the preset name and preset number for the currently selected channel. 7 Audio mode Shows the broadcast audio mode for the current channel preset ( Mono , Stereo , etc.). 8 Copy control information Shows recording restrictions of the current channel program. 9 Disc name Shows the disc name. (For CDs, this area shows playable files other than CD audio tracks; for example, Multi-format: WMA/MP3 .) 10 Finalized Shows Finalized if a recordable DVD is finalized. 11 TV/DVD mode Shows the current mode of the recorder (see Switching between TV and DVD on page 29). Stop display 2 1 Date and time 2 Number of titles/tracks on disc For a VR mode DVD-RW, the number of Original and Play List titles are shown separately. Play display 1 Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD) HDD Remain 10h35m Stop Remain âÂÂhâÂÂâÂÂm Stop Hi-Speed Copy 0h08m left DVD-RW Video Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD) HDD Remain 10h35m Chase Play Rec Remain 0h52m Stop DVD-RW Video Relative pla yback position Recording time î Stop DVD-RW VR Original Disc Name : Comedy shows DVD Mode Finalized Resume FINE (1h00m/DVD) Rem. 0h35m Copy Once St ereo ABC Pr 1 1 2 8 7 10 9 11 3 6 4 5 î Stop DVD-RW VR Original Titles TV Mode : Original 99 Lock Disc : On Play List 15 14:52 MON 15/11/2004 Copy Once Ster eo ABC Pr 1 1 2 î Play DVD-R Video DVD Mode Title T otal Chapters 15 3âÂÂ2 0. 00. 15 0. 11. 52 5 1 2 3 4 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 34 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 35 En 1 Number of chapters in title 2 Current title and chapter number (For CD/Video CD/Super VCD, shows current track; for WMA/MP3, shows current folder and track; for JPEG disc, shows current folder and file.) 3 Elapsed title time (For CD, WMA, MP3, Super VCD, shows elapsed track time; for Video CD, shows elapsed disc time.) 4 Total running time of title 5 Angle indicator Lights during multi-angle scenes. Play display 2 1 Chase playback, simultaneous record/playback , copy, disc back-up Indicates that recording, copying or back-up is in progress. 2 Elapsed chapter time 3 Total running time of chapter 4 Data transfer rate Shows the current data rate being read from the disc. 5 Copy protected material (!) Shows â ! â if the playback material is copy-once protected. Recording display 1 Current title number 2 Elapsed recording time 3 Timer recording start and stop times Shows the start and stop times if the current recording is a timer recording. 4 Remaining recording time available Shows the amount of space left on the disc in the current recording mode. 5 Recording mode Shows the current recording mode ( FINE , SP , LP , etc.), and the total recording time of the disc. Note ⢠When using the simultaneous play and record feature, the display shows information for playback only. ⢠During real-time copy, the copy source playback information is displayed. ⢠Data transfer rate shows the amount of video and audio information recorded on the disc. It is not an indication of picture/audio quality. ⢠The Video mode disc displays become the same as a DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized. ⢠The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis is calculated based on a 12cm/4.7GB disc at the displayed record setting. ⢠Recording and playback times for TV recordings are approximately 0.1% shorter than the actual time. This is because of the slightly different frame rates of TV broadcasts versus DVD. ⢠The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time display when the disc is paused. ⢠Copy Once or CanâÂÂt Record messages may appear in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that the broadcast TV program contains copy control information. î Play DVD-R Video Title Name 21/11 Football match : C hapter T otal îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî C hapter Time 3âÂÂ2 0. 00. 15 ! 0. 00. 21 0. 01. 52 4.32Mbps Hi-Speed Copy 5 2 3 4 1 î Rec DVD-R Video FINE (1h00m/DVD) Rem. 0h35m 21:00 â 22:00 30 . 00. 15 Co py Once DVD Mode St ereo ABC Pr 1 5 1 2 3 4 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 35 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 36 En Chapter 5 Playback Introduction Most of the features described in this chapter make use of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î / î (cursor buttons) and ENTER . To go back one level from any screen, use the RETURN button. Remember also that the button guide at the bottom of every screen shows which buttons do what. Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the HDD, DVD discs, Video CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3 discs and CDs, although the exact operation of some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. The following icons are provided to help you quickly identify which instructions you need for which kind of disc. Any kind of DVD, DVD-R or DVD-RW Commercially produced DVD or finalized Video mode DVD-R/RW Video mode DVD-R/RW (unfinalized) VR mode DVD-RW HDD Audio CD Video CD Super VCD WMA or MP3 files MP3 files ⢠Some DVD-Video discs donâÂÂt allow certain playback controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This is not a malfunction. ⢠When playing Video CDs, some functions, such as making a program list, are not available in PBC mode. Stop the disc first, then start playback by pressing î . ⢠For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see The PhotoViewer on page 90. Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc. Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc and start playback. Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from the on-screen display. Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD or WMA/ MP3 disc, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR , which takes you straight to the Disc Navigator screen. 2 Select what you want to play. Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to highlight items and ENTER to select. DVD DVD-Video Video mode VR mode HDD CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 MP3 DISC NAVIGAT OR HOME MENU HDD DVD ENTER DVD-Video CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 Timer Recording Disc Navigator Copy Disc History PhotoViewer Disc Setup Initial Setup V ideo/Audio Adjust Play Mode DV Record DVR -520H/720H screen DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 36 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 37 En Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc Navigator looks slightly different. The screen for DVD discs shows the titles on the left and the chapters on the right. Select a title, or a chapter within a title. The screen for CDs and Video CDs shows a list of tracks. The screen for WMA/MP3 discs shows a list of folders and tracks. Select a folder or a track within a folder. Playback starts after you press ENTER . ⢠For discs that contain both CD-Audio tracks and WMA/MP3 tracks, you can switch the playback area between CD and WMA/MP3 . This can only be done while the disc is stopped. Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD When used with a recordable disc or the HDD, the Disc Navigator gives you access to all the editing features of this recorder as well as the ability to browse and play titles. See also Editing on page 76 for more on editing recordable discs. 1 Press HDD or DVD to select the hard disk drive or the DVD drive. 2 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from the on-screen display. Alternatively, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR to go straight to the Disc Navigator screen. 3 Select âÂÂPlayâ from the menu options. Press ENTER to move to the thumbnails area of the screen. 4 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select a title to play. 5 Press ENTER to start playback. Note ⢠ItâÂÂs not possible to use the Disc Navigator when playing a Video CD in PBC mode. ⢠Another way to find a particular place on a disc is to use the time search mode. See Search Mode on page 40. Changing the thumbnail picture for a title You can change the thumbnail picture that appears for each title in the Disc Navigator screen using the NAVI MARK button. DVD Title (1-10) Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 Chapter (1-003) Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Disc Navigator CD T rack (1-10) T rack 01 T rack 02 T rack 03 T rack 04 T rack 05 T rack 06 T rack 07 T rack 08 T otal Time 0.58.25 Disc Navigator WMA/MP3 Folder (1-03) 01.Rock 02.Pop 03.Dance T rack (1-004) 001.Intro 002.Escape 003.Everything Y ou Say 004.What I Do Disc Navigator VR mode Video mode HDD 1/1 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Undo DVD 123 456 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Lock Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Video Mode VR mode Video mode HDD NAVI MARK ENTER PA USE PLAY STEP/SLOW î î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 37 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 38 En 1 Start playback of the title you want to change the thumbnail for. 2 Press NAVI MARK anywhere in the title to make the displayed picture the thumbnail for that title. ⢠For greater control over the exact frame you want to use, you can use the î PAUSE and/or slow-motion/ frame advance/reverse controls ( î / î ). Navigating discs and the HDD During playback you can easily jump to another title, chapter or track on a disc using the number buttons on the remote. 1 During playback use the number buttons to enter a chapter number within the current title. For example, for chapter 6, press 6 ; for chapter 24, press 2 , then 4 . ⢠To clear and start again, press CLEAR . 2 Optionally: Press ENTER. ⢠Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback will jump to the new chapter. 1 During playback, use the number buttons to input a title number. For example, for title 6, press 6 ; for title 24, press 2 , then 4 . ⢠To clear and start again, press CLEAR . 2 Optionally: Press ENTER. ⢠Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback will jump to the new title. 1 During playback, use the number buttons to input a track number. For example, for track 6, press 6 ; for track 24, press 2 , then 4 . ⢠To clear and start again, press CLEAR . 2 Optionally: Press ENTER. ⢠Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback will jump to the new track. Scanning discs You can fast scan discs at various speeds, forwards or backward. 1 During playback, press î or î to start reverse or forward scanning. ⢠The scanning speed is shown on-screen. 2 Press the same button repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. ⢠Forward: SCAN 1 î SCAN 2 î SCAN 3 î SCAN 4 ⢠Reverse: Reverse play î SCAN 1 î SCAN 2 î SCAN 3 î SCAN 4 ⢠Forward/Reverse: SCAN 1 î SCAN 2 3 To resume normal playback, press î PLAY. Note ⢠Depending on the disc, reverse playback may not be smooth. ⢠Sound can be heard while scanning audio CDs (analog output only). ⢠Scanning is not possible with WMA files. ALL ENTER CLEAR DVD-Video Video mode VR mode HDD CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 REV SCAN PLAY FWD SCAN DVD HDD CD Video CD S uper VCD MP3 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 38 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 39 En ⢠No subtitles are displayed while scanning DVD-Video discs. ⢠Analog and digital sound is output when scanning DVDs with Dolby Digital or Linear PCM sound on forward SCAN 1 . (Linear PCM is output from the optical digital output.*) No sound is output when using other scan speeds. * Except during chase playback and simultaneous recording/playback. ⢠No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, except on forward SCAN 1 . (Linear PCM is output from the optical digital output during forward SCAN 1 ). ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc. Playing in slow motion You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs and video on the HDD can be played in slow motion in either direction, while Video CD/Super VCDs can only be played forwards in slow motion. 1 Press î or î to start slow motion reverse or forward playback. 2 Press the same button repeatedly to change the slow motion speed. 3 To resume normal playback, press î PLAY. Note ⢠The picture quality during slow motion playback is not as good as during normal playback and depends on the disc being played. ⢠Reverse slow-motion playback may not be as smooth as forward and may be better with some discs than others. ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc. ⢠No sound is output during slow-motion playback. Frame advance/frame reverse You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc or the HDD frame-by-frame. With Video CD/Super VCDs, you can only use frame advance. 1 During playback, press î PAUSE. 2 Press î or î to back up or advance one frame. ⢠Hold down î or î for continuous frame reverse/ frame advance. 3 To resume normal playback, press î PLAY. Note ⢠The picture quality when using frame reverse is not as good as frame advance. ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc. DVD HDD Video CD S uper VCD PLAY STEP/SLOW î î SL OW 1/16 SL OW 1/8 SL OW 1/2 SLOW 1/4 DVD HDD Video CD S uper VCD PA USE PLAY STEP/SLOW î î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 39 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 40 En The Play Mode menu The Play Mode menu gives you access to search functions, repeat and program play functions. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use the Play Mode features with Video CD/ Super VCDs playing in PBC mode, or while a DVD disc menu is being displayed. For other restrictions, see the following sections. 1 Press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode menu screen. ⢠You can also access the Play Mode menu from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU ). 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) and ENTER to navigate. ⢠To exit the Play Mode menu, press HOME MENU or PLAY MODE . Search Mode The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a specified point in a disc by time or by title/chapter/folder/ track number. 1 Select âÂÂSearch Modeâ from the Play Mode menu. 2 Select one of the search options. 3 Use the number buttons to enter a title/chapter/ folder/track number or the search time (in hours, minutes & seconds). Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25 minutes into the current title, press 2, 5, 0, 0 . For 1 hour and 15 minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0 . Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 45 minutes into the disc, press 4, 5, 0, 0 . Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For example, for track 6, press 6 . Alternatively, you can use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/ down) buttons. 4 Press ENTER. Tip ⢠You can often select what you want to watch on a DVD disc from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to display the disc menu. Note ⢠When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input. ⢠Time search doesnâÂÂt work with Super VCDs. A-B Repeat The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points (A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is played over and over. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use A-B Repeat with WMA/MP3 or Super VCD discs. ALL PLAY MODE ENTER CLEAR PLAY Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program Time Search Title Search Chapter Search ALL Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program Time Search Title Search Chapter Search Input Time 0.01.00 Play Mode DVD CD Video CD HDD DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 40 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 41 En 1 During playback, select âÂÂA-B Repeatâ from the Play Mode menu. 2 With âÂÂA (Loop Start)â highlighted, press ENTER at the point you want the loop to start. After setting the loop start point, the highlight will automatically move down to B(Loop End) . 3 With âÂÂB (Loop End)â highlighted, press ENTER at the point you want the loop to end. Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and plays the loop round and round. ⢠When playing a DVD-Video/Video mode DVD, or from the HDD, the start and end points of the loop must be in the same title. 4 To resume normal playback, select âÂÂOffâ from the A-B Repeat menu. ⢠You can also press CLEAR to cancel A-B Repeat play if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed. Note ⢠If you switch camera angles while using A-B Repeat with a DVD-Video disc, A-B repeat is canceled. Repeat play There are various repeat play options, depending on the kind of disc loaded, or if youâÂÂre using the HDD for playback. ItâÂÂs also possible to use repeat play together with program play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the program list (see Program play below). 1 Select âÂÂRepeatâ from the Play Mode menu. 2 Select a repeat play mode. ⢠For VR mode DVD discs, select Repeat Disc , Repeat Title or Repeat Chapter (or Repeat Off ). ⢠For HDD, DVD-Video and Video mode DVD discs, select Repeat Title or Repeat Chapter (or Repeat Off ). ⢠For CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select Repeat Disc or Repeat Track (or Repeat Off ). ⢠For WMA/MP3 discs, select Repeat Disc , Repeat Folder or Repeat Track (or Repeat Off ). 3 To resume normal playback, select âÂÂRepeat Offâ from the Repeat Play menu. ⢠You can also press CLEAR to cancel repeat play if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed. Note ⢠If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is canceled. ⢠If there is a program list, you can also select Repeat Program to repeat the program list. Program play This feature lets you program the play order of titles/ chapters/folders/tracks on a disc. 1 Select âÂÂProgramâ from the Play Mode menu. 2 Select âÂÂInput/Edit Programâ from the list of program options. The Program edit screen that appears depends on the kind of disc loaded. Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program A (Loop Start) B (Loop End) Off Play Mode ALL Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program Repeat Disc Repeat Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Off Play Mode VR mode DVD-Video Video mode HDD CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 DVD-Video CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program Input/Edit Program Start Program Play Cancel Program Play Erase Program List Play Mode DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 41 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 42 En On the left side is the program list, then to the right is a list of titles (DVD), folders (WMA/MP3), or tracks (CD, Video CD/Super VCDs). On the far right is a list of chapters (DVD) or tracks (WMA/MP3). 3 Select a title, chapter, folder or track for the current step in the program list. For a DVD disc, you can add a whole title, or a chapter within a title to the program list. ⢠To add a title, select the title. ⢠To add a chapter, first highlight the title, then press î (cursor right)and select a chapter from the list. For a CD or Video CD/Super VCD, select a track to add to the program list. For a WMA/MP3 disc, you can add a whole folder, or a track within a folder to the program list. ⢠To add a folder, select the folder. ⢠To add a track, first highlight the folder, then press î (cursor right) and select a track from the list. After pressing ENTER to add the title/chapter/folder/ track, the step number automatically moves down one. ⢠To insert a step into the program list, highlight the step number where you want to insert another step, then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After pressing ENTER , all the subsequent steps move down one. ⢠To delete a step from the program list, highlight the step you want to delete, then press CLEAR . 4 Repeat step 3 to build up a program list. A program list can contain up to 24 titles/chapters/ folders/tracks. 5 To play the program list, press î PLAY. Program play remains active until you turn off program play (see below), erase the program list (see below), eject the disc or switch off the recorder. Tip ⢠To save your program list and exit the program edit screen without starting playback, press HOME MENU or PLAY MODE . ⢠You can change the program list by selecting Input/ Edit Program from the Play Mode Program menu. ⢠During program play, press î to skip to the next program step. ⢠Press CLEAR during playback to switch off program play (if no menu OSD, such as the Disc Navigator, is displayed). Press while stopped to erase the program list. Other Program play functions As well as creating and editing a program list, you can start program play, cancel program play, and erase the program list from the Play Mode menu. 1 Press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂProgramâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Select a program play function. ⢠Input/Edit Program â See above ⢠Start Program Play â Starts playback of a saved program list ⢠Cancel Program Play â Turns off program play, but does not erase the program list ⢠Erase Program List â Erases the program list and turns off program play Note ⢠When playing a program list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the program list may be sometimes be played, depending on the disc. ⢠You can use repeat play with program play. Start playback of the program list then select Program Repeat from the Repeat Play Mode menu (see Repeat play on page 41). Step 01. 01-003 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Title (1-38) Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 Chapter (1-004) Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Chapter 004 Program Step 01. 04 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. T rack (1-12) T rack 01 T rack 02 T rack 03 T rack 04 T rack 05 T rack 06 T rack 07 T rack 08 To tal Time 0.00.00 Program Step 01. 01-003 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Folder (1-06) 01. Pop 02. Electronic 03. Jazz 04. Indie 05. Rock 06. Classic T rack (1-010) 001. T rack 01 002. T rack 02 003. T rack 03 004. T rack 04 005. T rack 05 006. T rack 06 007. T rack 07 008. T rack 08 Program DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 42 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 43 En Displaying and switching subtitles Some DVD discs have subtitles in one or more languages; the disc box will usually tell you which subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle language during playback. Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle options. 1 Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a subtitle option. The current subtitle language is shown on-screen and in the front panel display. 2 To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE then CLEAR. Note ⢠Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to access. ⢠To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 106. Switching DVD soundtracks When playing a DVD disc recorded with two or more soundtracks (often in different languages), you can switch the soundtrack during playback. Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack options. ⢠Press AUDIO repeatedly to select an audio soundtrack. Note ⢠The sound may drop out for a few seconds when switching soundtracks. ⢠Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to access. ⢠To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 105. ⢠Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS soundtrack, connect this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV amp/ receiver with built-in DTS decoder via the digital output. See Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver on page 19 for connection details. DVD-Video SUBTITLE CLEAR Subtitle: 1/2 English The toucan lives in tropical forests DVD-Video AUDIO Audio : 1/2 Dolby Digital 2/0CH DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 43 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 44 En Switching audio channels For VR mode content recorded with bilingual audio, you can switch between left ( L ) channel, right ( R ) channel, or both ( L R ). When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you can switch between stereo, just the left channel or just the right channel. Some Super VCD discs have two soundtracks. With these discs you can switch between the two soundtracks as well as individual channels in each. 1 To display/switch the audio channel, press AUDIO repeatedly. The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated on- screen. ⢠L R â Both channels (default) ⢠L â Left channel only ⢠R â Right channel only ⢠Stereo â Stereo (default) ⢠1/L â Left channel only ⢠2/R â Right channel only ⢠1 Stereo â Soundtrack 1 / Stereo (default) ⢠1 L â Soundtrack 1 / Left channel ⢠1 R â Soundtrack 1 / Right channel ⢠2 Stereo â Soundtrack 2 / Stereo ⢠2 L â Soundtrack 2 / Left channel ⢠2 R â Soundtrack 2 / Right channel Note ⢠When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital î PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 104) or listen via the analog outputs if you need to switch the audio channel. Switching camera angles Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or more anglesâÂÂcheck the disc box for details: it should be marked with a icon if it contains multi-angle scenes. When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same icon appears on screen to let you know that other angles are available (this can be switched off if you preferâÂÂsee Angle Indicator on page 111). ⢠To switch the camera angle, press ANGLE. ⢠The angle number is displayed on-screen. ⢠If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the new angle. ⢠Repeat play is canceled if you change the angle while repeat playback is active. Note ⢠You can also change the angle from some DVD-Video disc menus. Press TOP MENU to access. VR mode CD V ideo CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 AUDIO VR mode CD Video CD WMA/MP3 S uper VCD DVD-Video ANGLE DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 44 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 45 En Chapter 6 Recording About DVD recording This recorder can record on both DVD-R and DVD-RW media. The main difference between the two is that DVD- R discs can only be recorded once, while DVD-RW can be recorded, erased and re-recorded many times. A further difference between the two disc types is that only DVD-RW can be initialized for VR mode recording, which offers much more comprehensive editing functions compared to Video mode recording. The big advantage, however, of Video mode is its compatibility with standard DVD players, most of which will not play VR mode DVD-RW discs (see also the notes below). While DVD-R discs can only be recorded using the Video mode, you can initialize a DVD-RW disc for Video or VR mode recordings. Once initialized (any previous content is erased in this operation), all recordings on that disc will be in the chosen recording mode. Important ⢠You cannot play, edit or record on unfinalized DVD-R/ RW discs recorded in Video mode on other DVD recorders. (Likewise, unfinalized Video mode discs recorded on this recorder are not playable on other players/recorders.) ⢠This recorder cannot record onto CD-R or CD-RW discs. ⢠Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the recorder. ⢠Fingerprints and small scratches on a disc can affect playback and/or recording performance. Please take proper care of your discs. ⢠Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM, NTSC and PAL-60, you canâÂÂt mix multiple TV line systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also Input Line System on page 98. Note ⢠Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode DVD-RW discs. Check the operating instructions for your player for VR mode compatibility information. ⢠The maximum number of titles that can be recorded on a DVD-R/RW disc is 99. ⢠The maximum number of chapters recordable on a DVD-R/RW disc is 999. ⢠No more recording is possible on a disc that already contains the maximum number of chapters/titles. About HDD recording Recording to the internal hard disk drive (HDD) is basically similar to recording to a VR mode DVD-RW disc. You have the full choice of recording quality options, including the manual mode, and of course you can record, erase and re-record as many times as you like. The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can store many hours of video on it, even in the higher quality recording modes. To help you organize the contents, the HDD is divided into four groups. You can name and use these groups as you likeâÂÂfor example, you might have a group for movies, another for TV shows, and one for camcorder recordings. Important ⢠It is possible to record both PAL and NTSC titles on the HDD. Before recording, you need to make sure that the Input Line System setting (page 98) matches the TV line system of the source youâÂÂre recording. Note ⢠The maximum number of titles that can be recorded on the HDD is 250. ⢠You can record up to 102 hours of video (in EP mode) on the internal 80GB (gigabyte) hard disk (HDD) on the DVR-420H/ 520H, or up to 204 hours on the 160GB DVR-720H. ⢠The maximum number of chapters per title recordable on the HDD is 99. ⢠No more recording is possible on the HDD after the maximum number of titles has been reached. ⢠The maximum continuous recording time is six hours. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 45 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 46 En Recording time and picture quality There are four preset recording quality modes: ⢠FINE â Highest quality setting, gives about one hour of recording time on a DVD disc. ⢠SP (Standard Play) â Default quality, sufficient for most applications, gives about two hours of recording time on a DVD. ⢠LP (Long Play) â Slightly lower video quality, but doubles the recording time on a DVD to around four hours. ⢠EP (Extended Play) â Use when maximum recording time is most important; EP gives you around six hours of recording time on a DVD disc. In addition to these settings, you can access 32 different recording quality/time settings when manual recording mode is on (see Manual Recording on page 107), giving you precise control over the recording. When setting a timer recording there is a further option, AUTO , which maximizes the recording quality for the space available on the disc loaded at the time of recording. (If recording to the HDD, the recording quality is maximized to fit on to a DVD disc.) In all except the FINE / MN32 modes, sound is recorded in two channel Dolby Digital format. When set to FINE / MN32 , sound is recorded in high quality, uncompressed Linear PCM format. If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording in Video mode or to the HDD, or in VR mode on the FINE / MN32 setting, use the Bilingual Recording setting (page 104) to select the A/L or B/R audio channel to record before recording starts. ⢠Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM, NTSC and PAL-60, you canâÂÂt mix multiple TV line systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also Input Line System on page 98. Note ⢠Note that all recording times (both here and those shown by the recorder) are only approximate. This is because of the way that the video is recorded; you may get slightly more or slightly less, depending on what youâÂÂre recording. Restrictions on video recording ⢠You cannot record copy-protected video using this recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video discs and some satellite broadcasts. If copy- protected material is encountered during a recording, recording will pause automatically and an error message will be displayed on-screen. ⢠Video that is âÂÂcopy-once onlyâ can only be recorded on the HDD or a DVD-RW disc in VR mode (see below). ⢠When recording a TV broadcast or through an external input, you can display copy control information on screen. (see Displaying disc information on-screen on page 33). CPRM CPRM is a copy protection system with scramble system regarding the recording of âÂÂcopy onceâ broadcast programs. CPRM stands for Content Protection for Recordable Media . This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that you can record copy-once broadcast programs, but you cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM recordings can only be made on CPRM-compatible DVD- RW (ver. 1.1 or higher) discs formatted in VR mode or on the HDD. DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that are specifically compatible with CPRM. Recording equipment and copyright Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners. ⢠This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U. S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 46 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 47 En Setting the picture quality/recording time Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set the picture quality/recording time. There are four standard settings available, which allow you to choose a balance between picture quality and recording time. ItâÂÂs also possible to create a fifth, âÂÂmanualâ setting for picture quality/recording time. Before you can select this, however, you will need to set the Manual Recording option in the Initial Settings menu (see Manual Recording on page 107). ⢠Press REC MODE repeatedly to select a recording setting. ⢠FINE â Fine picture quality ⢠SP â Standard play ⢠LP â Long play ⢠EP â Extended play ⢠MN â Manual (available only when manual recording is on) The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and shown on-screen together with the recording time for a blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the approximate remaining recording time for that disc is also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting (see On Screen Display on page 98) is Off then this information is not displayed.) Basic recording from the TV Follow the instructions below to record a TV program. Recording starts immediately and continues until the disc is full or you stop the recording. 1 Press HDD or DVD to record to the hard disk drive or a recordable DVD respectively. ⢠If youâÂÂre recording to DVD, load a recordable disc (if you load a new blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder takes a short while to initialize the disc). 2 Use the CHANNEL /â buttons to select the TV channel to record. The front panel display shows the channel number: ⢠While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the number buttons on the remote to select the channel. (For channel 6, press 6 then ENTER ; for channel 24, press 2, 4 then ENTER ) VR mode Video mode HDD REC MODE VR mode Video mode HDD DVD RECORDER AUDIO HDD DVD ENTER CHANNEL REC PA USE STOP REC REC MODE î 23 30 7 Channel preset PR DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 47 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 48 En ⢠If the recorder is stopped, you can also use the /â buttons on the front panel to select the channel number. 3 Use the REC MODE button to set the picture quality/recording time. ⢠See Setting the picture quality/recording time above for detailed instructions. 4 Use the AUDIO button to select the audio channel to record. See Changing audio channels on page 29 for more on this. ⢠When recording in VR mode, if a broadcast is bilingual, both audio channels are recorded, allowing you to switch the audio channel on playback. The only exception to this is when the picture quality is set to FINE / MN32 , in which case you do need to select the audio channel before recording. 5 Press î REC to start recording. If you want to set a recording end time, press the î REC button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30 minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the front panel display. When the recording ends, the recorder automatically switches into standby if no other operation is being performed. ⢠To cancel the set recording time, press î REC . ⢠If you want to pause recording at any time, press î PAUSE . Press again to restart the recording. (If recording to the HDD or in VR mode, a new chapter is started after recording restarts) 6 To stop the recording, press î STOP REC. ⢠If you set the recording time in the previous step, you can still stop the recording anytime by pressing î STOP REC . ⢠Recording will stop automatically when there is no more space on the HDD/DVD, or after six hours of HDD recording (whichever is sooner). Tip ⢠During recording you can turn on/off the SCART loop through function. During recording, press the front panel button to switch to SCART THRU (loop through on), or â to switch to SCART NORM (loop though off). Note that you canâÂÂt switch loop through on if recording from the AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER) or AV1(RGB)-TV connectors. Also, loop through is automatically reset to off after recording has finished. Direct recording from TV If you connected this recorder to your TV using a SCART cable, and your TV supports Direct Recording, you can record whatever is currently being shown on the TV without having to worry about what channel preset the recorder is on. Check the instructions that came with your TV if youâÂÂre not sure whether your TV supports this feature. 1 If necessary, load a recordable disc. 2 Set the picture quality/recording time using the REC MODE button. 3 Press TV DIRECT REC to start recording. If you want to set a recording time, press the î REC button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30 minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. You can see the recording time on-screen and in the front panel display. When the recording ends, the recorder automatically switches into standby if no other operation is being performed. ⢠To cancel the set recording time, press î REC . ⢠If you want to pause recording at any time, press î PAUSE . Press again to restart the recording. (If recording to the HDD or in VR mode, a new chapter is started after recording restarts) 4 To stop the recording, press î STOP REC. ⢠If you set the recording time in step 3 , you can still stop the recording anytime by pressing î STOP REC . ⢠Recording will stop automatically when there is no more space on the HDD/DVD, or after six hours of HDD recording (whichever is sooner). Tip ⢠You can press TV DIRECT REC while the recorder is in standby to switch on and immediately start recording. ⢠Please note that you canâÂÂt record from another component (VCR, etc.) that is connected by a SCART cable to the AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER) connector using the TV Direct Recording feature. TV DIRECT REC REC PA USE STOP REC REC MODE î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 48 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 49 En Setting a timer recording Using the timer recording features you can program up to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer recording programs can be set to record just once, every day, or every week. You can set the recording quality for your timer recording in the same way as for a regular recording, but with the added option of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the recording quality for the space available on the disc (if recording to DVD), or to fit on to a blank DVD disc (if recording to HDD). You can set timer recordings to record to a recordable DVD or to the hard disk drive. For regular (daily or weekly) HDD timer recordings that you donâÂÂt need to keep, you can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to automatically replace the previous timer recording with the new one. Note that when you use this feature, the previous recording made on that timer program will be replaced by the next one, regardless of whether you have watched it yet or not. You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set (see Optimized Rec on page 108 for more on this). Finally, if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but there isnâÂÂt a recordable DVD loaded at the time of the recording, the Recovery Recording feature will automatically record the program to the HDD for you. This recorder is compatible with VPS (Video Programming System) and PDC (Program Delivery Control) systems used by many TV stations to ensure that a timer recording catches the whole program even when the program is not running to schedule. Up to eight timer programs can be set with VPS/PDC on. Important â¢A timer recording canâÂÂt be set if: â Auto Start Recording is in progress. â There are already 32 timer programs waiting to be recorded. ⢠Timer recording will not start if: â The recorder is already recording. â A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized. ⢠Timer recording will start when the operation preventing timer recording has finished. ⢠If a recordable DVD that doesnâÂÂt support simultaneous playback and recording (see Simultaneous recording and playback on page 55) is playing when a DVD timer recording is due to start, playback will automatically stop to allow the recording to start. ⢠The timer indicator ( ) lights in the front panel display when the timer is active. If the indicator is blinking it means that (for a DVD timer recording) there is no disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not recordable (for an HDD timer recording it means that the HDD is not recordable). ⢠Timer recordings have higher priority than the Auto Start Recording function (see Automatic recording from a satellite tuner on page 56). A timer recording will interrupt an Auto Start Recording. (Auto Start Recording will resume after the timer recording has finished.) ⢠Approximately two minutes before a timer recording is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording standby. In timer recording standby you cannot use some functions. ⢠The maximum length for timer recordings made to the HDD is 24 hours. However, because one title is limited to six hours, recordings over six hours will be spread over two or more titles. Note that there will be a break in the recording of a few seconds between titles. ⢠VPS/PDC may not work with all broadcast stations in your country/area. Check with the stations for compatibility. VR mode Video mode HDD DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 49 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 50 En Easy Timer Recording As the name suggests, Easy Timer Recording makes setting up a timer recording as simple as possible. 1 Press EASY TIMER. Alternatively, you can also access from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU and select Timer Recording then Easy Timer Recording ). 2 Set the TV channel and recording quality. ⢠Use the CHANNEL /â buttons to set the channel you want to record. ⢠Use the REC MODE button to set the recording quality. Press repeatedly to switch between FINE , SP , LP , EP and AUTO (and MN if manual recording mode is on). ⢠DVD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets the best recording quality for the space available on the disc loaded at the time of recording. ⢠HDD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets the best recording quality that would fit on to a blank DVD disc. ⢠Press DVD to record to DVD disc, or HDD if you want to record to the hard disk drive. 3 Use îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to move the cursor to the recording start date and time on the grid. ⢠You can move the cursor forward or back an hour at a time using the î and î buttons. Each row of the grid is one day (you can set the timer recording for up to a month in advance). Each column is a 15 minute interval. The darker area represents time that has already passed and canâÂÂt therefore be selected. The lighter area is time thatâÂÂs available. 4 Press ENTER to set the start time. The start date and time is displayed in the middle of the screen. ⢠You can go back and reset the start time if you need to by pressing RETURN . 5 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) to move the cursor to the recording end time on the grid. As you move the cursor around the grid, an arrow stretches from the start time to the current cursor position, representing the length of the recording. A recording of up to six hours can be set. DVD RECORDER RETURN HOME MENU EASY TIMER HDD DVD ENTER CHANNEL REC MODE îÂÂî 8: 00 9: 00 10: 00 11: 00 12: 00 13: 00 14: 00 13/12 14/12 15/12 Easy Timer Recording FINE Pr 7 13/12 MON --:-- 9:30 HDD CHANNEL / â REC MODE HDD/DVD Easy Timer Recording 8: 00 9: 00 10: 00 11: 00 12: 00 13: 00 14: 00 13/12 14/12 15/12 11:45 FINE Pr 7 13/12 MON HDD - - : - - Current time Recording start time CHANNEL / â REC MODE HDD/DVD 13/12 14/12 15/12 Easy Timer Recording FINE Pr 7 HDD 11:45 13:45 13/12 MON Recording start time Recording end time 11: 00 12: 00 13: 00 14: 00 15: 00 16: 00 17: 00 CHANNEL / â REC MODE HDD/DVD DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 50 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 51 En 6 Press ENTER to set the end time. 7 Select âÂÂYesâ to set the timer recording and exit, or âÂÂNoâ to go back to the timer recording screen. ⢠You can check the timer recording details you just set from the main timer recording screen (see Standard timer recording below). Note ⢠You canâÂÂt use VPS/PDC with Easy Timer Recording. Use the standard or VIDEO Plus timer recording methods if you want to use VPS/PDC. Standard timer recording The timer recording screen you can see all the timer programs already set, clear programs and set up new ones. 1 Press TIMER REC to display the Timer Recording screen. You can also access the Timer Recording screen from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU , select Timer Recording , then Timer Recording (View) ). This screen shows all the timer programs currently set. ⢠Each row is for one timer recording program, with the date and time information, channel, recording mode, DVD or HDD and the VPS/PDC setting. ⢠The amount of free space available on the HDD and the currently loaded recordable DVD is shown towards the bottom of the screen. ⢠In the lower-right corner, the number of timer programs already set and the number that use VPS/ PDC, is shown next to Tmr Pgms . ⢠If there are more than eight timer programs already set, press NEXT î to switch page (go back using the PREV î button). ⢠You can also clear a timer program before itâÂÂs started (before the recorder enters timer recording standby) by highlighting it and pressing CLEAR . 2 Select âÂÂNew Inputâ to set a new timer program, then press ENTER. 3 Enter the timer recording settings. Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a field; use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to change the value. ⢠Date â Choose a date up to one month in advance, or select a daily or weekly program. ⢠Start â Set the recording start time. ⢠Stop â Set the recording end time (maximum length of a timer recording is 24 hours for HDD recording or six hours for DVD). ⢠CH â Choose a channel (1âÂÂ99, excluding skip channels), or one of the external inputs from which to record. ⢠Mode â Select FINE , SP , LP , EP or AUTO (See Recording time and picture quality on page 46). If Manual Recording is on, then you can also select the MN setting. ⢠Rec to â Select HDD for hard disk recording or DVD for DVD recording. Select HDD for Auto Replace Recording (daily or weekly timer recording only). ⢠Group â Select a record group (for HDD recording only). ⢠VPS/PDC â The VPS/PDC system automatically adjusts the recording time so that even if a program is not running to schedule you wonâÂÂt miss it. For VPS/ PDC to work properly, you must input the correct announced time and date of the program you want to record. Up to eight timer recordings can be set with HOME MENU ENTER CLEAR PREV NEXT TIMER REC îÂÂî MON 13/12 7:00 8:00 Pr 3 FINE HDD Off EVERY TUE 9 :00 10:00 Pr 5 FINE HDD On New Input Date Start Stop CH Mode Rec to VPS/PDC 1/1 Timer Recording HDD Remain 10h20m(FINE) DVD Remain 0h43m(FINE) VPS/PDC Date Start Stop CH Rec Mode 12/12 SUN 10 00 -- -- Pr 7 SP OFF Timer Recording Program Set Ttl Name Input Rec to Group HDD GROUP 1 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 51 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 52 En VPS/PDC on. Note that VPS/PDC may not work with every station and that Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/ PDC is on. ⢠Ttl Name Input â Optionally, you can enter a name for the recording up to 32 characters. (Highlight Program Set then press î (cursor down) to access this option.) 4 After entering all the timer recording information, highlight âÂÂProgram setâ and press ENTER. The timer recording list screen is displayed again. The timer program you just input appears in the list. The rightmost column shows various timer recording status messages: ⢠Standby is displayed when the recorder is in timer recording standby. ⢠Recording is displayed when a timer recording is in progress. 5 To exit the timer recording screen, press HOME MENU. Note ⢠For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 108) is set to On (and VPS/ PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality then the Recovery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead. ⢠If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully. ⢠If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start, the new timer recording will not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of the older two programs will be erased. ⢠If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer recording is due to start for it to work correctly. For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch the recorder into standby. Tip ⢠Stations that use VPS/PDC typically include VPS/ PDC information in the teletext TV guide pages. Please refer to these when setting your timer recording. Timer recording using the VIDEO Plus î programming system This system makes programming timer recordings very simple. Most TV guides publish PlusCode programming numbers with their program details. If you want to make a timer recording of a program, you just input the corresponding code. The date, start, stop and channel settings are made automatically. All you have to do is tell the recorder the recording mode, and whether itâÂÂs a once-only recording or a regular recording. 1 Press âÂÂVIDEO Plus â to display the VIDEO Plus program screen. You can also access this screen from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU , select Timer Recording , then VIDEO Plus ). ⢠Use the number buttons to enter the PlusCode programming number. (To clear the last digit entered, press CLEAR .) HOME MENU HDD DVD VIDEO Plus ENTER CLEAR REC MODE îÂÂî to input 3 9 9 2 4 09 PlusCode# Rec Mode Rec Times VIDEO Plus MN21 Once Daily Weekly REC MODE to change to change level to change VPS/PDC Off îÂÂî to change HDD DVD Rec to HDD to change DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 52 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 53 En ⢠Press REC MODE to select FINE , SP , LP , EP or AUTO (See Recording time and picture quality on page 46). If Manual Recording is on, then you can also select the MN setting. ⢠Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select the Once , Daily or Weekly recording option. ⢠Press HDD to record to the hard disk drive, or DVD to record to a DVD. ⢠Use the î and î buttons to switch VPS/PDC On or Off . 2 After making the settings, press ENTER. The program details are shown at the bottom of the screen for a few seconds then the screen is automatically exited. ⢠If you havenâÂÂt set up the guide channels (or at least the guide channel for the PlusCode programming number that you entered), the recorder will prompt you to enter the channel number that the TV program is showing on. Tip ⢠You can check the timer program settings by pressing TIMER REC to display the timer recording screen. VIDEO Plus programming with the power off You can enter a PlusCode programming number when the recorder is in standby. Note that the recording is always made to the HDD. If you want to record to a DVD disc, youâÂÂll need to switch on the power and use the full VIDEO Plus program screen. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use this feature until you have set up the guide channels. See Set VIDEO Plus CH on page 101. ⢠You canâÂÂt change the recording mode. ⢠You canâÂÂt program daily or weekly timer recordings. 1 Press âÂÂVIDEO Plus âÂÂ. The front panel display shows the current recording mode and prompts you to enter the PlusCode programming number. 2 Use the number buttons to enter the PlusCode programming number. ⢠To clear the last digit entered, press CLEAR . ⢠Use the PREV î / NEXT î button to switch VPS/ PDC on/off. With VPS/PDC on, the front panel VPS/ PDC indicator lights. (Note that a maximum of 8 timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC on.) 3 Press ENTER. The display shows the timer settings: Date î Start time î End time î HDD and Recording channel. ⢠If CODE ERROR appears in the display, check that the PlusCode programming number is correct and that the guide channel is set (see Set VIDEO Plus CH on page 101), then set the timer recording again. ⢠If CANâÂÂT SET appears in the display, it means that although you entered a valid PlusCode programming number, the program has already finished. ENTER CLEAR PREV NEXT îÂÂî VIDEO Plus PL U SC O D E 29 3 24 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 53 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 54 En Extending a timer recording in progress You can extend a timer recording beyond the programmed end time in two different ways. This can be useful if a broadcast program overruns, for example. Moving the end time by 30-minute blocks 1 During timer recording, press and hold î REC for three seconds. The timer indicator disappears from the front panel display. 2 Press î REC repeatedly to extend recording in 30 minute increments. Programming a new end time Note that it is only possible to program a new end time for a timer recording when VPS/PDC is off. 1 During timer recording, press TIMER REC to display the Timer Recording screen. You can also access the Timer Recording screen from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU , select Timer Recording , then Timer Recording (View) ). 2 Use the î (cursor up) button to highlight the current timer recording (âÂÂRecordingâ is shown in the âÂÂVPS/PDCâ column), then press ENTER. A screen showing details of the timer recording appears. From this screen, only the recording stop time can be changed. 3 Set a new Stop time for the timer recording. Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select the hour or minute field, then use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to change the time. 4 Press ENTER to set the new time and exit the screen. Recording will continue until the new stop time is reached. Canceling and stopping a timer recording in progress After a timer recording has started, you can cancel the program (but continue recording), or stop recording completely if you need to. 1 During timer recording, press and hold î REC for three seconds. Only the program is canceled (the timer indicator disappears); recording continues so that you can manually stop recording whenever you like. 2 When you want to stop recording completely, press î STOP REC. HOME MENU ENTER CLEAR REC PREV NEXT STOP REC TIMER REC î New Input Date Start Stop CH Mode Rec to VPS/PDC 12/13 MON EVERY TUE 7:00 9:00 8:00 10:00 Pr 3 Pr 5 FINE FINE HDD HDD Recording On 1/1 Timer Recording HDD Remain --h--m(FINE) DVD Remain 0h43m(FINE) VPS/PDC Date Start Stop CH Rec Mode 13/12 SA T 7 00 8 00 Pr 3 FINE OFF Timer Recording Program Set Ttl Name Input Rec to Group HDD GROUP1 REC ST OP REC î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 54 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 55 En Preventing use of the recorder before a timer recording (child lock) You can make all the front panel and remote control buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is useful when you set a timer recording and want to make sure that the timer settings are not changed before recording has finished. 1 If the recorder is on, switch it into standby. 2 Press and hold î STOP on the front panel for three seconds to lock the controls. The front panel display briefly shows LOCK . If any buttons are pressed on the remote or front panel, LOCK is briefly displayed again. ⢠To unlock the recorder, press and hold î STOP on the front panel for three seconds until the display shows UNLOCK . ⢠To cancel a timer recording when the recorder is locked, first unlock the recorder (see above), then press and hold î REC for three seconds. Timer recording FAQ Frequently Asked Questions ⢠Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesnâÂÂt start recording! Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable, not locked (see Lock Disc on page 92), and that there are fewer than 99/250 titles already on the DVD/HDD. ⢠The recorder wonâÂÂt let me enter a timer program! Why not? You canâÂÂt enter a timer program if the clock isnâÂÂt set. ⢠What happens when two or more timer programs overlap? Basically, the program with the earlier recording start time has priority. However, the recorder will start recording the program with the later start time after the earlier program is finished. If two programs have the same times (but different channels, for example), the program set most recently takes priority. If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programs that are programmed to start at the same time, then the program that actually starts first takes priority. Simultaneous recording and playback A feature called Chase Play makes it possible to watch a recording in progress (DVD or HDD) from the start of the recording (as in, playback is âÂÂchasingâ the recording). For example, perhaps you have to miss the first 30 minutes of a movie on TV; you can start recording, then start watching the movie, from the beginning, while the recorder is still recording 30 minutes ahead of you. In fact, youâÂÂre not just limited to watching the recording in progress; you can watch anything else already on the DVD or HDD by selecting it from the Disc Navigator screen (see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD on page 37). Important ⢠Note that you must use a DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 / 2x or Ver. 1.2 / 4x disc to be able to use this feature. ⢠You may not be able to use this feature with a DVD-RW disc that was first initialized on another recorder. ⢠During recording, press î PLAY to start playback from the beginning of the current recording, or press DISC NAVIGATOR and select another title to play from there. You can use all the usual playback controls, such as pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip. ⢠To stop playback, press î STOP (recording will continue). ⢠To stop recording, press î STOP REC (playback will continue). Note ⢠You canâÂÂt start playback immediately after recording starts. ⢠When scanning a DVD, no sound is output if the recorder is also recording the DVD (see Scanning discs on page 38). ⢠You canâÂÂt use this feature during Auto Start Recording, or in Auto Start Recording standby (the AUTO indicator is lit in the front panel display). ⢠You canâÂÂt use simultaneous playback and recording while copying or backing up. ⢠During recording or in timer recording standby, you canâÂÂt play an HDD title, DVD or Video CD/Super VCD disc if the Input Line System setting doesnâÂÂt match the TV line system of the disc/HDD title (see also VR mode HDD DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 55 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 56 En Input Line System on page 98). Also, during simultaneous recording and playback, if the TV line system of the playback track/title changes then playback will automatically stop. Recording from an external component You can record from an external component, such as a camcorder or VCR, connected to one of the recorderâÂÂs external inputs. 1 Make sure that the component you want to record from is connected properly to the DVD recorder. See Chapter 2 ( Connecting up ) for connection options. 2 Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly to select one of the external inputs to record from. There are two analog inputs and a DV digital input (DVR- 520H/720H only). The current input is shown on-screen and in the front panel display: ⢠AV2/L1 â Input 1/Auto Start Rec ⢠L2 â Input 2 (front panel) ⢠DV â DV input/output (front panel) (DVR-520H/720H only) Check that the Audio In settings for External Audio , Bilingual Recording and DV Input are as you want them (see Audio In settings on page 103). ⢠If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or stretched), adjust on the source component or your TV before recording. 3 Set up the recorder. ⢠Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 47 for detailed information. ⢠Press HDD to record to the hard disk drive, or DVD to record to a DVD. 4 Press î REC when youâÂÂre ready to start recording. ⢠DVR-520H/720H only: The recorder will only start recording from the DV IN/OUT jack if there is a valid signal. Recording will also pause if the signal is interrupted during recording. Note ⢠If your source is copy-protected using CopyGuard, you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on video recording on page 46 for more details. Automatic recording from a satellite tuner If you have a satellite tuner or some other kind of set top box connected to the AV2/L1 input, you can have the recorder start and stop recording automatically with the timer settings of the connected component. (If the other component doesnâÂÂt have a built-in timer, youâÂÂll need to use it with an external timer unit.) After setting up for Auto Start Recording, this recorder starts recording when it detects a signal from the other component. When the signal ceases, the recorder stops recording. Important ⢠It takes a little while for this recorder to switch on and start recording after detecting a signal. Please bear this in mind when setting the timer. ⢠If Auto Start Recording is set, it will not start if another timer recording is in progress. ⢠Timer recordings take precedence over Auto Start Recording. Auto Start Recording will stop if a timer recording is due to start. After the timer recording has finished, Auto Start Recording will resume. VR mode Video mode HDD INPUT SELECT HDD DVD ENTER CLEAR REC REC MODE î î î îÂÂî HDD DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 56 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 57 En 1 Set the timer for the satellite receiver (or other component), then switch it into standby (if necessary). Check the manual that came with the receiver if youâÂÂre not sure how to do this. 2 Check that the âÂÂAudio Inâ settings for âÂÂExternal Audioâ and âÂÂBilingual Recordingâ are as you want them. See Audio In settings on page 103 for more on these settings. 3 Set up the recorder. ⢠Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 47 for detailed information. 4 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂTimer RecordingâÂÂ, then âÂÂAuto Start RecordingâÂÂ. 5 Select âÂÂYesâ to switch Auto Start Recording on, or âÂÂNoâ to switch off. 6 Switch the recorder into standby. The AUTO indicator in the front panel display lights. The recorder will automatically switch on and start recording when the other component comes on. Recording stops when the external component switches off. ⢠To cancel Auto Start Recording, press î STANDBY/ ON while the recorder is in standby. The AUTO indicator goes off. ⢠To cancel Auto Start Recording once recording has already started, press î REC for three seconds, then î STOP REC . ⢠When a timer recording is in progress ahead of Auto Start Recording, some functions, such as extending the timer recording and chase play, are not available. Press the front panel button for three seconds to cancel Auto Start Recording without affecting the timer recording. The AUTO indicator goes off. Note ⢠Auto Start Recordings are always on the HDD. Auto Start Recording to DVD is not possible. ⢠You canâÂÂt set Auto Start Recording when: ⢠the recorder is recording or in timer recording standby. ⢠the HDD is not recordable. ⢠the HDD already contains the maximum number of titles (250). ⢠AV2/L1 In is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1 In on page 102). Recording from a DV camcorder (DVR-520H/720H only) You can record from a DV camcorder connected to the DV IN/OUT jack on the front panel of this recorder. Using the recorderâÂÂs remote, you can control both the camcorder and this recorder. Before recording, make sure that the audio input for the DV IN/OUT jack is setup (see DV Input (DVR-520H/720H only) on page 104). Important ⢠The source signal must be DVC-SD format ⢠Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this recorderâÂÂs remote. ⢠If you connect a second recorder using a DV cable, you cannot control the second unit from this one. ⢠You canâÂÂt control this unit remotely from a component connected to the DV IN/OUT jack. ⢠You canâÂÂt record date and time information from DV cassette. VR mode Video mode HDD RETURN HOME MENU HDD DVD ENTER CLEAR PA USE STOP REV SCAN PLAY FWD SCAN STEP/SLOW REC MODE î î î îÂÂî DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 57 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 58 En ⢠During DV recording, if a part of the tape is blank, or has copy-protected material on it, this recorder will pause recording. Recording will restart automatically when there is a recordable signal. However, if there is more than 10 seconds of blank tape, the recorder will stop recording and the camcorder should stop (depending on the camcorder). ⢠For best results when recording from a DV camcorder to this recorder, we recommend cueing the camcorder to the place you want to start recording from and setting the camcorder to play- pause. 1 Make sure your digital camcorder is connected to the front panel DV IN/OUT jack. Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode. 2 Set up the recorder. ⢠Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 47 for detailed information. ⢠Make sure a recordable disc is loaded if you want to record to DVD. 3 From the Initial Settings menu, check that the DV audio input is setup as you require. See DV Input (DVR-520H/720H only) on page 104 for more on this. ⢠Check also that the Audio In settings for External Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In settings on page 103). 4 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDV Recordâ from the menu. ⢠DV recording only works when the digital camcorder is in VTR mode with a tape loaded. 5 Select âÂÂRecord to HDDâ or âÂÂRecord to DVDâ to record to the hard disk drive or a recordable DVD respectively. 6 Find the place on the camcorder tape that you want to start recording from. For best results, pause playback at the point from which you want to record. ⢠Depending on your camcorder, you can use this recorderâÂÂs remote to control the camcorder using the î , î , î , î , î , î and î buttons. 7 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select âÂÂStart Recâ and press ENTER. ⢠Recording is automatically paused if the recorder detects no signal, or a copy-protected signal. Recording restarts when there is a non-copy- protected signal. ⢠You can pause or stop the recording by selecting Pause Rec or Stop Rec from the on-screen display. You cannot control the camcorder from this remote control during recording. ⢠If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder, the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not be recorded. Use the pause button on your camcorder instead and recording will start immediately. ⢠HDD and DVD-RW (VR Mode) only: A chapter marker is inserted every time there is a break in the timecode on the DV tape. This happens when the recording is stopped or paused then restarted, for example. ⢠While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording screen using the HOME MENU or RETURN button. Note ⢠Depending on the connected camcorder, you may not be able to control it using the remote control supplied with this recorder. ⢠If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You can switch the audio manually from the External Audio setting (page 103). ⢠See also DV-related messages on page 117 if you encounter an error while using the DV IN/OUT jack. Frequently Asked Questions â¢I canâÂÂt get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder! Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also make sure that what youâÂÂre trying to record is not copy-protected. If it still doesnâÂÂt work, try switching off the camcorder then switch back on. ⢠ThereâÂÂs a picture, but no sound! Try switching the DV Input setting (see DV Input (DVR-520H/720H only) on page 104) between Stereo 1 and Stereo 2 . HDD SP (2h00m/DVD) 1h40m Remain î Stop 1.02.22 î Stop Control with these buttons Start Rec Pause Rec Stop Rec DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 58 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 59 En Recording from the DV output (DVR-520H/720H only) You can record non-copy-protected material from the hard disk drive or from a DVD to a camcorder connected to the DV IN/OUT jack. 1 Connect the camcorder to the DV IN/OUT jack of this recorder. 2 Select the HDD or DVD for playback. 3 Find the place you want to start recording from. 4 Start recording on the camcorder. 5 Play the source material. Playing your recordings on other DVD players Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs recorded in Video mode. A number of players (including many Pioneer models) can also play DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode, finalized or not. Check the manual that came with the player to check what kinds of discs it will play. When you finalize a Video mode disc, a title menu is created from which you can select titles when you play the disc. There are a number of different styles of title menu to choose from to suit the content of the disc. All the title menus are navigated in the usual way, pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then using the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) followed by ENTER to select titles and start playback. Finalizing a disc Finalizing âÂÂfixesâ the recordings in place so that the disc can be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive. Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you want it before you finalize the disc as it canâÂÂt be changed afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc Name on page 92 before starting the steps below. Important ⢠Once youâÂÂve finalized a disc recorded in Video mode, you canâÂÂt edit or record anything else on that disc. However, the finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe âÂÂundoneâÂÂ; see Undo Finalize on page 93 for how to do this. â¢A VR mode disc can still be recorded and edited on this recorder even after finalizing. 1 Load the disc you want to finalize. Make sure that the recorder is stopped before proceeding. 2 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc SetupâÂÂ. 3 Select âÂÂFinalizeâÂÂ. 4 Select âÂÂFinalizeâ from the finalize options, then âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. 5 For Video mode discs only, select a title menu style, then select âÂÂYesâ to start finalization or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. The menu you select will be the one that appears when the âÂÂtop menuâ is selected on any DVD player. ⢠Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature. These discs will have only a text title menu when finalized on this recorder. 6 The recorder will now start finalizing the disc. During finalization: ⢠If the finalization process is going to take more than around four minutes, you can press ENTER to cancel. Around four minutes before completion, the option to cancel disappears. VR mode Video mode HDD VR mode Video mode VR mode Video mode Finalize Undo Finalize Next Screen Start Disc Setup Basic Initialize Finalize T I T L E M E N U TITLE MENU Finalize DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 59 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 60 En ⢠How long finalization takes depends on the type of disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR mode can take up to one hour to finalize. A disc recorded in Video mode can take up to 20 minutes. Note ⢠If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize the disc. See Input Line System on page 98 for how to change the recorderâÂÂs setting. Initializing a DVD-RW disc When you first load a blank disc, the recorder will initialize it automatically for recording. You can also manually initialize DVD-RW discs. You can initialize a disc for either Video mode recording or VR mode recording. Important ⢠Initializing a disc will erase everything recorded on it. Make sure there is nothing on the disc that you want to keep! ⢠You may not be able to re-initialize a disc in a different format if it was originally initialized on an older DVD recorder. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc SetupâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂInitializeâÂÂ. 3 Select âÂÂVideo Modeâ or âÂÂVR Modeâ from the initialize options. 4 Select âÂÂStartâÂÂ. It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc. Note ⢠By default, the recorder initializes blank DVD-RW discs for VR mode recording. See DVD-RW Auto Init. on page 108 if you want to change the default to Video mode. ⢠If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize it for Video mode recording. DVD-RW VR Mode Video Mode Start Start Basic Initialize Finalize Disc Setup Initializing Disc 1 min left Pr 1 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 60 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 61 En Chapter 7 Copying and back-up Introduction Use the copying features of this recorder to: ⢠Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to a DVD ⢠Make a DVD copy of a recording on the HDD to play in another player. ⢠Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing. ⢠Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD. The simplest method of copying is to use the One Touch Copy feature. Using this you can simply copy the title thatâÂÂs currently playing from HDD to DVD, or the other way around. For more complicated copying tasks you can make a Copy List which specifies precisely what needs to be copied. A Copy List is similar to a VR mode Play List in many ways, and youâÂÂll find that the Copy List commands are similar to those available for editing a Play List. A message showing that copying has finished is displayed after copying. If the recorder is inactive and no button is pressed (remote or front panel) then the recorder will automatically go into standby after 20 minutes. High-speed copying Copying between DVD and HDD is a completely digital process and therefore involves no loss of quality in the audio or video. This means that you can transfer back and forth without having to worry about the quality getting worse with each copy âÂÂgenerationâÂÂ. It also means that copying can be carried out at the maximum speed possible. When copying from HDD to DVD, the speed of copying depends on the recording mode and the kind of DVD disc youâÂÂre using. The table at the bottom of the page shows the minimum copying time for one hour of material. Note ⢠Not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying. Check with the disc manufacturer for compatibility. ⢠There may be cases where even 2x/4x/8x compatible discs do not copy at full speed. ⢠High-speed copying is not possible when using discs initialized on another recorder. ⢠The table below shows disc brands that have been tested for 8x speed writing compatibility with this recorder. (As of April, 2004) Maker Sony ThatâÂÂs JVC Fujifilm TDK Maxell Verbatim Ritek Note that all times in the above table are approximate. *1 Compatible with single speed recording only *2 Compatible with 2x speed recording *3 Compatible with 4x speed recording *4 Compatible with 8x speed recording. Note that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being recorded. DVD disc type Rec mode DVD-R V er . 2.0 DVD-R V er . 2.0/4x *3 DVD-R V er . 2.0/8x *4 DVD-RW V er . 1.1 *1 DVD-RW V er . 1.1/2x *2 DVD-RW V er . 1.2/4x *3 EP 10 mins. 5 mins. 2.5 mins. 1.25 mins. LP 15 mins. 7.5 mins. 4 mins. 2 mins. SP 30 mins. 15 mins. 7.5 mins. 4 mins. FINE 60 mins. 30 mins. 15 mins. 8 mins. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 61 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 62 En Real-time copying Real-time copying is also possible, with the advantage that you can manually set a different recording mode from the original. For example, you can record a title originally recorded in FINE mode in SP mode. When real-time copying from the HDD to a Video mode DVD, the chapter markers in the original material are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at intervals, according to the Auto Chapter (Video) setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 108). Frame accuracy and copying The Frame Accurate setting (see Frame Accurate on page 108) does not affect the actual video content on the HDD, but it does affect what can be copied and whether high-speed copying can be used. When Frame Accurate is set to Off , high-speed copying can generally be used to copy titles in the Copy List using a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc in VR or Video mode. However, copy-once protected material (see Restrictions on copying below) canâÂÂt be added to the Copy List, and the divide points in edited titles may be out by as much as 0.5 seconds when compared to the original. When Frame Accurate is On , you can add copy-once protected titles to the Copy List and divide points in edited titles are maintained accurately. However, depending on the content of the Copy List and the disc, it may not be possible to use high-speed copying. Restrictions on copying Some video material is copy-once protected. This means that it can be recorded to HDD, but it canâÂÂt then be freely copied again. If you want to transfer copy-once protected material from HDD to DVD, youâÂÂll need to use a VR mode DVD-RW disc compatible with CPRM Ver. 1.1 or higher (see CPRM on page 46 for more on this). Only one instance of a copy-once protected title can be added to the Copy List, and after itâÂÂs been copied, the title is erased from the HDD (it is therefore not possible to copy a locked title that is copy-once protected). You can identify copy-once protected material during playback by displaying disc information on-screen. If the current title is copy-once protected, an exclamation mark ( ! ) is shown (see Play display 2 on page 35). Copyright Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners. One Touch Copy* (HDD to DVD) The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing title (or currently selected title in the Disc Navigator) from the HDD to DVD. The whole title is copied, regardless of where in the title you start copying. The recorder copies at the maximum speed possible. For One Touch Copy to work, make sure that a recordable DVD-R/RW disc is loaded. * See also Copyright above. ⢠During HDD playback, press ONE TOUCH COPY to copy the current title to DVD. The front panel display indicates that the title is being copied. Playback continues while copying. Note ⢠Title name, chapter markers, as well as thumbnail picture markers (Navimark) for the Disc Navigator, are also copied. However, if you copy to a Video mode DVD-R/RW, only the first 32 characters of a name are copied. ⢠The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same positions as the original when recording on to a Video mode disc. ⢠You canâÂÂt use the One Touch Copy function to copy a title if any part of the title is copy-once protected. â¢A title that contains mixed aspect ratios canâÂÂt be copied to a Video mode disc. Use a VR mode DVD- RW disc for this type of material. ⢠Low resolution ( EP or LP , or MN1 â 18 ) widescreen material canâÂÂt be copied to a Video mode disc. Use a VR mode DVD-RW disc for this type of material. One Touch Copy* (DVD to HDD) One Touch Copy from DVD to HDD copies a single title to the HDD in real time. You can copy the currently playing title or the currently selected title in the Disc Navigator. When you start copying, playback jumps back to the start of the title, then continues through to the end of the title, when recording automatically stops. The copy will be made in the recording mode ( FINE , SP , etc.) that is currently set. * See also Copyright above. ONE TOUCH COPY HDD DVD î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 62 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 63 En ⢠During DVD playback, press ONE TOUCH COPY to copy the current title to HDD. Playback starts again from the beginning of the current title. The front panel display and an on-screen display indicate that the title is being copied. Note ⢠The maximum title length for copying is six hours. ⢠Title name and chapter markers are also copied, except when copying from a finalized Video mode disc. ⢠Thumbnail picture markers (Navimark) and chapter markers for the Disc Navigator are copied, but their position in the copy may be slightly changed from the original. ⢠If some part of the title being copied is copy- protected, copying will start, but the copy-protected portions will not be copied. Canceling One Touch Copy You can cancel a One Touch Copy once itâÂÂs started. ⢠Press and hold ONE TOUCH COPY for more than a second. Copying is canceled and the video already copied is erased. Note ⢠If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R copy, the space available for recording does not return to the pre- copy figure. Copying from HDD to DVD* From the HDD to DVD Copy screen you can build up a Copy List of titles to copy to DVD. From this screen you can also edit chapters so that the titles appear as you want them on your finished DVD. * See also Copyright on page 62. Important ⢠The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time. ⢠The Copy List is erased if the Frame Accurate setting is changed in the Initial Settings menu (see Frame Accurate on page 108), or if the Input Line System setting is changed (see Input Line System on page 98). ONE TOUCH COPY HDD DVD î Conf List HDD HDD to DVD Copy Add Erase Ttl Name Divide Combine DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List All To tal 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Currently selected HDD title Title that cannot be added to Copy List HDD Groups Titles in the selected HDD Group Information f or the selected title Co py List titles Running time of the Co py List Co py List menu options 16:00 Sun 8/11 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 63 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 64 En ⢠Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 112) will also erase the Copy List. 1 Make sure that thereâÂÂs a recordable DVD disc loaded. 2 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂCopyâÂÂ. 3 Select âÂÂHDD î DVDâÂÂ. The HDD to DVD Copy List screen appears. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to highlight the command you want from the menu options on the left, then press ENTER . Most commands require you then to select a title (or chapter) or location from the thumbnail views area of the screen. Use the î / î (cursor left/right) followed by ENTER to do this. ⢠When in the thumbnails area of the screen, use the PREV ( î ) and NEXT ( î ) buttons to display the previous/next page if there are more titles/chapters than will fit on the screen. ⢠As you highlight different thumbnails, information about the title/chapter is shown in the central area of the screen. Press DISPLAY to change the information displayed. ⢠Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on the left from the thumbnail area of the Copy List screen. ⢠When selecting HDD titles, you can display titles from a particular HDD group by pressing î (cursor up), then using the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons and ENTER to select a group. Press î (cursor down) to get back to the HDD title thumbnail area. HDD to DVD Copy List menu options Use the following commands when making an HDD to DVD Copy List: ⢠Add â Add titles from the HDD to the Copy List (see page 65). ⢠Erase â Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see page 66). ⢠Title Name ( Ttl Name ) â Name or rename a title in the Copy List (see page 66). ⢠Divide â Divide a title in the Copy List into two (see page 66). ⢠Combine â Combine two adjacent titles in the Copy List into one (see page 67). ⢠Preview â Check the content of a title in the Copy List (see page 67). ⢠Move â Change the order of titles in the Copy List (see page 67). ⢠Erase All â Erase the Copy List (see page 68). ⢠Chapter Edit ( Chpt Edit ) â Edit chapters within a Copy List title (see page 68): ⢠Erase â Erase a chapter. ⢠Divide â Divide a chapter into two. ⢠Combine â Combine two chapters into one. ⢠Move â Change the chapter order. ⢠Preview â Check the chapter content. ⢠Erase Section (Erase Sec) â Erase a section of a title in the Copy List (see page 70). ⢠Confirm List ( Conf List ) â Confirm the Copy List and go to the recording settings screen (see Recording the Copy List below). RETURN HOME MENU DISPLAY ENTER PREV NEXT Timer Recording Disc Navigator Copy Disc History PhotoViewer Disc Setup Initial Setup V ideo/Audio Adjust Play Mode DV Record DVR -520H/720H screen Conf List HDD HDD to DVD Copy Add Erase Ttl Name Divide Combine DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/1 Copy List All To t a l 0h00m 2 3 4 D VD Copy 1 2 3 4 All DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 64 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 65 En Recording the Copy List After putting together your Copy List, youâÂÂre ready to record it. 1 Select âÂÂConf Listâ to display the Copy List settings screen. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select the Recording Mode. ⢠High-Speed Copy â The Copy List is copied at the same recording quality as the original. (See page 61 for more information on high-speed copying.) ⢠FINE , SP , LP , EP , MN â The Copy List is copied at the specified recording quality in real-time. (Note that if you copy at a higher quality setting than the original, the copy will not be better quality than the original.) ⢠If you select MN above, you can also change the level setting ( MN1 â MN32 ) from the Recording Quality box that appears. ⢠Optimized â The recording quality automatically adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the space available on the disc. Copying is carried out in real- time. When you change the recording mode setting, you can see how much disc space it will require. If this is more than is available, it shows up in red and you wonâÂÂt be able to start copying. In this case, either change the recording quality, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List. 3 Select âÂÂStartâ to begin copying. Note ⢠When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a Video mode DVD, the chapter markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 108). HDD to DVD Copy List commands Add Use this command to add titles to the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂAddâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a title from the HDD to add to the Copy List, then press ENTER. The thumbnail appears in the Copy List section in the lower half of the screen. If there are already titles in the Copy List, the title is added at the end. 3 Repeat step 2 to add more titles to the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options. Note ⢠When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame Accurate on page 108), the following limitations on adding titles to the Copy List apply: â When adding titles that contain copy-once protected material, the copy-once parts will not be added to the Copy List. â When adding titles that contain material of more than one aspect ratio (screen size), each part with a different aspect ratio will be added as a separate title. â Widescreen material recorded in LP , EP or MN1 â 18 will not be added to the Copy List. â Chapter markers on the copy may be up to 0.5 seconds off compared to the original. ⢠Only titles which were recorded in the same TV system as the recorder is currently set to can be added to the Copy List. HDD HDD to DVD Copy Add Erase Ttl Name Divide Combine HDD DVD-RW VIDEO Required 0h08m Recording Mode Copy List T otal Current DVD Remain 1175MB 2830MB / 4700MB Conf List High Speed Start Conf List HDD Add Erase Ttl Name Divide Combine DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List All To t al 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 HDD to DVD Copy 16:00 Sun 11/8 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 65 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 66 En Erase Use this command to erase individual titles from the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂEraseâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a title from the Copy List to erase, then press ENTER. 3 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm that you want to erase the title, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to erase more titles from the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options. Title Name (Ttl Name) Use this command to name or rename titles in the Copy List (the names of the original titles remain unchanged). 1 Select âÂÂTtl Nameâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a title from the Copy List to name or rename, then press ENTER. 3 Input a name for the selected title. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) and ENTER to select characters. â¢A name generated automatically by the recorder will already be in the name input section of the screen. Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to change the cursor position. ⢠Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower- case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons ( îÂÂ/ î ). ⢠You can also use the CLEAR button to delete characters directly (press and hold for two seconds to delete the whole name). For other remote control key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name on page 80. ⢠Press RETURN to go back to the Copy List screen without changing the name. 4 To confirm the name and return to the main Copy List screen, highlight âÂÂOKâ and press ENTER. 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to name other titles in the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options. Divide Use this command to make two titles from a title already in the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂDivideâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a title from the Copy List to divide, then press ENTER. Conf List HDD HDD to DVD Copy Add Erase Ttl Name Divide Combine DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List All To t al 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s Conf List HDD HDD to DVD Copy Add Erase Ttl Name Divide Combine DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List All To t al 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 15:00 T ue 6/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s Input Title Name CAPS small OK Delete Space A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; A A A A A A àç E E E E I I I I # 2 3 ô õ ö ÷ 1 ÿ ` D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y à$ % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & ã \ ç è é ì â î _ àâ / @ [ ÃÂ¥ ] à÷ x ñ { | } ~ á c a â o â << << 1 / 4 1 / 2 3 / 4 ø 1 5:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP Conf List HDD Add Erase Ttl Name Divide Combine DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List All To t al 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 HDD to DVD Copy 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 66 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 67 En 3 Use the playback controls to find the place you want to divide the title. You can use all the usual playback controls, including î PLAY , î PAUSE , scan ( î , î ), and slow-motion ( î , î ). ⢠Press RETURN or highlight Back and press ENTER to go back to the main Copy List screen, leaving the title intact. 4 With âÂÂDivideâ highlighted, press ENTER to divide the title at the current playback position. 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to divide other titles in the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options. Note ⢠When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame Accurate on page 108), the divide points may move by up to half a second after selecting Divide . Combine Use this command to make a single title from two adjacent titles in the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂCombineâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select two adjacent titles from the Copy List to combine, then press ENTER. 3 Repeat step 2 to combine more titles, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options. Note ⢠When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame Accurate on page 108), the following limitations apply when combining titles: â Mixed aspect ratios (16:9, 4:3, 4:3 (letter box)) canâÂÂt be combined. â Mixed recording modes ( EP / MN1 â 6 , LP / MN7 â 18 , SP / MN19 â 31 , FINE / MN32 ) canâÂÂt be combined. Preview Use this command to check the content of a title in the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂPreviewâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a title from the Copy List to preview, then press ENTER. The selected title starts playing. You can return to the Copy List screen by pressing î STOP , otherwise playback will continue until the end of the Copy List. ⢠During preview, you can select a new thumbnail for the Disc Navigator by pressing NAVI MARK . 3 Repeat step 2 to preview other titles, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options. Move Use this command to change the order of titles in the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂMoveâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a title from the Copy List to move, then press ENTER. The thumbnail appears in the Copy List section in the lower half of the screen. HDD Divide Title Divide 2-1 0.08.13.26 î Play Pause Divide Back Title 2 LP 0h32m55s 16:00 Sun 11/08 Pr 5 Recording Time Conf List HDD HDD to DVD Copy Add Erase Ttl Name Divide Combine DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List All To t al 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Conf List HDD HDD to DVD Copy Preview Move Erase All Chpt Edit Erase Sec DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List All To t al 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 67 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 68 En 3 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a new position for the title, then press ENTER. The thumbnails in the Copy List reflect the new order. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to move other titles in the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options. Erase All Use this command to erase the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂErase Allâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) The Chapter Edit option gives you access to several commands that you can use to edit chapters within a Copy List title. Editing chapters in a Copy List title does not change any actual content on the HDD. It affects only how the chapters appear after copying. 1 Select âÂÂChpt Editâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a title from the Copy List to edit, then press ENTER. The chapter editing screen appears with thumbnails of each chapter. 3 Select a command from the chapter edit menu options. The following commands are available: ⢠Erase â Erase individual chapters: Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î / î (cursor buttons) and ENTER to select a chapter to erase. The chapter is erased after confirming. ⢠Divide â Divide a chapter into two or more new chapters: See Chapter Edit: Divide below. ⢠Combine â Combine two chapters into one: See Chapter Edit: Combine below. ⢠Move â Change the order of the chapters: See Chapter Edit: Move below. ⢠Preview â Check the content of a chapter: Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select a chapter, then press ENTER . Once the preview has started, press î STOP to return to the chapter edit screen. 4 Press RETURN to get back to the chapter editing options on the left, or select another chapter 5 Select âÂÂBackâ (or press RETURN ) to go back to the main Copy List screen. Conf List HDD HDD to DVD Copy Preview Move Erase All Chpt Edit Erase Sec DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List All To t al 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Co py List inser tion point Title to mov e 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s Conf List HDD HDD to DVD Copy Preview Move Erase All Chpt Edit Erase Sec DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List All To t al 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Erase all titles ? Ye s N o Conf List HDD Preview Move Erase All Chpt Edit Erase sec DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List All To t al 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 HDD to DVD Copy 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s 1/1 HDD Chapter Edit Erase Divide Combine Move Preview 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Title 2 Chapter - - - h - - m 2 Back Chapter edit menu 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 68 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 69 En Chapter Edit: Divide You can divide a chapter into as many new chapters as necessary. 1 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select the chapter to divide, then press ENTER. 2 Use the playback controls to find the place you want to divide the chapter. You can use all the usual playback controls, including î PLAY , î PAUSE , scan ( î , î ), and slow-motion ( î , î ). 3 With âÂÂDivideâ highlighted, press ENTER to divide the chapter at the current playback position. You can divide the chapter as many times as you want (up to 99 per title). 4 Select âÂÂBackâ (or press RETURN ) to get back to the main Chapter Edit screen. Note ⢠When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame Accurate on page 108), the divide point may move by up to half a second after selecting Divide . Chapter Edit: Combine This command lets you combine two chapters into one. 1 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select the space between the chapters to combine. 2 Press ENTER to combine. Chapter Edit: Move This command lets you rearrange the chapters within a Copy List title. 1 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select the chapter you want to move, then press ENTER. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select a new position for the chapter, then press ENTER. The thumbnails in the chapter list reflect the new order. 1-3 0.00.52.17 î Play Pause Divide Back Title 12:18 Wed 7/10 Recording Time SP Chapter 0h01m24s 0h00m 1 HDD Divide Chapter Divide 1/1 HDD Chapter Edit Erase Divide Combine Move Preview 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Title 2 Chapter ---h--m 2 Back 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s 1/1 HDD Chapter Edit Back Erase Divide Combine Move Preview 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Title 2 Chapter 0h05m 2 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s 1/1 HDD Chapter Edit Erase Divide Combine Move Preview 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Title 2 Chapter ---h--m 2 Back Insertion point Title to mov e 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 69 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 70 En Erase Section (Erase Sec) Using this command you can delete a part of a Copy List title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording made from the TV. 1 Select âÂÂErase Secâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select the title you want to erase a section from, then press ENTER. After selecting a title, a screen appears from which you can mark the start and end points of the section to erase. 3 Use the playback controls to find the start of the section to erase, then (with âÂÂFromâ highlighted) press ENTER. You can use all the usual playback controls, including î PLAY , î PAUSE , scan ( î , î ), and slow-motion ( î , î ). The bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current play position in the title. After pressing ENTER , a marker appears under the bar to show the start of the section. 4 In the same way, find the end of the section to erase, then (with âÂÂToâ highlighted) press ENTER. After pressing ENTER , another marker appears under the bar to show the end of the section, with the section itself marked in red. 5 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of video either side of the marked section to see how the edit will look. 6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 if you want to erase more sections from the same title. 7 Select âÂÂBackâ (or press RETURN ) to get back to the main Copy List screen. Note ⢠When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame Accurate on page 108), the âÂÂFromâ time and length of the erased section may differ by up to 0.5 seconds from that set. HDD Erase Sec Erase Sec 2-1 0.06.52.17 î Play Pause From To Back A B Title 2 LP 0h32m55s 16:00 Sun 11/08 Pr 5 Recording Time î Play Pause 0.02.09.17 From T A A B DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 70 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 71 En Copying from DVD to HDD* Use the DVD to HDD Copy screen to transfer video on DVD to the hard disk. * See also Copyright on page 62. Important ⢠The DVD to HDD Copy screen is not accessible when a finalized Video mode disc is loaded. However, you can still use the One Touch Copy function (see One Touch Copy* (DVD to HDD) on page 62). ⢠The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time. ⢠The copy list will be erased if: â any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or edited. â the disc tray is opened. â playback is switched between Original and Play List. â the DVD disc is re-initialized or finalized. â the recorder is reset to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 112). ⢠It may not be possible to copy from a DVD disc that was recorded on a different DVD recorder or PC. 1 Load the recordable DVD disc that contains the material you want to copy to the HDD. 2 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂCopyâÂÂ. ⢠Note that the Copy option will not be available if the TV system of the recorder and the disc do not match. (See Input Line System on page 98 for how to change the TV system of the recorder.) Original Conf List DVD DVD to HDD Copy Add Erase Move Preview Erase All DVD DVD HD D HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List T otal 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Currently selected DVD title Information for the selected title Co py List titles Running time of the Co py List Co py List menu options 16:00 Sun 8/11 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s RETURN HOME MENU DISPLAY ENTER PREV NEXT Timer Recording Disc Navigator Copy Disc History PhotoViewer Disc Setup Initial Setup V ideo/Audio Adjust Play Mode DV Record DVR -520H/720H screen DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 71 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 72 En 3 Select âÂÂDVD î HDDâÂÂ. The DVD to HDD Copy screen appears. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to highlight the command you want from the menu options on the left, then press ENTER . Most commands require you then to select a title or location from the thumbnail views area of the screen. Use the î /î (cursor left/right) followed by ENTER to do this. ⢠When in the thumbnails area of the screen, use the PREV ( î ) and NEXT ( î ) buttons to display the previous/next page if there are more titles than will fit on the screen. ⢠As you highlight different thumbnails, information about the title is shown in the central area of the screen. Press DISPLAY to change the information displayed. ⢠Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on the left from the thumbnail area of the Copy List screen. DVD to HDD Copy List menu options Use the following commands when making a DVD to HDD Copy List: ⢠Add â Select and add titles to the Copy List (see page 73). ⢠Move â Change the order of titles in the Copy List (see page 73). ⢠Erase All â Erase the Copy List (see page 74). ⢠Preview â Check the content of a title in the Copy List (see page 74). ⢠Erase â Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see page 73). ⢠Confirm List ( Conf List ) â Confirm the Copy List and go to the recording settings screen (see Recording the Copy List below). Recording the Copy List After putting together your Copy List, youâÂÂre ready to record it. 1 Select âÂÂConf Listâ to display the Copy List settings screen. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select the Recording Mode. ⢠High-Speed Copy â Only available when copying Original content from a VR mode disc. The Copy List is copied at the same recording quality as the original. (See page 61 for more information on high- speed copying.) ⢠FINE , SP , LP , EP , MN â The Copy List is copied at the specified recording quality in real-time. (Note that if you copy at a higher quality setting than the original, the copy will not be better quality than the original.) ⢠If you select MN above, you can also change the level setting ( MN1 â MN32 ) from the Recording Quality box that appears. When you change the recording mode setting, you can see how much hard disk space it will require. If this is more than is available, it shows up in red and you wonâÂÂt be able to start copying. In this case, either change the recording quality, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List. 3 Select âÂÂStartâ to begin copying. Original Conf List DVD DVD to HDD Copy Add Erase Move Preview Erase All DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/1 Copy List T otal 0h00m 2 3 4 DVD SP Start DVD HDD Required 1h30m Recording Mode Copy List T otal Current HDD Remain 1h30m 30h00m / 34h00m Conf List Original DVD to HDD Copy Add Erase Move Preview Erase All DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 72 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 73 En DVD to HDD Copy List commands Add Use this command to add titles to the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂAddâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a title from the DVD to add to the Copy List, then press ENTER. The thumbnail appears in the Copy List section in the lower half of the screen. If there are already titles in the Copy List, the title is added at the end. 3 Repeat step 2 to add more titles to the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options. Note ⢠Titles which were recorded directly to a VR mode disc or have already been copied real-time, and which contain bilingual audio or are recorded in recording modes MN12 â MN20 can be added to the Copy List, however if High-Speed Copy is selected they will not actually be copied. ⢠Similarly, a copy-once protected title, recorded from the TV for example, can be added to the Copy List, but it will not be copied if High-Speed Copy is selected. ⢠You may not be able to copy titles when copying a disc that was created using a PC or another recorder. Erase Use this command to erase individual titles from the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂEraseâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a title from the Copy List to erase, then press ENTER. 3 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm that you want to erase the title, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to erase more titles from the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options. Move Use this command to change the order of titles currently in the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂMoveâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a title from the Copy List to move, then press ENTER. Play List Conf List DVD DVD to HDD Copy Add Erase Move Preview Erase All DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List To tal 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 16:00 Sun 8/11 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s Play List Conf List DVD DVD to HDD Copy Add Erase Move Preview Erase All DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List To tal 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s Play List Conf List DVD DVD to HDD Copy Add Erase Move Preview Erase All DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List To tal 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 73 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 74 En 3 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select the insertion point for the title, then press ENTER. The thumbnails in the Copy List are updated to reflect the new order. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to move other titles in the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options. Preview Use this command to check the content of a title in the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂPreviewâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a title from the Copy List to preview, then press ENTER. The selected title starts playing. You can return to the Copy List screen by pressing î STOP , otherwise playback will continue until the end of the Copy List. 3 Repeat step 2 to preview other titles, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options. Erase All Use this command to erase the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂErase Allâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. Using disc back-up* This feature offers a simple way to make a back-up copy of a finalized Video mode disc. The data is copied first to the hard disk drive, then on to another recordable DVD disc. * See also Copyright on page 62. 1 Press HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂCopyâ 3 Select âÂÂDisc Back-upâÂÂ. 4 Select a back-up option. There are three back-up options: ⢠Start new disc back-up â Start making a back-up of a disc. ⢠Resume writing data â Record the back-up data already on the HDD to a recordable DVD. ⢠Erase back-up data â Erase the back-up data on the HDD. Play List Conf List DVD DVD to HDD Copy Add Erase Move Preview Erase All DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List To tal 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Co py List inser tion point Title to mov e 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s Play List Conf List DVD DVD to HDD Copy Add Erase Move Preview Erase All DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List To tal 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Erase all titles ? Ye s N o Start new disc back-up Resume writing data Erase back-up data Disc Back-up DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 74 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 75 En 5 Press î OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray and load the disc you want to make a back-up of, then close the disc tray. You can only make back-up copies of finalized Video mode discs. 6 Select âÂÂStartâÂÂ. ⢠To see the progress of the back-up, press DISPLAY . ⢠You can cancel the back-up process by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second. 7 When the data has been copied, press î OPEN/ CLOSE to open the disc tray. Take out the disc and load a blank* recordable DVD. * If youâÂÂre using a DVD-RW, the disc doesnâÂÂt have to be blank, although the previous contents of the disc will be erased in the back-up process. You can use a DVD-R Ver. 2.0 disc, or DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 or Ver. 1.2 / 4x for the back-up. ⢠If you back-up a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW, you cannot undo the finalization later. ⢠Actual recordable capacity of discs vary so there may be cases where the contents of the disc youâÂÂre backing-up will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If this happens, please try another brand of disc. 8 Select âÂÂStartâ to start writing the backed-up data to the blank disc. ⢠To see the progress of the back-up, press DISPLAY . ⢠You can cancel the back-up process by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second. However, this will make the disc unusable (although if you are using a DVD-RW disc you can re-initialize it in order to make it usable againâÂÂsee Initializing a DVD-RW disc on page 60.) 9 After the recorder has finished recording the back-up disc, you can select whether to make another back-up of the same data or exit. ⢠Select Start to make another back-up copy or Cancel to finish. If you want to make another back-up copy, return to step 6 above. 10 If you donâÂÂt need to keep the back-up data on the HDD, you can delete it now. Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD; select No to keep it (you can delete it later if you want to). ⢠If you decide to leave the back-up data on the HDD, you can make back-up copies to recordable DVD discs anytime from the Disc Back-up menu. Note ⢠It is not possible to play material on the HDD that has been backed-up from DVD. No Disc. Please load a disc to be backed-up. Start Cancel Disc Back-up Read from disc and save to HDD. Start reading? Start Cancel Disc Back-up Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive. Please eject the disc and load a recordable disc. Start Cancel Disc Back-up Wr ite back-up data from Hard Disk Drive. The disc contents will be overwritten. OK to start? Start Cancel Disc Back-up Disc back-up finished. To make another back-up copy , please load a recordable disc. Start Cancel Disc Back-up The backed-up data is still on the HDD. Erasing it will increase the free space available. OK to Erase? Disc Back-up Ye s No DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 75 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 76 En Chapter 8 Editing Using the Disc Navigator you can edit video content on unfinalized Video mode and VR mode DVD discs , as well as video content on the internal hard disk drive (HDD). The editing features available in the Disc Navigator depend on whether you are editing video on a Video mode or VR mode DVD , or the HDD, and whether youâÂÂre editing Original content, or a Play List. With unfinalized Video mode DVDs, there are a limited number of editing commands, including naming, locking and erasing titles. Once a Video mode disc has been finalized, further editing is not possible. There are two ways to edit VR mode DVD-RW discs. You can directly edit the Original content of the disc, or you can create and edit a Play List. The Play List doesnâÂÂt actually change any of the content on the disc, but just controls how the content is played back (rather like the program play feature found on CD players). Editing material recorded on the HDD is similar to editing the Original content of a VR mode DVD-RW, with similar commands for erasing, naming and locking titles, as well as fine control over the content of chapters within titles. The Disc Navigator screen DVD Disc Navigator Video Mode 1/1 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Recording Time 0h30m40s Undo DVD 123 456 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Lock Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Edit mode Disc Navigat or menu options Disc recording mode Number of title pages Locked title indicator Information f or selected title Recording time av ailable in the displayed recording mode Currently selected title DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 76 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 77 En HDD Disc Navigator Important ⢠Titles that have been recorded with a Line Input setting different to the current setting of the recorder are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank thumbnail image. See also Input Line System on page 98. ⢠During recording, if you display the Disc Navigator for the HDD, some of the titles may appear with a mark. These titles were recorded with a Line Input setting different to the current setting of the recorder. During recording, these titles cannot be played. HDD All 1/1 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Recording Time 0h30m40s 123 456 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Chpt Edit Erase Sec HDD Remain 6h12m(FINE) All Group1 Gr oup2 Group3 Group4 NEW Auto Replace Recording indicator Disc Navigat or menu options Selec ted Group Number of title pages Locked title indicator Information f or selected title Recording time av ailable in the displayed recording mode New indicator Currently selected title HDD group tabs DVD RECORDER ONE TOUCH COPY RETURN DISC NAVIGAT OR PLAY LIST HOME MENU HDD DVD DISPLAY ENTER CLEAR PREV PLAY NEXT DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 77 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 78 En 1 Press HDD or DVD to select the hard disk drive or the DVD. 2 Press DISC NAVIGATOR to display the Disc Navigator screen. Playback will automatically stop when you do this. ⢠You can also access the Disc Navigator from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU , select Disc Navigator then press ENTER ). ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to highlight the command you want from the menu options on the left, then press ENTER . Most commands require you then to select a title (or chapter) or location from the thumbnail views area of the screen. Use the îÂÂ/ îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) followed by ENTER to do this. ⢠When in the thumbnails area of the screen, use the PREV ( î ) and NEXT ( î ) buttons to display the previous/next page if there are more than six titles/ nine chapters. ⢠As you highlight different thumbnails, information about the title is shown in the central area of the screen. Press DISPLAY to change the information displayed. ⢠If you are editing a VR mode disc, press PLAYLIST to switch between Original and Play List Disc Navigator screens. ⢠Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on the left from the thumbnail area of the Disc Navigator. ⢠You can switch between the HDD and the DVD Disc Navigator screens using the HDD and DVD buttons (front panel or remote). You can copy a selected HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to HDD by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY (see also page 62 for more on One Touch Copy). When editing HDD content, a row of group names appears above the title thumbnails (see Editing HDD groups on page 84 for more details). You can access these by pressing î (cursor up) repeatedly until the All group is highlighted, then using the î /î (cursor left/ right) buttons to select a group. Press ENTER to âÂÂopenâ the highlighted group. Titles on the HDD marked with a icon are timer recordings set to Auto Replace Recording (see Standard timer recording on page 51). Titles on the HDD marked with a icon are recently recorded titles that havenâÂÂt yet been played. 3 To exit the Disc Navigator, press HOME MENU . Remember ⢠You can change the thumbnail pictures used for titles using the NAVI MARK buttonâÂÂsee Changing the thumbnail picture for a title on page 37. Disc Navigator menu options The commands available from the Disc Navigator for the VR mode and Video mode discs and the HDD are shown below. ⢠Play â Play a title (page 79) ⢠Title Name ( Ttl Name ) â Name or rename a title (page 80) ⢠Lock/Unlock â Lock or unlock a title to prevent accidental changes being made (page 82) ⢠Erase â Erase a title (page 79) ⢠Erase All â Erase all titles (page 83) ⢠Undo â Undo the last change (page 83) (Original) ⢠Play â Play a title (page 79) ⢠Title Name ( Ttl Name ) â Name or rename a title (page 80) ⢠Lock/Unlock â Lock or unlock a title to prevent accidental changes being made (page 82) ⢠Erase â Erase a title (page 79) ⢠Erase All â Erase all titles (page 83) Original 1/1 Undo DVD 123 456 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Chpt Edit Erase Sec DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Play List 1/1 Undo DVD 123 456 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Chpt Edit Erase Sec DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Playlist / Original indicator Video mode VR mode DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 78 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 79 En ⢠Undo â Undo the last change (page 83) ⢠Chapter Edit ( Chpt Edit ) â Make detailed changes to chapters in a title (page 81) ⢠Erase Section (Erase Sec) â Erase a part of a title (page 82) ⢠Play â Play a title (page 79) ⢠Title Name ( Ttl Name ) â Name or rename a title (page 80) ⢠Lock/Unlock â Lock or unlock a title to prevent accidental changes being made (page 82) ⢠Erase â Erase a title (page 79) ⢠Erase All â Erase all titles (page 83) ⢠Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) â Make detailed changes to chapters in a title (page 81) ⢠Divide â Divide a title into two (page 83) ⢠Change Group ( Chg Group ) â Assign a title to a group on the HDD (page 84) ⢠Group Name ( Grp Name ) â Name or rename an HDD group (page 84) ⢠Erase Section (Erase Sec) â Erase part of a title (page 82) (Play List) ⢠Create â Make a new Play List title (page 87) ⢠Chapter Edit ( Chpt Edit ) â Make detailed changes to chapters in a Play List title (page 86) ⢠Move â Move the position of a title in the Play List (page 87) ⢠Erase All â Erase all titles in the Play List (page 88) ⢠Undo â Undo the last change (page 88) ⢠Play â Play a title (page 85) ⢠Erase â Erase a title from the Play List (page 85) ⢠Title Name ( Ttl Name ) â Name or rename a title in the Play List (page 85) ⢠Combine â Combine two Play List titles into one (page 88) ⢠Divide â Divide a Play List title into two (page 88) ⢠Erase Section (Erase Sec) â Erase a part of a title (page 86) Editing VR mode Original , Video mode and HDD content These commands affect the actual content stored on the DVD-R/RW or HDD. Remember ⢠If you are editing a VR mode disc, use the PLAYLIST button to switch to the Disc Navigator Original screen. Play Use this function to start playback of a title. 1 Select âÂÂPlayâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select the title you want to play, then press ENTER or î PLAY. Playback of the title you selected starts. Erase The Erase title command does slightly different things depending on what you are currently editing. If you are editing Original content on a VR mode disc or content on the HDD, the title will be erased from the disc and the available recording time will increase accordingly. If you erase titles from a Video mode DVD-R disc, the title will disappear from the list of titles, but the available recording time will not increase. Erasing a title from a Video mode DVD-RW disc increases the available recording time only if it is the last title on the disc. HDD VR mode VR mode Video mode HDD 1/1 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Undo DVD 123 456 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Lock Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Video Mode VR mode Video mode HDD DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 79 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 80 En 1 Select âÂÂEraseâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select the title you want to erase, then press ENTER. 3 Highlight âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. 4 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to erase. Tip ⢠You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing ENTER . (You can also use this method to erase titles when using the Play function, above.) Title Name (Ttl Name) You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long for VR mode and HDD recordings and 32 characters for Video mode recordings. 1 Select âÂÂTtl Nameâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select the title you want to name, then press ENTER to go to the name input screen. 3 Input a name for the selected title. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) and ENTER to select characters. â¢A name generated automatically by the recorder will already be in the name input section of the screen. Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to change the cursor position. ⢠Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower- case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons ( îÂÂ/ î ). ⢠You can also use the CLEAR button to delete characters directly (press and hold for two seconds to delete the whole name). For other remote control key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name below. ⢠For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you will see only a limited character set. 4 Highlight âÂÂOKâ then press ENTER to enter the name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen. ⢠To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without saving changes to the title name, press RETURN . 5 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to name. Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name The table below shows the remote control key shortcuts that you can use to input characters in the name input screen. Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through the characters shown. If you want to enter two characters in succession that are both on the same button (for example a P and an R ), press î to advance the cursor one space manually between inputting the two characters. *1 lower-case: ÿ; upper -case: àOriginal DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) 1/1 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Chpt Edit Erase Sec Erase Title? Ye s N o VR mode Video mode HDD Input Title Name CAPS small OK Clear Space A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; A A A A A A àç E E E E I I I I # 2 3 ô õ ö ÷ 1 ÿ ` D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y à$ % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & ã \ ç è é ì â î _ àâ / @ [ ÃÂ¥ ] à÷ x ñ { | } ~ á c a â o â << << 1 / 4 1 / 2 3 / 4 ø 1 2:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Key Characters Key Characters 1 . , â ? ! â & 1 6 m n o 6 ö ô ò ó ø ñ 2 a b c 2 ä àá â ã æ ç 7 p q r s 7 $ ÿ/à*1 3 d e f 3 è é ë ê 8 t u v 8 ü ù û ú 4 g h i 4 î ï ì àá 9 w x y z 9 5 j k l 5 ã 0 0 î [cursor back] î [cursor forward] îÂÂ/ î [change case] CLEAR [clear character] î <space> î [ï¬Ânish name input] VIDEO Plus ~ ( ) _ / : ; â ` ^ @ # â % ÃÂ¥ | = { } [ ] < > DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 80 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 81 En Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) When editing VR mode DVDs or video on the HDD you can edit individual chapters within a title, with commands for erasing, combining and dividing. You can also play individual chapters to check their content. 1 Select âÂÂChpt Editâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select the title that contains the chapters you want to edit, then press ENTER. After selecting a title, thumbnails of each chapter appear and youâÂÂll see that the Disc Navigator menu items change to the chapter editing commands: ⢠Erase â Erase chapters: Select the chapter you want to erase and press ENTER (see also the note below). ⢠Divide â Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Select the chapter you want to divide. From the following screen use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find the point at which you want to divide the chapter. With Divide highlighted, press ENTER . You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD disc or 99 chapters per HDD title). Highlight Back and press ENTER to return to the Chapter Edit screen. ⢠Combine â Combine two adjacent chapters into one: Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent chapters and press ENTER (see also the note below) ⢠Preview â Preview chapters: Select the chapter you want to play; press î STOP to return to the chapter edit screen. ⢠Undo â Undo the last command (only works with VR mode disc edits). 3 Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on the left side of the screen. 4 To return to the Disc Navigator screen, press RETURN again, or select âÂÂBackâ from the menu options on the left. Note ⢠When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long. ⢠It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been divided into three, then the middle chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into one. Inserting chapter markers into a title You can create new chapters within a title using the CHP MARK button while playing the title or during recording. This is useful not just for navigation of the disc content but also for editing purposes. 1 Start playback of the title you want to create new chapter markers in. You can use the Play command from the Disc Navigator menu to do this. 2 Press CHP MARK at any point where you want a new chapter to begin. A chapter marker icon appears on-screen briefly to confirm a new chapter mark has been inserted: VR mode HDD Original DVD 1/1 Chapter Edit Back Erase Divide Combine Preview Undo 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP Title 1 Chapter 0h03m 2 Original Divide DVD Divide Chapter 1-3 0.00.52.17 î Play Pause Divide Back Title Recording Time LP Chapter 0h01m24s 0h00m 1 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 VR mode HDD CHP MARK PA USE î î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 81 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 82 En ⢠For greater control over the exact position of chapter markers it can be useful to use the î PAUSE button and/or the slow-motion and frame advance/reverse controls ( îÂÂ/î ). Note ⢠You cannot insert chapter markers during Auto Start Recording. ⢠If you pause a recording in VR mode, the recorder automatically starts a new chapter when you restart the recording. ⢠When recording in Video mode, the recorder automatically puts chapter markers in at regular intervals. It is not possible to add extra chapter markers manually after recording (see also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 108). ⢠The Play List and Original content on a disc can each contain up to 999 chapters. ⢠Each HDD title can contain a maximum of 99 chapters. ⢠Similar chapter editing commands are available for HDD content from the HDD to DVD copy screen. See also Copying from HDD to DVD* on page 63. Erase Section (Erase Sec) Using this command you can delete a part of an Original title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording made from the TV. 1 Select âÂÂErase Secâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select a title. After selecting a title, the Erase Sec screen appears from which you can mark the start and end points of the section to erase. 3 Use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find the start of the section to erase, then (with âÂÂFromâ highlighted) press ENTER . The bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current play position in the title. After pressing ENTER , a marker appears under the bar to show the start of the section. 4 In the same way, find the end of the section to erase, then (with âÂÂToâ highlighted) press ENTER. After pressing ENTER , another marker appears under the bar to show the end of the section, with the section itself marked in red. 5 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of video either side of the marked section to see how the edit will look. ⢠When editing VR mode Original content, you may not be able to erase very short sections (less than five seconds). 6 Erase another section from the same title, or press RETURN to get back to the main Disc Navigator screen. Lock / Unlock You can lock a title so that it canâÂÂt be edited or erased accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock it later. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt undo any edits made before changing the lock status. You also canâÂÂt undo a lock/unlock command using the Undo option from the Disc Navigator menu. VR mode HDD Original Erase Sec DVD Erase Sec 1-1 0.00.52.17 î Play Pause From To Back Title 1 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 Recording Time LP 0h01m24s A B î Play Pause 0.02.09.17 From T A A B VR mode Video mode HDD DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 82 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 83 En 1 Select âÂÂLockâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select the title you want to lock (or unlock), then press ENTER. An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator with a padlock icon. 3 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to lock/unlock. Erase All This erases all unlocked titles from the disc (see also Lock / Unlock on page 82). 1 Select âÂÂErase Allâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. Undo If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally undo it. There are three levels of undo (in other words, you can undo the last three edits you made). ⢠Select âÂÂUndoâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. ⢠You canâÂÂt undo anything after ejecting the disc from the recorder or switching the recorder into standby. ⢠You canâÂÂt undo the following operations: initializing, recording or finalizing a disc, locking and unlocking titles. Divide Use this command to divide a title on the HDD into two. Note that once divided, the two new titles cannot be recombined into one again. 1 Select âÂÂDivideâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Select the title that you want to divide, then press ENTER. 3 Use the standard playback controls to find the place you want to divide the title. 4 With âÂÂDivideâ highlighted, press ENTER to divide the title at the current playback position. 5 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm you want to divide the title. Select No if you want to cancel and leave the title intact. 6 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to divide. Original 1/1 12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator Lock Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) VR mode Video mode HDD Original 1/1 Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator Erase all titles? Lock Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Ye s N o VR mode Video mode HDD HDD Divide 2-1 0.00.08.26 î Play Pause Divide Back Title 2 Recording Time LP 0h01m24s Divide Title 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 83 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 84 En Editing HDD groups The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be many hours of video in the recorder. To help you organize your HDD video content there are four âÂÂgroupsâÂÂ. You can move content from group to group, and rename the groups as you want. Change Group (Chg Group) Use this command to assign titles to a particular group. 1 Select âÂÂChg Groupâ from the Disc Navigator menu, then press ENTER. 2 Select the title that you want to put into a different group, then press ENTER . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a group for the title, then press ENTER. ⢠You can select one of the four groups, or choose No Group , in which case it will only appear when All is selected. 4 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to change the group of. Group Name (Grp Name) Use this command to rename a group. 1 Select âÂÂGrp Nameâ from the Disc Navigator menu. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select the group that you want to name or rename, then press ENTER. 3 Input a name for the group. The name can be up to six characters long. 4 To finish entering the name, highlight âÂÂExitâ and press ENTER. 5 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another group to name. Creating and editing a VR mode Play List A Play List is a kind of virtual content based on the actual (Original) content of the disc. The main advantages of this type of editing is that it is non-destructive of the video content on the disc, and it allows greater control over editing, so that you end up with the content exactly as you want it. Remember ⢠Use the PLAYLIST button to switch to the Play List edit screen. ⢠The Play List can contain a maximum of 99 titles. HDD HDD HDD All Title 1 21:00 Fri 6/09 Pr 5 LP Disc Navigator Lock Erase All Grp Name Chg Group Divide GROUP1 GROUP2 GROUP3 GROUP4 No Group HDD Input Group Name CAPS small OK Clear Space A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; A A A A A A àç E E E E I I I I # 2 3 ô õ ö ÷ 1 ÿ ` D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y à$ % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & ã \ ç è é ì â î _ àâ / @ [ ÃÂ¥ ] à÷ x ñ { | } ~ á c a â o â << << 1 / 4 1 / 2 3 / 4 ø G roup 1 VR mode DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 84 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 85 En Play Use this function to start playback of a title. 1 Select âÂÂPlayâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title you want to play, then press ENTER. Playback of the title you selected starts. Erase This command erases a title only from the Play List. The title remains in the Original content and the available recording time does not increase. 1 Select âÂÂEraseâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title you want to erase, then press ENTER. 3 Highlight âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. 4 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to erase. Note ⢠The remaining recording time doesnâÂÂt change when you erase something from the Play List. Title Name (Ttl Name) You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long. 1 Select âÂÂTtl Nameâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title you want to name, then press ENTER. 3 Input a name for the selected title. Press ENTER after selecting each character. â¢A name generated automatically by the recorder will already be in the name input section of the screen. Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to change the cursor position. ⢠Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower- case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons ( îÂÂ/ î ). ⢠You can also use the CLEAR button to delete characters directly (press and hold for two seconds to delete the whole name). For other remote control key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name on page 80. ⢠For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you will see only a limited character set. 4 Highlight âÂÂOKâÂÂ, then press ENTER to fix the name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen. ⢠To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without saving changes to the title name, press RETURN . 5 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to name. VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Chpt Edit Erase Sec DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Play Erase Ttl Name Chpt Edit Erase Sec DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Erase Title? Ye s N o VR mode Input Title Name CAPS small OK Clear Space A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; A A A A A A àç E E E E I I I I # 2 3 ô õ ö ÷ 1 ÿ ` D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y à$ % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & ã \ ç è é ì â î _ àâ / @ [ ÃÂ¥ ] à÷ x ñ { | } ~ á c a â o â << << 1 / 4 1 / 2 3 / 4 ø 1 2:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 85 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 86 En Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) When editing VR mode DVDs you can edit individual chapters within a title, with commands for erasing, moving, combining and dividing. You can also play individual chapters to check their content. 1 Select âÂÂChpt Editâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title that contains the chapters you want to edit, then press ENTER . After selecting a title, thumbnails of each chapter appear and youâÂÂll see that the Disc Navigator menu items change to the chapter editing commands: ⢠Erase â Erase chapters: Select the chapter you want to erase and press ENTER . ⢠Divide â Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Select the chapter you want to divide. From the following screen use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find the point at which you want to divide the chapter. With Divide highlighted, press ENTER . You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as you want (up to 999 chapters per disc). Highlight Back and press ENTER to return to the Chapter Edit screen. ⢠Combine â Combine two adjacent chapters into one: Select the dividing line between two adjacent chapters and press ENTER . ⢠Move â Rearrange chapters: Select the chapter you want to move, press ENTER , then highlight the new location for it, then press ENTER again. ⢠Preview â Preview chapters: Select the chapter you want to play; press î STOP to return to the chapter edit screen. ⢠Undo â Undo the last command. 3 Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on the left side of the screen. 4 To return to the Disc Navigator screen, press RETURN again, or select âÂÂBackâ from the menu options on the left. Erase Section (Erase Sec) Using this command you can delete a part of a Play List title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording made from the TV. 1 Select âÂÂErase Secâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select a title. After selecting a title, the Erase Sec screen appears from which you can mark the start and end points of the section to erase. 3 Use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find the start of the section to erase, then (with âÂÂFromâ highlighted) press ENTER . The bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current play position in the title. After pressing ENTER , a marker appears under the bar to show the start of the section. 4 In the same way, find the end of the section to erase, then (with âÂÂToâ highlighted) press ENTER. After pressing ENTER , another marker appears under the bar to show the end of the section, with the section itself marked in red. VR mode DVD 1/1 Chapter Edit Back Erase Divide Combine Move Undo 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 15:00 Wed11/12 Pr 5 LP Title 1 Chapter 0h03m 2 Play List Play List Divide DVD Divide Chapter 1-3 0.00.52.17 î Play Pause Divide Back Title Recording Time LP Chapter 0h01m24s 0h00m 1 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 VR mode Play List Erase Sec DVD Erase Sec 1-2 0.00.52.17 î Play Pause From To Back Title 1 Recording Time LP 0h01m24s A B 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 î Play Pause 0.02.09.17 From T A A B DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 86 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 87 En 5 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of video either side of the marked section to see how the edit will look. 6 Erase another section from the same title, or press RETURN to get back to the main Disc Navigator screen. Create Use this function to add an Original title to the Play List. When you do this, the whole title is put into the Play List (you can erase bits you donâÂÂt need laterâÂÂsee Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) on page 86). The title appears in the Play List complete with the chapter markers that appear in the Original. However, if you add more chapter markers to the Original later, these are not automatically copied over into the Play List title. You can add up to 99 titles to the Play List. 1 Select âÂÂCreateâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select the insertion point for the new title, then press ENTER. If there are no titles in the Play List yet, this step does not apply. 3 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select an Original title to put into the Play List. 4 Press ENTER to add the title. The new title appears in the updated Play List. 5 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another location for a new title. Move Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play List titles. 1 Select âÂÂMoveâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title you want to move, then press ENTER. 3 Select a new position in the Play List for the title, then press ENTER. After pressing ENTER , the new, updated Play List is displayed. VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) 1 2 Play List 1/1 Undo DVD ORG1 ORG4 ORG2 ORG3 Disc Navigator 12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator 1 Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) 2 3 VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator 12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP 123 4 Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator 123 4 Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 87 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 88 En 4 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to move. Divide Use this command to split a title up into two new titles. 1 Select âÂÂDivideâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title that you want to divide, then press ENTER. 3 Use the playback controls to find the place you want to divide the title. You can use all the usual playback controls, including î PLAY , î PAUSE , scan ( î , î ), and slow-motion ( î , î ). 4 With âÂÂDivideâ highlighted, press ENTER to divide the title at the current playback position. 5 To return to the Disc Navigator menu options, select âÂÂBackâ and press ENTER . Combine Use this function to combine two adjacent Play List titles into one. 1 Select âÂÂCombineâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Highlight the bar divider between the two titles you want to combine, then press ENTER. After pressing ENTER , the new, updated Play List is displayed. 3 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or continue combining more titles. Erase All This command erases all the titles from the Play List. 1 Select âÂÂErase Allâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. Undo If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally undo it. There are three levels of undo (in other words, you can undo the last three edits you made). ⢠Select âÂÂUndoâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. ⢠You canâÂÂt undo anything after ejecting the disc from the recorder or switching the recorder into standby. ⢠You canâÂÂt undo the following operations: initializing, recording or finalizing a disc, locking and unlocking titles. VR mode Play List Divide DVD Divide Chapter 1-1 0.00.08.26 î Play Pause Divide Back Title 1 Recording Time LP 0h01m24s 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator 123 4 Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator 123 Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator Erase all titles? Ye s N o Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) VR mode DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 88 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Disc History 09 89 En Chapter 9 Disc History The Disc History screen lets you see how much recording space remains on the last 30 recordable DVD discs loaded. It also displays information such as disc name, the first three title names, number of titles recorded, recording mode and the lock status of the disc. Using the Disc History 1 Press DISC HISTORY to display the Disc History screen. The most recently loaded disc appears at the top of the list, with previously loaded discs below it. If there is a disc loaded, it is shown in the list with a âÂÂdisc inâ icon. ⢠The Disc History screen is also accessible from the Home Menu. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to see title information for other discs in the list. ⢠To remove a disc from the list, press CLEAR (you canâÂÂt remove the currently loaded disc). ⢠You can see the available recording time for different recording modes by pressing the REC MODE button. 3 To exit the Disc History screen, press HOME MENU or DISC HISTORY. Note ⢠When you initialize a DVD-RW disc or record a DVD-R disc for the first time, the recorder automatically names the disc DISC ** (where ** is a number from 1 to 99). You can rename the disc if you want to (see Input Disc Name on page 92). ⢠When you change the display for the available recording time using the REC MODE button, only the display is changed; the actual recording mode is not affected. ⢠The following discs appear in the Disc History list in gray: â Discs with no available recording space left â Locked discs â Discs that contain the maximum 99 titles and/or 999 chapters â Discs recorded with a Line Input setting different to the recorderâÂÂs current setting. ⢠When a Video mode disc is finalized, the information for that disc disappears from the Disc History. VR mode Video mode Disc History LP DVD Remain Disc Name Title 1 Title 2 Title 3 T oday's Football Enjoy Golf! Social dance Lesson Titles : 8 DVD-RW VR 625 System News Sport T ravel Movie Music 1h54m 2h35m 1h22m 0h30m 1h38m 1/2 Disc name Disc lock indicator Recorded Line Sy stem of disc Av ailable recording space Recording time av ailable Recording mode Number of titles on disc Disc type and recording mode Title information for the selected disc Disc loaded Other discs Selec ted disc DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 89 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 10 90 En Chapter 10 The PhotoViewer From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and picture files stored on a CD-ROM/R/RW on your TV. Playing a slideshow 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂPhotoViewerâ to display the PhotoViewer screen. ⢠The PhotoViewer is only accessible when a disc containing JPEG files is loaded. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a folder from the folder list. The first nine images from the selected folder are displayed as thumbnails in the main part of the screen. 3 Press ENTER to move to the thumbnail view area. The first thumbnail image is highlighted. ⢠To get back to the folder list, press RETURN . 4 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select a thumbnail. ⢠Use the î and î buttons to display the previous/ next page of thumbnails. 5 Press ENTER or î PLAY to start playing a slideshow from the selected thumbnail. ⢠Use the î PREV / NEXT î buttons to display the previous/next picture, or the î PAUSE button to pause the slideshow. 6 Press î STOP or RETURN to return to the thumbnail view area. 7 To return to the folder view area, press RETURN. ⢠To exit the PhotoViewer, press HOME MENU . Note ⢠Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc it is still possible to view them all using the Reload function (see below). ⢠The time it takes for the recorder to load a file increases with large file sizes. ⢠Pictures with an aspect ratio different to your TV screen will appear with black bars top and bottom, or either side (depending on the picture). ⢠If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that the disc and file formats are compatible with this recorder (see JPEG file compatibility on page 10). Reloading files from a disc If you have a disc with a large number of files and/or folders, you can still view all the images using the reload function. 1 Use the î (cursor down) button to navigate to the last entry in the folder list (âÂÂRead next: ...âÂÂ). 2 Press ENTER to load the next batch of up to 999 files/99 folders from the disc. It will take a moment (at most a minute) to load in the images. PhotoViewer 1/2 1/3 01. 12/12 TUE 02. 13/12 WED 03. 14/12 THU 04. 15/12 FRI 05. 16/12 SA T 06. 17/12 SUN 07. 18/12 MON 08. 19/12 TUE 1 4 7 2 5 8 3 6 9 File Date/Time Chair No. 2 10:00 12/05/2003 Size 1920 x 1440 Currently selected thumbnail File information Pages in file view Pages in folder list Currently selected folder in folder list DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 90 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 10 91 En Note ⢠You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter the PhotoViewer again, it will resume reloading.) Zooming the screen During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move the area of the picture displayed. 1 During a slideshow, use the CHANNEL button to zoom the picture. Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2x zoom and 4x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to move the zoomed area within the picture. Rotating the screen You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow so you can always view pictures the right way up, whichever way they were taken. ⢠During a slideshow, press ANGLE to rotate the displayed picture clockwise by 90ú. Press ANGLE repeatedly to continue rotating the picture in increments of 90ú. 2x Zoom î î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 91 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Disc Setup menu 11 92 En Chapter 11 The Disc Setup menu From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure, initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is accessed from the Home menu: ⢠Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc SetupâÂÂ. Basic settings Input Disc Name When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from DISC 1 to DISC 99 . You can use the Input Disc Name function to change the default disc name to something more descriptive. This name appears when you load the disc and when you display disc information on-screen. 1 Select âÂÂInput Disc Nameâ from the Basic options, then âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. 2 Input a name for the disc up to 64 characters long for a VR mode disc, or 32 for a Video mode disc. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) and ENTER to select characters. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to change the cursor position. ⢠Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower- case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons ( îÂÂ/ î ). ⢠You can also use the CLEAR button to delete characters directly (press and hold for two seconds to delete the whole name). For other remote control key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name on page 80. ⢠For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you will see only a limited character set. Note ⢠You cannot input a name for a disc if the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder. See Input Line System on page 98 for how to change the recorderâÂÂs setting. Lock Disc ⢠Default setting: Off Set to On to prevent accidental recording, editing or erasing of the disc loaded. If you need to unlock the disc to make edits, select Off . DVR -520H/720H Screen Timer Recording Disc Navigator Copy Disc History PhotoViewer Disc Setup Initial Setup V ideo/Audio Adjust Play Mode DV Record VR mode Video mode Basic Initialize Finalize Input Disc Name Lock Disc Next Screen Disc Setup Input Disc Name CAPS small OK Clear Space A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; A A A A A A àç E E E E I I I I # 2 3 ô õ ö ÷ 1 ÿ ` D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y à$ % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & ã \ ç è é ì â î _ àâ / @ [ ÃÂ¥ ] à÷ x ñ { | } ~ á c a â o â << << 1 / 4 1 / 2 3 / 4 ø D ISC7 VR mode Basic Initialize Finalize Input Disc Name Lock Disc On Off Disc Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 92 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Disc Setup menu 11 93 En Important â¢A locked disc can still be initialized (which will completely erase the disc). Note ⢠You cannot change the lock setting for a disc if the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder. See Input Line System on page 98 for how to change the recorderâÂÂs setting. Initialize settings You can initialize a DVD-RW disc for either VR mode recording or Video mode recording. The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be automatically initialized for recording according to the DVD-RW Auto Init. setting in the Initial Setup menu (see page 108). The initialize menu here lets you reinitialize a disc, for example if you want to change the recording format of the disc. See Initializing a DVD-RW disc on page 60 for detailed instructions. HDD Initialize When your DVD recorder is working without a problem this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu. However, if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for some reason, you initialize the HDD to fix the problem. Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the data on it. ⢠Select âÂÂInitialize HDDâ from the disc Setup menu. ⢠Select âÂÂStartâ to initialize. Finalize settings Finalize Finalizing âÂÂfixesâ the recordings in place so that the disc can be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive. See Playing your recordings on other DVD players on page 59 for detailed instructions. Undo Finalize You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you want to record more material or edit material already on the disc. You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the finalization is displayed, use this command to be able to record on the disc using this recorder. 1 From the Disc Setup menu, select âÂÂFinalizeâÂÂ, then âÂÂUndo Finalizeâ from the finalize options. 2 Select âÂÂStartâÂÂ. Note ⢠You cannot finalize a disc or use the Undo Finalize command if the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder. See Input Line System on page 98 for how to change the recorderâÂÂs setting. DVD-RW HDD Initialize Start Basic Initialize Finalize Initialize HDD Disc Setup DVD-R DVD-RW DVD-RW DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 93 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Video/Audio Adjust menu 12 94 En Chapter 12 The Video/Audio Adjust menu Using the Video/Audio Adjust menu you can set up the picture quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, for disc playback, and for recording. Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality settings for the built-in TV tuner and for each external input. There are several preset settings that suit various sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets. Choosing a preset 1 With the recorder stopped, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂVideo/Audio AdjustâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂVideo AdjustâÂÂ. 3 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to change the preset. ⢠Use the INPUT SELECT button to switch between the built-in TV tuner and the external inputs. ⢠Use the CHANNEL /â buttons to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner. There are six presets available: ⢠Tuner â suitable for general TV broadcasts ⢠VCR â suitable for video cassettes ⢠LDP â suitable for Laserdiscs ⢠Memory1 â user preset 1 ⢠Memory2 â user preset 2 ⢠Memory3 â user preset 3 You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for the current preset ( Tuner , VCR or LDP ). 4 Press ENTER to select the preset. Creating your own set There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of picture quality settings. 1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3). 2 Select âÂÂDetailed SettingsâÂÂ. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select the picture quality setting you want to adjust. You can adjust the following settings: ⢠3-D Y/C â Adjusts the brightness/colour separation (NTSC video only). ⢠VNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction applied to the video signal. ⢠Detail â Adjusts how sharp edges appear. ⢠White AGC â Turn on for automatic white level adjustment. ⢠White Level â Adjusts the intensity of white. ⢠Black Level â Adjusts the intensity of black. ⢠Black Setup â Corrects the standard reference black level (NTSC video only). ⢠Hue â Adjusts overall balance between red and green. ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts how rich the colours appear. Timer Recording Disc Navigator Copy Disc History PhotoViewer Disc Setup Initial Setup Vi deo/Audio Adjust Play Mode DV Record DVR -520H/720H screen T uner Detailed Settings Pr 5 Memory1 Detailed Settings Pr 5 Memory1 Off Max Off Detail White AGC Black Setup Motion Still 3-D Y/C VNR Min Max Min Max White Level Black Level Pr 5 0 IRE Off DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 94 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Video/Audio Adjust menu 12 95 En 4 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to adjust the currently selected picture quality setting. 5 When you have all the settings as you want them, press HOME MENU to exit. You can now use the preset for any other input or the built-in TV tuner. Tip ⢠To see more of the picture as you adjust different settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you want to adjust. Note ⢠DVR-520H/720H only: When the DV input is selected, only VNR and Detail settings can be adjusted. ⢠When White AGC is On , the White Level setting canâÂÂt be adjusted. ⢠The 3-D Y/C and Black Setup settings apply only to NTSC video input. Setting the picture quality for disc playback This setting determines how the picture will look when playing discs. Choosing a preset 1 With a disc playing (or paused), press HOME MENU and select âÂÂVideo/Audio AdjustâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂVideo Adjustâ 3 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to change the setting. There are six presets available: ⢠TV(CRT) â suitable for standard cathode-ray tube TVs ⢠PDP â suitable for plasma display screens ⢠Professional â suitable for professional monitors ⢠Memory1 â user preset 1 ⢠Memory2 â user preset 2 ⢠Memory3 â user preset 3 You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for the current preset ( TV(CRT) , PDP or Professional ). 4 Press ENTER to select the preset. Creating your own set There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of picture quality settings for disc playback. 1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3). 2 Move the cursor down and select âÂÂDetailed SettingsâÂÂ. 3 Select the picture quality setting you want to adjust. You can adjust the following settings: ⢠YNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the Y (brightness) component. ⢠CNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the C (colour) component. ⢠QNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the block noise. ⢠Detail â Adjusts how sharp edges appear. ⢠White Level â Adjusts the intensity of white. ⢠Black Level â Adjusts the intensity of black. ⢠Black Setup â Corrects the standard reference black level (NTSC video only). ⢠Hue â Adjusts overall balance between red and green. ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts how rich the colours appear. 4 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to adjust the currently selected picture quality setting. 5 When you have all the settings as you want them, press HOME MENU to exit. Tip ⢠To see more of the picture as you adjust different settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you want to adjust. TV(CRT) Detailed Settings Memory1 Detailed Settings Off Max Off Max Off Max YNR CNR QNR Off Max Detail Min Max Min Max White Level Black Level Black Setup Memory1 0 IRE DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 95 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Video/Audio Adjust menu 12 96 En Note ⢠The Black Setup setting applies only when playing NTSC discs. Audio DRC ⢠Default setting: Off When watching Dolby Digital material at low volume, itâÂÂs easy to lose low level sounds completelyâÂÂincluding some of the dialog. Switching on Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control) can help by bringing up the low level sounds, while controlling high level peaks. 1 During playback or when paused, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂVideo/Audio AdjustâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂAudio AdjustâÂÂ. 3 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to adjust DRC from âÂÂOffâ to âÂÂMaxâÂÂ. Exactly how much difference you can hear between the settings will depend on the material. Remember ⢠Audio DRC is not effective when listening to a disc via the digital output when Dolby Digital Out is set to Dolby Digital . In this case adjust the dynamic range from your AV amplifier/receiver. Off Max Audio DRC Audio Adjust DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 96 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 97 En Chapter 13 The Initial Setup menu Using the Initial Setup menu The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on. ⢠Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial SetupâÂÂ. ⢠Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback these settings are grayed out in the Initial Setup menu. ⢠Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity. Basic settings Clock Setting The date (day, month, year) and time must be set before you can use any of the timer recording features. The clock can be set automatically if there is a broadcast station transmitting clock signals, or manually. Select Auto to set the clock automatically or Manual to display the clock setting screen. ⢠Auto clock setting Some TV channels broadcast time signals together with the program. This recorder can use these signals to set the clock automatically. Set âÂÂClock Set CHâ to the channel preset number that broadcasts a clock signal, then move the cursor down to âÂÂStartâ and press ENTER. If the time could not be set automatically, press RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select Manual . ⢠Manual clock setting If no stations in your area are broadcasting time signals, you can set the clock manually: Set your time zone. You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative to GMT. Move the cursor down and select âÂÂOnâ for summer time if you are currently on summer time, then press ENTER. Disc Setup Initial Setup Vi deo/Audio Adjust Play Mode DV Record DVR -520H/720H screen Timer Recording Disc Navigator Copy Disc History PhotoViewer Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Auto Manual Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Clock Setting Auto Clock Setting Date T ime Clock Set CH Pr 1 Initial Setup Start Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Clock Setting Manual Clock Setting T ime Zone Summer Time Off 1/ 2 England London Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Clock Setting On England London Manual Clock Setting T ime Zone Summer Time 1/ 2 Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 97 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 98 En Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then press ENTER to make all the settings. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to change the value in the highlighted field. Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to move from one field to another. Input Line System ⢠Default setting: 625System For standard PAL or SECAM recording, leave the input line system to 625System . When recording an NTSC or PALâÂÂ60 signal through an external input, change to 525System . Note ⢠When the current input is a built-in tuner channel preset, changing the input line system will usually also affect the input line system of the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) input. However if the AV2/L1 In setting is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1 In on page 102), then the L2 input is affected instead. ⢠If when this setting is changed, the screen goes blank (due to incompatibility with your TV), you can switch back by pressing and holding the front panel button then pressing DVD (also front panel) while the recorder is stopped. ⢠When you switch the Line Input System setting the Copy List is erased. If you switch the setting using the button and DVD buttons as described above, there is no confirmation, so please use with care. ⢠You canâÂÂt mix recordings of different TV line systems on the same disc. ⢠When you change this setting, the Input Colour System setting also changes (see Input Colour System on page 102). On Screen Display ⢠Default setting: On On the default setting, the recorder shows on-screen operation displays ( Play, Stop and so on). Change to Off to hide these displays. Front Panel Display ⢠Default setting: On On the default setting, the time is shown in the front panel display when the recorder is in standby. Switch to Off to have the front panel display switch off completely when in standby. Note ⢠When set to Off , the display still lights dimly in standby when setting a timer recording, or during Auto Start Recording. Power Save ⢠Default setting: Off When set to Off , signals arriving at the ANTENNA IN terminal and at the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/ DECODER) AV connector are passed through to the ANTENNA OUT terminal and to the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector, respectively, when the recorder is in standby. You can cut the standby power consumption of the recorder by turning off the through function for one or both terminals: Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Clock Setting Manual Clock Setting 2/2 Date T ime T ime Zone Summer Time 01 01 2004 THU 00 00 England London On Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator 525System 625System Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator On Off Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator On Off Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Mode1 Mode2 Off Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 98 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 99 En ⢠Mode1 â Through function only for the antenna terminal ⢠Mode2 â No through function ⢠Off â Through function for both antenna terminal and AV connector Note ⢠When a timer recording is set with VPS/PDC on, SCART through is always active. Remote Control Set ⢠Default setting: Recorder1 You only need to set this if you are using more than one Pioneer DVD recorder in the same room. So that each remote control operates only its own recorder, make this setting different for each recorder and remote in the room. There are three different recorder IDs. When set to Recorder2 or Recorder3 , the remote control mode is shown in the front panel display. After selecting a new recorder ID, you have to confirm the change by selecting Yes or No (use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons), then pressing ENTER . Note that as soon as you change the recorder ID, the remote becomes inoperative until you change the remote to the same ID. To set the remote, press and hold RETURN and a number button ( 1 , 2 or 3 ) until the indicator on the remote lights. Setup Navigator ⢠Default setting: n/a The Setup Navigator appears automatically when you switch on the recorder for the first time (or after resetting the recorder). It is also available from the Initial Settings menu should you need it at any other time. See also Switching on and setting up on page 25. Tuner settings Auto Channel Setting : Auto Scan This recorder has a built-in TV tuner for recording PAL B/ G, PAL I, SECAM L and SECAM D/K TV programs off the air or from analog cable TV. We recommend that you first use the Auto Channel Setting described here to tune into the channels in your area, then if there are any unwanted channels, you can disable them using Channel Skip (described below). 1 Choose âÂÂTunerâ from the Initial Setup menu, then âÂÂAuto Channel SettingâÂÂ, then âÂÂAuto ScanâÂÂ. 2 Select your country then press ENTER to start tuning. ⢠You can cancel before auto tuning has finished by pressing ENTER again. After auto scanning has finished, the channel mapping screen appears showing which channels have been assigned to which program numbers. Use the PREV/NEXT buttons to display the previous/next page. 3 Press HOME MENU to exit this screen. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Recorder1 Recorder2 Recorder3 Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Start Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping Set VIDEO Plus CH Auto Scan Download from TV Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping Set VIDEO Plus CH Auto Channel Setting Auto Channel Setting Country UK Initial Setup Pr System CH Name 1 I 26 2 I 33 3 I 23 4 I 30 5 I 37 6 I 35 7 I 39 8 I 26 Pr System CH Name 9 I 9 10 I 25 11 I 11 12 I 12 13 I 13 14 I 14 15 I 15 16 I 16 Initial Setup 1/7 Channel Mapping DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 99 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 100 En Note ⢠You can fine-tune individual stations using the Manual CH Setting feature. See Manual CH Setting below for how to use this. Auto Channel Setting : Download from TV If you connected this recorder to your TV using the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector, and if your TV supports this function, you can download all the channels that your TV is tuned to. Check your TVâÂÂs instruction manual for more details. 1 Choose âÂÂDownload from TVâÂÂ. 2 Select your country. 3 Press ENTER to start downloading. After downloading has finished, the channel mapping screen appears showing which channels have been assigned to which program numbers. Tip ⢠If the channel tuning information is updated in the TV, the recorder will automatically download the new information. Manual CH Setting The channel skip function lets you skip channels where there is no station so that as you change channels using the CHANNEL /â buttons or the number buttons, you only change to channels that have a station. The manual tuning function allows you to manually tune to stations, should you need to. 1 Select âÂÂManual CH SettingâÂÂ, then âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. Press ENTER to go to the country setting screen. 2 Select your country. 3 Press ENTER to go to the manual channel setting screen. ⢠Use the CHANNEL /â buttons or the number buttons to change channels. From this screen there are eight parameters you can set: ⢠Skip â If you want to skip the displayed channel (because there is no station assigned to that channel), change the Skip setting to On . ⢠CH System â Set the channel system used in your area or region. ⢠Channel â Change the channel number assigned to the current preset. ⢠AFT (Auto Fine Tune) â When set to On , the station is automatically tuned; set to Off to manually fine tune (see below). ⢠Level â Set the AFT level (see above). ⢠Sound System â Set the sound system used for the current channel. ⢠Name â Move the cursor right then input a name for the current station, (up to five characters) then press ENTER . ⢠Decoder â If the current channel is scrambled, requiring a decoder connected to the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) connector, set this to On . (See also AV2/L1 In on page 102.) Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping Set VIDEO Plus CH Auto Scan Download from TV Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping Set VIDEO Plus CH Auto Channel Setting Auto Channel Setting Country UK Initial Setup Downloading Cancel Pr 5 Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping Set VIDEO Plus CH Next Screen Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping Set VIDEO Plus CH Manual Channel Setting Manual Channel Setting Country UK Initial Setup Off Skip CH System Channel AFT Level Sound System Name Decoder UK & IE 2 On I Off Pr 1 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 100 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 101 En Channel Swapping The preset swap feature lets you swap the channel assignments of different programs. This is so that you can group together station presets which naturally go together. 1 Select âÂÂChannel SwappingâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂNext Screenâ to go to the swap presets screen. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a preset station to swap. ⢠Use the PREV/NEXT buttons to display the previous/ next page. 4 Press î (cursor right), then select a preset station to swap with the first preset. 5 Press ENTER to swap the presets. 6 If you want to swap more presets, press î (cursor left), then repeats steps 3 to 5. 7 Press HOME MENU to finish and exit. Set VIDEO Plus CH ⢠Default setting: n/a Guide channels are used by the VIDEO Plus system so that the channel number specified in the PlusCode programming numbers can be guaranteed to correspond to the correct station. 1 Select âÂÂSet VIDEO Plus CHâÂÂ, then âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. 2 Assign channel numbers to the guide channels as necessary. Look in your TV guide to see which channel numbers should be assigned to which guide channels. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to change the guide channel for setting. ⢠Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to change the channel number. ⢠Use the PREV / NEXT button to display the previous/ next 10 guide channels. 3 To return to the Initial Setup menu, press ENTER. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping Set VIDEO Plus CH Next Screen Initial Setup 11 Pr System CH Name 1 I CC40 2 I 2 3 I 3 4 I 4 5 I 5 6 I 6 Pr System CH Name 1 I CC40 2 I 2 3 I 3 4 I 4 5 I 5 6 I 6 [1 ] 1/17 [2] 1/17 Swap Preset Initial Setup 51 Pr System CH Name 1 I CC40 2 I 2 3 I 3 4 I 4 5 I 5 6 I 6 Pr System CH Name 1 I CC40 2 I 2 3 I 3 4 I 4 5 I 5 6 I 6 [1 ] 1/17 [2] 1/17 Swap Preset Initial Setup 53 Pr System CH Name 1 I CC40 2 I 2 3 I 3 4 I 4 5 I 5 6 I 6 Pr System CH Name 1 I CC40 2 I 2 3 I 3 4 I 4 5 I 5 6 I 6 [1 ] 1/17 [2] 1/17 Swap Preset Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping Set VIDEO Plus CH Next Screen Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping Set VIDEO Plus CH Set VIDEO Plus CH Initial Setup Set VIDEO Plus CH Guide Preset Guide Preset 1/26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Pr 4 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 101 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 102 En Video In / Out settings Input Colour System ⢠Default setting: Auto On the default setting, the recorder automatically detects whether the video signal from the built-in tuner or from one of the external inputs is PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or PALâÂÂ60. You may, however, occasionally need to set it manually if the picture is not displayed properly. 1 Select âÂÂInput Colour SystemâÂÂ, then âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. 2 Use the CHANNEL /â buttons or the INPUT SELECT button to switch between the built-in tuner and the external inputs. 3 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to change the input colour system for the current input or built-in tuner. ⢠The available settings depend on the Input Line System setting (see Input Line System on page 98). The table below shows the different options available. AV1 Out ⢠Default setting: Video You only need to make this setting if you connected this recorder to your TV using the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART AV connector. Important ⢠If you make a setting here that is incompatible with your TV, the TV may not display any picture at all. If this happens either switch everything off and reconnect to the TV using either the supplied video cable, or an S-video cable (see Using the S-video output on page 15 for more on this), or reset the recorder (see Resetting the recorder on page 112 for how to do this). ⢠Video â Compatible with all TVs, but lowest quality of the three AV settings. ⢠S-Video â Almost the same quality as RGB, but can give better results if you are using a long SCART cable. ⢠RGB â If your TV is compatible, this setting gives the best picture quality. AV2/L1 In ⢠Default setting: Video You only need to make this setting if you connected this recorder to another component using the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector. The AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) connector input can be set to one of the following settings: ⢠Video â Sets the input signal type to composite video. ⢠S-Video â Sets the input signal type to S-video. ⢠RGB â Sets the input signal type to RGB video. Input Line System Built-in tuner Exter nal input 625 System Auto Auto PAL PAL SECAM SECAM 525 System n/a Auto 3.58 NTSC PALâÂÂ60 Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Input Colour System A V1 Out A V2/L1 In NTSC on P AL TV Next Screen Initial Setup Auto Pr 5 Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Input Colour System A V1 Out A V2/L1 In NTSC on P AL TV Video S-Video RGB Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Input Colour System A V1 Out A V2/L1 In NTSC on P AL TV Video S-Video RGB Decoder Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 102 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 103 En ⢠Decoder â Use this setting if you are using a decoder connected to the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/ DECODER) input. (For scrambled channels, make sure that the manual channel Decoder setting is set to On âÂÂsee also Manual CH Setting on page 100). Note that on this setting, it is not possible to use Auto Start Recording. Note ⢠When the Input Line System setting is set to 525 System , RGB canâÂÂt be selected. ⢠When the Input Line System setting is set to 625 System , RGB can be selected, but if the Input Line System is then changed to 525 System , the AV2/L1 In setting automatically changes to Video . ⢠See also Input Line System on page 98. NTSC on PAL TV ⢠Default setting: On When set to On , NTSC discs (from the U.S., for example) will play correctly on a PAL-only TV. Change to Off if your TV is already NTSC-compatible. Depending on this setting and the Input Line System setting (see Input Line System on page 98), the signal format output when the recorder is stopped varies as shown in the table below. Note ⢠Many recent PAL TVs are capable of correctly displaying NTSC pictures without the need for this setting. Check the manual that came with your TV if youâÂÂre not sure whether yours has this feature. Audio In settings NICAM Select ⢠Default setting: NICAM If you want to record the non-NICAM audio in a TV broadcast, select Regular Audio , otherwise set to NICAM . (When set to NICAM , you can still select Regular Audio using the AUDIO button. See Changing audio channels on page 29.) Tuner Level ⢠Default setting: Normal Set to Compression if the audio level from the built-in tuner is excessively high causing distortion. External Audio ⢠Default setting: Stereo If the external source is standard stereo, leave set to Stereo . If each channel carries a separate soundtrack, change to Bilingual . DVR-520H/720H only: When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here. Input Line System NTSC on P AL TV Output when stopped 625 System Off PAL On PAL 525 System Off NTSC On PALâÂÂ60 Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Input Colour System A V1 Out A V2/L1 In NTSC on P AL TV On Off Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback NICAM Select T uner Level External Audio Bilingual Recording DV Input Input Level (L1) Input Level (L2) NICAM Regular Audio Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback NICAM Select T uner Level External Audio Bilingual Recording DV Input Input Level (L1) Input Level (L2) Normal Compression Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback NICAM Select T uner Level External Audio Bilingual Recording DV Input Input Level (L1) Input Level (L2) Stereo Bilingual Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 103 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 104 En Bilingual Recording ⢠Default setting: A/L When recording a bilingual source from an external input in Video mode or VR mode set to FINE/MN32 , or to the HDD, you can choose to record either the A/L (left), or the B/R (right) audio channel. Note ⢠If youâÂÂre recording in VR mode (except when set to FINE/MN32 ), both channels will be recorded and you can switch them as you like on playback. DV Input (DVR-520H/720H only) ⢠Default setting: Stereo1 You need to set this if you have a camcorder using 32kHz/ 12-bit sound connected to the front panel DV IN/OUT jack. Some digital camcorders have two stereo tracks for audio. One is recorded at the time of shooting; the other is for overdubbing after shooting. On the Stereo1 setting, the sound that was recorded while shooting is used. On the Stereo2 setting, the overdubbed sound is used. You can also choose a Mix setting of 25%, 50% or 75% for the Stereo 1 with a corresponding Stereo 2 setting of 75%, 50% or 25%. Input Level (L1 / L2) ⢠Default setting: 0dB You can adjust the gain of the audio from each external input individually, from âÂÂ6dB to 6dB in steps of 3 dB to optimize the recorded audio level. Audio Out settings Digital Out ⢠Default setting: On If at any time you need to switch off the digital audio output, set this to Off , otherwise leave it On . Note ⢠When set to Off , all the other Audio Out settings are grayed out and canâÂÂt be set. Dolby Digital Out You only need to make this setting if you connected this recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using the digital output. ⢠Default setting: Dolby Digital If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component) is Dolby Digital compatible, set to Dolby Digital , otherwise set to Dolby Digital î PCM . Check the manual that came with the connected component if youâÂÂre unsure whether it is Dolby Digital compatible. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback NICAM Select T uner Level External Audio Bilingual Recording DV Input Input Level (L1) Input Level (L2) A/L B/R Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback NICAM Select T uner Level External Audio Bilingual Recording DV Input Input Level (L1) Input Level (L2) Stereo1 Stereo2 Mix (Stereo1: 75%) Mix (Stereo1: 50%) Mix (Stereo1: 25%) Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback NICAM Select T uner Level External Audio Bilingual Recording DV Input Input Level (L1) Input Level (L2) Initial Setup 6dB 3dB 0dB âÂÂ3 d B âÂÂ6 d B Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Digital Out Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out On Off Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Digital Out Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out Dolby Digital Dolby Digital î PCM Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 104 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 105 En DTS Out You only need to make this setting if you connected this recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using the digital output. ⢠Default setting: On If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component) has a built-in DTS decoder, set to On , otherwise set to Off . Check the manual that came with the connected component if youâÂÂre unsure whether it is DTS compatible. Important ⢠If you set to On with a non-DTS compatible amp/ receiver, noise will be output when you play a DTS disc. ⢠When set to On , there is no analog audio output when playing a DTS DVD-Video disc. ⢠When playing a DTS audio CD (even when DTS Out is Off ), noise is output from the analog outputs. Do not play this through your amplifier and speakers. ⢠When playing a DTS audio CD, make sure that Stereo is selected using the AUDIO button. See Switching audio channels on page 44. 96kHz PCM Out You only need to make this setting if you connected this recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using the digital output. ⢠Default setting: 96kHz î 48kHz If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component) is compatible with high sampling rate audio (88.2 / 96 kHz), set to 96kHz , otherwise set to 96kHz î 48kHz . Check the manual that came with the connected component if youâÂÂre unsure whether it is compatible with high sampling rate audio. MPEG Out You only need to make this setting if you connected this recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using the digital output. ⢠Default setting: MPEG î PCM If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component) is MPEG audio compatible, set to MPEG , otherwise set to MPEG î PCM . Check the manual that came with the connected component if youâÂÂre unsure whether it is MPEG compatible. Language settings OSD Language ⢠Default setting: English This sets the language of the on-screen menus and displays. Audio Language ⢠Default setting: English This setting is your preferred audio language for DVD discs. If the language you specify here is recorded on a disc, the recorder automatically plays the disc in that language (although this depends on the Auto Language settingâÂÂsee Auto Language on page 106). Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Digital Out Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out On Off Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Digital Out Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out 96kHz î 48kHz 96kHz Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Digital Out Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out MPEG MPEG î PCM Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display English Français Deutsch Italiano Español Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display English French German Italian Spanish Other Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 105 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 106 En Choose Other if you want to specify a language other than those listed (see Selecting âÂÂOtherâ languages on page 107). Tip ⢠You can switch between the languages recorded on a DVD disc any time during playback using the AUDIO button. (This does not affect this setting.) Subtitle Language ⢠Default setting: English This setting is your preferred subtitle language for DVD discs. If the language you specify here is recorded on a disc, the recorder automatically plays the disc with those subtitles (although this depends on the Auto Language settingâÂÂsee Auto Language below). Choose Other if you want to specify a language other than those listed (see Selecting âÂÂOtherâ languages on page 107). Tip ⢠You can change or switch off the subtitles on a DVD disc any time during playback using the SUBTITLE button. (This does not affect this setting.) Auto Language ⢠Default setting: On When set to On , the recorder selects the default audio language on a DVD disc (French dialog for a French movie, for example), and displays subtitles in your preferred subtitle language only if that is set to something different. In other words, movies in your native language wonâÂÂt have any subtitles, while foreign language movies will be shown with subtitles. Set to Off to have the recorder play discs strictly according to your Audio Language and Subtitle Language settings. For Auto Language to work, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language settings must be the sameâÂÂsee Audio Language on page 105 and Subtitle Language above. Note ⢠Even when set to On , Auto Language may not work with some discs. In this case, set the audio and subtitle languages using the AUDIO and SUBTITLE buttons. Tip ⢠You can still switch audio and subtitle languages on playback using the AUDIO and SUBTITLE buttons. DVD Menu Language ⢠Default setting: w/Subtitle Language Some multilingual discs have disc menus in several languages. This setting specifies in which language the disc menus should appear. Leave on the default setting for menus to appear in the same language as your Subtitle Language âÂÂsee Subtitle Language above. Choose Other if you want to specify a language other than those listed (see Selecting âÂÂOtherâ languages on page 107). Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display English French German Italian Spanish Other Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display On Off Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display w/Subtitle Language English French German Italian Spanish Other Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 106 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 107 En Subtitle Display ⢠Default setting: On When set to On , the recorder displays subtitles according to the Subtitle Language and Auto Language settings. Set to Off to switch subtitles off altogether (although you may find that some discs override this setting). Set to Assist Subtitle to have the recorder display the extra assistive subtitles recorded on to some DVD discs. Selecting âÂÂOtherâ languages 1 Select âÂÂOtherâ from the language list. This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language. 2 Select the language you want. ⢠Select by language name: Use the î /î (cursor left/ right) buttons to change the language. ⢠Select by code number: Press î (cursor down) then use the number buttons to enter the four-digit language code. See Language code list on page 119 for a list of available languages and corresponding codes. 3 Press ENTER to confirm and exit the screen. Recording settings Manual Recording ⢠Default setting: Off On the default setting there are four different recording time/picture quality settings, FINE , SP , LP and EP . If you want to create a custom setting, switch on Manual Recording and select one of the 32 manual settings. When recording, you can select your Manual Recording setting using the REC MODE button. 1 Select âÂÂOn (go to setup)â to display the manual recording setting screen. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to change the manual recording level. ⢠You can also use the î and î buttons to cycle between levels MN1 , MN9 , MN21 and MN32 . ⢠To preview the recording quality, press î (cursor down) and select Preview . To return to the level adjust screen, press ENTER . 3 Press ENTER to set the manual recording level and return to the menu screen. Note ⢠The preset picture quality settings correspond to the following manual settings: FINE : MN32 , SP : MN21 , LP : MN9 , EP : MN1 . ⢠See Manual recording modes on page 118 for detailed information on the manual recording levels. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display On Off Assist Subtitle Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display DVD Menu Language DVD Menu Language English 0 514 Language Number Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Manual Recording Optimized Rec Navi Mark Auto Chapter (Video) Frame Accurate DVD-RW Auto Init. On (go to setup) Off Initial Setup Pr 5 DVD Remain 2h00m HDD Remain 30h33m MN 9 (4h00m/DVD) 2.60Mbps EP LP SP FINE Preview DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 107 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 108 En Optimized Rec ⢠Default setting: Off On the default setting, if a timer program (standard, easy or VIDEO Plus programming system) is set but there isnâÂÂt enough space on the disc at the recording quality set, the recording will start, but it will be cut off when the disc is full. Set Optimized Rec to On to have the recorder automatically adjust the recording quality to fit the available disc space. Note ⢠You may notice a reduction in picture quality if the recorder has to fit a lot of extra material into the remaining time available on the disc. ⢠If, even on recording level MN 1 , there is insufficient space available on the disc, the recording is made on the HDD at the quality setting you originally specified. ⢠Optimized Recording only compensates for the first (earliest starting) timer program if more than one has been set. ⢠Optimized recording works only with DVD recordings. ⢠Optimized recording canâÂÂt be used together with VPS/PDC. Navi Mark ⢠Default setting: 0 seconds In the Disc Navigator, each title is shown with a still frame picture to remind you what it is. This setting lets you decide the default still frame. The default setting of 0 seconds takes the first frame of the title, but you can also set it to 30 seconds or 3 minutes into the title (if the title is shorter than the setting, then the first frame is used). Auto Chapter (Video) ⢠Default setting: 10 minutes When recording in Video mode, a new chapter is started every 10 minutes on the default setting. You can change this interval to 15 minutes , or switch off automatic chapter marking altogether with the No Separation setting. Frame Accurate ⢠Default setting: Off When Frame Accurate setting is Off , exact frame accuracy is traded for high-speed copying when recording a Copy List. Switch Frame Accurate On to preserve the accuracy of the Copy List. However, copying some edited Video mode titles will be done in real time. Important ⢠When you change this setting the Copy List is erased. Make sure it is set how you want it before you start putting together a Copy List. ⢠The Frame Accurate setting has no effect on the actual video content stored on the HDD. DVD-RW Auto Init. ⢠Default setting: VR Mode When you load a new, blank DVD-RW disc the recorder automatically initializes it for recording. You can set it to initialize the disc for VR mode or Video mode recording. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback On Off Manual Recording Optimized Rec Navi Mark Auto Chapter (Video) Frame Accurate DVD-RW Auto Init. Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback 0 seconds 30 seconds 3 minutes Manual Recording Optimized Rec Navi Mark Auto Chapter (Video) Frame Accurate DVD-RW Auto Init. Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback No Separation 10 minutes 15 minutes Manual Recording Optimized Rec Navi Mark Auto Chapter (Video) Frame Accurate DVD-RW Auto Init. Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback On Off Manual Recording Optimized Rec Navi Mark Auto Chapter (Video) Frame Accurate DVD-RW Auto Init. Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback VR Mode Vi deo Mode Manual Recording Optimized Rec Navi Mark Auto Chapter (Video) Frame Accurate DVD-RW Auto Init. Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 108 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 109 En Playback settings TV Screen Size ⢠Default setting: 4:3 (Letter Box) If you have a widescreen TV, select the 16:9 settingâ widescreen DVD software is then shown using the full screen area. When playing software recorded in conventional (4:3) format, the settings on your TV will determine how the material is presentedâÂÂsee the manual that came with your TV for details on what options are available. If you have a conventional TV, choose either 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) . In Letter Box mode, widescreen software is shown with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. Pan & Scan chops the sides off widescreen material to make it fit the 4:3 screen (so even though the picture looks larger on the screen, youâÂÂre actually seeing less of the movie). See Screen sizes and disc formats on page 113 for more information. Still Picture ⢠Default setting: Auto The recorder uses one of two processes when displaying a still frame from a DVD disc. The default Auto setting automatically chooses the best setting each time. ⢠Field â produces a stable, generally shake-free image. ⢠Frame â produces a sharper image, but more prone to shake than field stills. Seamless Playback ⢠Default setting: Off During playback of a VR mode Play List, you may notice momentary interruption in the picture at edited points. The Seamless Playback feature lets you trade-off accuracy of the edit points for more seamless playback. When switched On , you may notice that the edit points are a few frames earlier or later than you set. Parental Lock ⢠Default level: Off ⢠Default password: none ⢠Default Country code: us (2119) Some DVD-Video discs feature a Parental Lock level. If the recorder is set to a lower level than the disc, it will require you to enter a password before the disc will play. This gives you some control about what your children watch on your DVD recorder. Some discs also support the Country code feature. The recorder does not play certain scenes on these discs depending on the Country code you set. Before you can set the Parental Lock level or the Country code you must set a password. As the password owner you can change the Parental Lock level or Country code whenever you like. You can also change the password. Note ⢠Not all discs that you may consider inappropriate for your children use the Parental Lock feature. These discs will always play without requiring the password first. ⢠If you forget the password, you can reset the recorder to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 112), then set a new password. Parental Lock : Set Password The password you set will enable you to change the Parental Lock level and Country code setting. It is also the password that you will need to enter if you want to play a disc with a parental lock level higher than the recorder. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan & Scan) 16:9 Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Field Frame Auto Initial Setup VR mode HDD Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator On Off Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 109 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 110 En 1 Select âÂÂSet PasswordâÂÂ. 2 Use the number buttons to input a four-digit password. 3 Press ENTER to set the password. Parental Lock : Change Password To change your password, confirm your existing password then enter a new one. 1 Select âÂÂChange PasswordâÂÂ. 2 Use the number buttons to enter your existing password. 3 Press ENTER. 4 Enter a new password. 5 Press ENTER. Parental Lock : Change Level 1 Select âÂÂChange LevelâÂÂ. 2 Use number buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER. 3 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a new parental lock level. 4 Press ENTER to set the new Parental Lock level. Parental Lock : Country Code You may also want to refer to the Country code list on page 119. 1 Select âÂÂCountry CodeâÂÂ. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Set Password Change Level Country Code Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Set Password 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Change Password Change Level Country Code Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Change Password Current Password New Password 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Change Password Current Password New Password 1 2 3 4 5 678 Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Change Password Change Level Country Code Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Parental Lock : Change Level Password Off 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Parental Lock : Change Level Password Off 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Change Password Change Level Country Code Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 110 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 111 En 2 Use number buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER. 3 Select a Country code. There are two ways you can do this. ⢠Select by code letter: Use î /î (cursor left/right) to change the country code. ⢠Select by code number: Press î (cursor down) then use the number buttons to enter the four-digit country code (you can find the Country code list on page 119.) 4 Press ENTER to set the new Country code. Note ⢠Changing the country code does not take effect until the next disc is loaded (or the current disc is reloaded). Angle Indicator ⢠Default setting: On On the default setting, when playing a DVD-Video disc that features multi-angle scenes, an icon appears on- screen during the parts of the disc where angle switching is available. Change to Off to hide the on-screen indicator. TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Parental Lock: Country Code Password Code Number us 1 2 3 4 2 1 1 9 Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Parental Lock: Country Code Password Code Number 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup us 2 1 1 9 TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Parental Lock: Country Code Password Code Number 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup us 2 1 1 9 Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator On Off Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 111 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 112 En Chapter 14 Additional information Resetting the recorder If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory settings. 1 Make sure that the recorder is on. 2 Press and hold î STOP and press î STANDBY/ ON. The recorder turns off with all settings reset. Setting up the remote to control your TV You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be able to use this feature you first have to program the remote with a maker code from the table below. 1 Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then enter the maker code for your TV. The LED indicator on the remote controls lights. See the table below for the list of maker codes. If there is more than one code given for your make, input the first one in the list. ⢠If the makerâÂÂs name of your TV doesnâÂÂt appear in the table below, you will not be able to use this remote to control your TV. 2 Press î TV to check that the remote works with your TV. If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch on/ off. If it doesnâÂÂt and there is another code given for your maker, repeat step 1 with a new code. Using the TV remote control buttons The table below shows how to use this remote control with your TV. Button What it does î TV P ress to switch the TV on/off (standby) INPUT SELECT P ress to change the TVâÂÂs video input TV VOLUME Use to adjust the TV volume TV CHANNEL Use to change TV channels Maker Code Alba 66 Bush 76 Finlux 84 Fisher 61, 65 F ujitsu 77 F unai 67 Goldstar 79 Grandiente 87 Grundig 51, 82 Hitachi 56, 60, 83, 86 IT T 70 Mitsubishi 59 Nokia 53, 81 P anasonic 58, 72 Philips 57, 85 P ioneer 50, 80 RCA 68 Salora 71 Samsung 73, 75 Sanyo 74 Sei 78 Sharp 52 Sony 54 T andy 69 T elefunken 64 Thomson 62 T oshiba 55 Victor 63 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 112 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 113 En Screen sizes and disc formats When viewing on a standard TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 16:9 4:3 (Letter Box) The program is shown in widescreen with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The sides of the program are cropped so that the picture ï¬Âlls the whole screen. 4:3 16:9 The program appears squashed. Set to either 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) . 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The program is presented correctly on either setting. When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 16:9 16:9 The program is presented in widescreen. 4:3 16:9 Y our TV will determine how the picture is presentedâÂÂcheck the manual that came with the TV for details. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 113 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 114 En Troubleshooting Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work. General Problem Remedy The disc is automatically ejected after closing the disc tray ⢠Check that the disc is not a DVD-RAM, DVD R/RW or other incompatible format disc (page 9). ⢠Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up). ⢠T ake out the disc and clean it (page 121). ⢠Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder (page 123). No picture ⢠Check that ever ything is connected properly (page 12). ⢠Check that the connected TV and/or the A V amp/receiver is set to the correct input. CanâÂÂt play a disc ⢠Check that the disc is not a DVD-RAM, DVD R/RW or other incompatible format disc (page 9). ⢠T ake out the disc and clean it (page 121). ⢠Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up). ⢠There may be condensation in the recorder . Leave the recorder for an hour or so for the condensation to evaporate. ⢠During HDD recording, you canâÂÂt play discs that are recorded with a Line System different to the current recorder setting. All settings are r eset ⢠If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on, all the settings will be lost. ⢠Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the power cord. Screen goes blank and contr ols are inoperative ⢠P ress î STOP then restart playback. Remote control does not work ⢠If you connected this recorder to another P ioneer product using the CONTROL IN jack, point the remote control at the other component to use (page 12). ⢠Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder (page 99). (When the batteries run down, the remote mode is automatically reset to Recorder1 .) ⢠Use the remote within its operating range (page 8). ⢠Replace the batteries (page 8). No sound or sound is distorted ⢠Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and the volume turned up. ⢠There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow motion play . P ress î PLAY to resume regular playback. ⢠DTS discs can only be played if this recorder is connected to a DTS decoder or DTS compatible amp/receiver . If you have connected a suitable decoder , also make sure that the Initial Setup > Audio Out > DTS Output setting is On . ⢠Some 96kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. In this case, switch the input of your amp/receiver to analog. ⢠Check the audio cable connections (page 12). ⢠If the sound is distorted, tr y cleaning the cable plugs. The picture fr om the external input is distorted ⢠If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot connect via this recorder . Connect the component directly to your TV . DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 114 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 115 En The picture is distorted ⢠Change the Input Line System setting (page 98). (Y ou can also change it by pressing the button and DVD on the front panel simultaneously with the recorder stopped.) Screen is str etched vertically or hori- zontally ⢠Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 109) is correct for the kind of TV you have (see also page 113). ⢠If you have a widescreen TV , check its aspect ratio settings. ⢠This recorder âÂÂs input switches into wide mode automatically according to the input signal. When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1 (widescreen signalling), set the connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio (standard) video. CanâÂÂt play a disc r ecorded using this recor der on another player ⢠If the disc was recorded in Video mode, make sure that itâÂÂs ï¬Ânalized (page 59). â¢Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in Video mode and ï¬Ânalized. ⢠If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be speciï¬Âcally RW compatible in order to play it (page 9). ⢠Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non- CPRM compatible players (page 46). During playback the picture is dark or distorted ⢠When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR , the picture will not display correctly . Connect the recorder directly to your TV . CanâÂÂt contr ol your TV using this remote contr ol ⢠If there is more than one code listed for your make of TV , tr y each one in turn (page 112). ⢠It is possible that none of the codes listed will work with your particular model of TV , even if the maker appears in the remote control code list. CanâÂÂt r ecord or does not r ecord suc- cessfully ⢠Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD. ⢠F or a Video mode disc, check that the disc isn âÂÂt already ï¬Ânalized. ⢠The HDD may contain up to 250 titles; one DVD disc 99 (Original) titles and 999 chapters. Check that these limits have not been reached. ⢠Check that the source you are tr ying to record is not copy protected. ⢠F or a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isnâÂÂt locked (page 92). ⢠Check that you are recording with the same TV system (P AL, NTSC, etc.) as the disc has already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV system. When recording to the HDD, it is also necessar y to set the Input Line System setting to match what you want to record (page 98). ⢠The power may have failed during recording. Timer program doesnâ t recor d suc- cessfully ⢠When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder âÂÂs built-in TV tuner , not the TV âÂÂs built-in tuner . ⢠When recording to a Video mode disc, programs that are copy-once protected cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material (page 46). ⢠T wo timer programs may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will record completely . ⢠The power may have failed during recording. After brieï¬Ây unplugging or after a power failure the fr ont panel dis- play shows âÂÂ--:--â â¢ A backup batter y inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from being reset when there is no power to the recorder . This batter y should last approximately ï¬Âve years from factor y shipping. Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use the recorder again . T o have the batter y replaced, contact your dealer or a P ioneer Ser vice Center . Front panel display shows âÂÂLOCKâ when a button is pressed ⢠The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 55). Problem Remedy DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 115 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 116 En Note ⢠If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions. Frequently asked questions In this section you can find answers to frequently asked questions on how to use your DVD recorder and what it can do. ⢠How do I make a high-quality copy? We recommend that you use the high-speed copy mode. Although the copy is faster than real time, there is no loss of picture or sound quality compared to the original. If there is not enough space on the disc to make a copy at the same picture quality as the original, we recommend that you change the recording mode to âÂÂOptimizedâÂÂ. This will fit the recording on to the available space on the disc. See also Copying and back-up on page 61. ⢠Can I make a DVD copy of, say, a movie that has had the commercials edited out? Yes. There are two ways to do this. You can either edit the video on the HDD then copy the edited version to DVD, or you can assemble a Copy List that cuts out the commercials, then record that to DVD. See also Copying and back-up on page 61. â¢I have a two-hour recording on the HDD made in FINE mode. Can I copy this to DVD in high-speed mode? A standard DVD disc can hold only an hour of FINE mode material, so you wouldnâÂÂt be able to make a high-speed copy of this on to one disc. You could divide up the recording on the HDD into two titles of an hour each and copy these to two DVDs (using high-speed copy). Alternatively, you could copy the material in SP (or Optimized) so as to fit it all on to one disc (note that there will be some loss in picture quality if you do this). See also Copying and back-up on page 61. ⢠Can I record a bilingual broadcast to the HDD, keeping both audio channels and switch them on playback? No. Only the audio channel set in the Bilingual Recording setting in the Initial Settings menu will be recorded. If you need to record both channels of audio, please record using a VR mode DVD-RW disc. See also Bilingual Recording on page 104. ⢠Can I record continuously on the HDD for more than six hours? Yes, timer recordings made to the HDD can by set for up to 24 hours. However, because the maximum length of a title is six hours, the recording will be spread over two or more titles. Note that there will be a short break in the recording between titles. See also Setting a timer recording on page 49. ⢠Can I copy a finalized Video mode disc (DVD-R or DVD- RW) to the HDD? Yes. Start playing the Video mode disc and use the One Touch Copy button to copy the currently playing title to the HDD. Repeat for as many titles on the disc as you want to copy. See also One Touch Copy* (DVD to HDD) on page 62. CanâÂÂt use One T ouch Copy (HDD to DVD) ⢠Make sure that there is a recordable DVD loaded with some free space for recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc. Also make sure that for a Video mode disc, the disc isn âÂÂt ï¬Ânalized. ⢠If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once protected, One T ouch Copy will not work. ⢠One T ouch Copy doesnâÂÂt work if the recorder is already recording to DVD. CanâÂÂt use One T ouch Copy (DVD to HDD) ⢠Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than 250 titles on the HDD. ⢠One T ouch Copy doesnâÂÂt work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD. The picture fr eezes and the front panel and remote contr ol buttons stop working ⢠P ress the front panel î STANDBY/ON button to switch the power off , then switch back on and restart playback. If the power fails to switch off , press and hold î STANDBY/ON for 10 seconds until the power switches off . Problem Remedy DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 116 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 117 En ⢠Can I use high-speed copy to copy from DVD to HDD? You can only use high-speed copy from DVD to HDD when copying Original titles from a VR mode DVD- RW. See also Copying from DVD to HDD* on page 71. ⢠Can I copy a copy-once protected program from a subscription satellite or cable channel to a DVD from the HDD? Yes, you can use high-speed copy to copy to a VR mode DVD-RW disc. You can also divide the recording on the HDD into a number of smaller titles if the whole recording wonâÂÂt fit on to one disc. See also Copying from HDD to DVD* on page 63. ⢠Can I play a DVD I recorded on this recorder on another DVD player? Yes, you can generally play DVD-R discs and Video mode DVD-RW discs recorded on this recorder on any standard DVD player. You may find, however, that some players will not play some recordable media. For VR mode DVD-RW discs, look for the âÂÂRW Compatibleâ mark to see if it will play the disc. About DV (DVR-520H/720H only) Using DV, also known as i.LINK, you can connect a DV- equipped camcorder to this recorder using a single DV cable for input and output of audio, video, data and control signals. The i.LINK interface is also known as IEEE 1394-1995. âÂÂi.LINKâ and the âÂÂi.LINKâ logo are trademarks. ⢠This recorder is only compatible with DV-format (DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite tuners and Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible. ⢠You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at a time to this recorder. ⢠You cannot control this recorder from external equipment connected via the DV IN/OUT jack. ⢠It may not always be possible to control the connected camcorder via the DV IN/OUT jack. ⢠This recorder only outputs HDD/DVD playback video from the DV IN/OUT jack; signals from the built-in TV tuner, CD, Video CD and other inputs are not output. ⢠Copy-protected or copy-once video is not output from the DV IN/OUT jack. ⢠Digital camcorders can usually record audio as stereo 16-bit/48kHz, or twin stereo tracks of 12-bit/ 32kHz. This recorder can only record one stereo audio track. Set the DV Input setting as required (see DV Input (DVR-520H/720H only) on page 104). ⢠Audio output from the DV IN/OUT jack is 16-bit only. ⢠Audio input to the DV IN/OUT jack should be 32 or 48kHz (not 44.1kHz). ⢠Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the source component pauses playback or plays an unrecorded section of tape, or if the power fails in the source component, or the DV cable becomes disconnected. DV-related messages You may see the following messages appear on your TV screen when using the DV IN/OUT jack. ⢠No DV camcorder connected. â The camcorder is not connected properly, or the camcorder is switched off. ⢠The DV camcorder is recording. â The camcorder is recording, so you cannot start recording from the camcorder to this recorder. ⢠You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at the same time. â The DV jack on this recorder supports connection to just one camcorder. ⢠No tape in the DV camcorder. â There is no cassette loaded into the connected equipment. ⢠The DV camcorder is in record-pause mode. â The camcorder is in record-pause mode. ⢠DV camcorder playback canceled. Recording has been paused. â Recording was paused because the camcorder is not in playback mode. ⢠Cannot operate the DV camcorder. â This recorder cannot control the camcorder. Try switching off the camcorder then switching it back on. ⢠Could not operate the DV camcorder. â This recorder was not able to control the camcorder. ⢠Recording has stopped because the recorded material on the tape finished. â When the recorded part of the DV tape comes to an end, this recorder automatically stops recording. ⢠Recording has stopped because DV camcorder playback stopped. â Recording stopped because DV camcorder playback was stopped or the camcorder was disconnected. ⢠The DV camcorder is not set for playback. Please select playback mode on the DV camcorder. â The camcorder is in camera mode. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 117 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 118 En Manual recording modes The table below shows the approximate recording times for all of the 32 manual recording modes, as well as the standard recording mode equivalents. Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in picture quality. The divisions for HDD recording are the same as those for Video mode. Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2ch format, except for MN32 which is in Linear PCM format. VR mode Video mode / HDD Level Rec. time Level Rec. time MN 1 360 mins. EP MN 1 360 mins. MN 2 345 mins. MN 2 345 mins. MN 3 330 mins. MN 3 330 mins. MN 4 315 mins. MN 4 315 mins. MN 5 300 mins. MN 5 300 mins. MN 6 285 mins. MN 6 285 mins. MN 7 270 mins. MN 7 270 mins. MN 8 255 mins. MN 8 255 mins. MN 9 240 mins. LP MN 9 240 mins. MN 10 230 mins. MN 10 230 mins. MN 11 220 mins. MN 11 220 mins. MN 12 210 mins. MN 12 210 mins. MN 13 200 mins. MN 13 200 mins. MN 14 190 mins. MN 14 190 mins. MN 15 180 mins. MN 15 180 mins. MN 16 170 mins. MN 16 170 mins. MN 17 160 mins. MN 17 160 mins. MN 18 150 mins. MN 18 150 mins. MN 19 140 mins. MN 19 140 mins. MN 20 130 mins. MN 20 130 mins. MN 21 120 mins. SP MN 21 120 mins. MN 22 110 mins. MN 22 110 mins. MN 23 105 mins. MN 23 105 mins. MN 24 100 mins. MN 24 100 mins. MN 25 95 mins. MN 25 95 mins. MN 26 90 mins. MN 26 90 mins. MN 27 85 mins. MN 27 85 mins. MN 28 80 mins. MN 28 80 mins. MN 29 75 mins. MN 29 75 mins. MN 30 70 mins. MN 30 70 mins. MN 31 65 mins. MN 31 65 mins. MN 32 61 mins. FINE MN 32 61 mins. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 118 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 119 En Language code list Language (Language code letter), Language code Country code list Country, Country code , Country code letter Japanese (ja), 1001 English (en), 0514 French (fr), 0618 German (de), 0405 Italian (it), 0920 Spanish (es), 0519 Chinese (zh), 2608 Dutch (nl), 1412 Portuguese (pt), 1620 Swedish (sv), 1922 Russian (ru), 1821 Korean (ko), 1115 Greek (el), 0512 Afar (aa), 0101 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Amharic (am), 0113 Arabic (ar), 0118 Assamese (as), 0119 Aymara (ay), 0125 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Bihari (bh), 0208 Bislama (bi), 0209 Bengali (bn), 0214 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Breton (br), 0218 Catalan (ca), 0301 Corsican (co), 0315 Czech (cs), 0319 Welsh (cy), 0325 Danish (da), 0401 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Estonian (et), 0520 Basque (eu), 0521 Persian (fa), 0601 Finnish (fi), 0609 Fiji (fj), 0610 Faroese (fo), 0615 Frisian (fy), 0625 Irish (ga), 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Galician (gl), 0712 Guarani (gn), 0714 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Hausa (ha), 0801 Hindi (hi), 0809 Croatian (hr), 0818 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Armenian (hy), 0825 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Indonesian (in), 0914 Icelandic (is), 0919 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Javanese (jw), 1023 Georgian (ka), 1101 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Cambodian (km), 1113 Kannada (kn), 1114 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Latin (la), 1201 Lingala (ln), 1214 Laothian (lo), 1215 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Latvian (lv), 1222 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Maori (mi), 1309 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Marathi (mr), 1318 Malay (ms), 1319 Maltese (mt), 1320 Burmese (my), 1325 Nauru (na), 1401 Nepali (ne), 1405 Norwegian (no), 1415 Occitan (oc), 1503 Oromo (om), 1513 Oriya (or), 1518 Panjabi (pa), 1601 Polish (pl), 1612 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Quechua (qu), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Kirundi (rn), 1814 Romanian (ro), 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 Sangho (sg), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Slovak (sk), 1911 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Samoan (sm), 1913 Shona (sn), 1914 Somali (so), 1915 Albanian (sq), 1917 Serbian (sr), 1918 Siswati (ss), 1919 Sesotho (st), 1920 Sundanese (su), 1921 Swahili (sw), 1923 Tamil (ta), 2001 Telugu (te), 2005 Tajik (tg), 2007 Thai (th), 2008 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Turkmen (tk), 2011 Tagalog (tl), 2012 Setswana (tn), 2014 Tonga (to), 2015 Turkish (tr), 2018 Tsonga (ts), 2019 Tatar (tt), 2020 Twi (tw), 2023 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Urdu (ur), 2118 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Volapük (vo), 2215 Wolof (wo), 2315 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Yoruba (yo), 2515 Zulu (zu), 2621 Argentina, 0118, ar Australia, 0121, au Austria, 0120, at Belgium, 0205, be Brazil, 0218, br Canada, 0301, ca Chile, 0312, cl China, 0314, cn Denmark, 0411, dk Finland, 0609, fi France, 0618, fr Germany, 0405, de Hong Kong, 0811, hk India, 0914, in Indonesia, 0904, id Italy, 0920, it Japan, 1016, jp Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr Malaysia, 1325, my Mexico, 1324, mx Netherlands, 1412, nl New Zealand, 1426, nz Norway, 1415, no Pakistan, 1611, pk Philippines, 1608, ph Portugal, 1620, pt Russian Federation, 1821, ru Singapore, 1907, sg Spain, 0519, es Sweden, 1905, se Switzerland, 0308, ch Taiwan, 2023, tw Thailand, 2008, th United Kingdom, 0702, gb USA, 2119, us DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 119 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 120 En On-screen displays and recorder displays The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation of their meaning. Message Explanation/Action ⢠Initializing disc. Please wait a moment. When you load a blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder automatically initializes it. ⢠Incompatible region number . The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the recorder and so will not play . ⢠Cannot recor d any more titles. ⢠No more space for ï¬Âle management data. ⢠Cannot add any more chapter marks. The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/ chapters or combine chapters. ⢠This disc cannot be recor ded. Undo the ï¬Ânal- ization. The disc was ï¬Ânalized on a non-P ioneer DVD recorder . Undo the ï¬Ânalization in order to recording/editing. ⢠Cannot play this disc. ⢠This disc cannot be recor ded. ⢠Cannot read the CPRM information. ⢠Could not recor d the information to the disc. ⢠Cannot edit. ⢠Could not initialize disc. ⢠Could not complete ï¬Ânalization successfully . ⢠Could not undo ï¬Ânalization successfully . ⢠Could not successfully unlock the disc. The disc may be dirty or damaged. T ake out the disc, clean it and retr y . If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even with a new disc, please consult a P ioneer Ser vice Center . ⢠Incompatible or unreadable disc. The disc loaded is a DVD-RAM, DVD R/RW or some other incompatible disc type. This display may also appear if the disc is dirty or damaged. ⢠Cannot recor d to a disc that is not CPRM com- patible. ⢠Cannot recor d this content using Video mode recor ding. The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD -RW disc with CPRM for recording. ⢠This content is copy protected. The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded. ⢠Incorrect CPRM information. The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder may be damagedâÂÂplease consult a P ioneer Ser vice Center . ⢠The audio will conform to the [Bilingual Recording] setting. When recording from an external input in Video mode, or in VR mode set to MN 32, audio is recorded in Linear PCM format. Y ou can only record the left or right channel; not both. ⢠Repairing disc. During recording, the power was cut. This display appears when the power is restored. ⢠Could not repair the disc. The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut. The contents of the recording will be lost. ⢠Overheating has stopped operation. Press DISPLA Y to clear this message. The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the operating limit. If this message reappears, please contact a P ioneer authorized ser vice center . DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 120 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 121 En Handling discs When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge. Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc becoming unusable. Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust, etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly from the center to the outside edge as shown in the diagram below. If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or other cleaning agents, including products designed for cleaning vinyl records. Storing discs Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl records, you should still take care to handle and store discs correctly. When you're not using a disc, return it to its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including under direct sunlight). Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing instrument. These could all damage the disc. For more detailed care information see the instructions that come with discs. Do not load more than one disc into the recorder. Damaged discs Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged, don't risk using it; you could end up damaging the recorder. This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all liability arising in connection with the use of shaped discs. ⢠There is no DV input or the input signal is unr e- cordable. ⢠Cannot preview because ther e is no DV input or the input signal is unrecor dable. No signal was detected at the DV input/output jack. This may appear if a blank section of DV tape is playing in the connected camcorder . (Applicable to DVR-520H/720H only .) ⢠This channelâ s TV system is differ ent from the recor derâ s setting. The TV system (P AL, NTSC, etc.) of the current channel is different from the TV system settings of this recorder . ⢠Recording failed due to a TV system mismatch. Press DISPLA Y to clear message. The timer recording failed because the TV system of the channel set for recording was different from the setting of the recorder . ⢠Playback has stopped because the TV system is differ ent than the recor ding. During recording or timer recording standby , the TV System (P AL, NTSC, etc.) of the playback video changed, causing playback to stop automatically . Message Explanation/Action DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 121 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 122 En Cleaning the pickup lens The DVD recorderâÂÂs lens should not become dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer- authorized service center. Although lens cleaners for CD players are commercially available, we do not re- commend using them since some may damage the lens. Condensation Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is brought into a warm room from outside, or if the temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the condensation wonâÂÂt damage the recorder, it may temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for about an hour before switching on and using. Hints on installation We want you to enjoy using this unit for years to come, so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a suitable location for it: Do... î Use in a well-ventilated room. î Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack. DonâÂÂt... î Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heat- generating appliances. î Place on a window sill or other place where the recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight. î Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke. î Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. î Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interferenceâÂÂespecially if the television uses an indoor antenna. î Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder may be exposed to smoke or steam. î Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with clothâÂÂthis may prevent proper cooling of the unit. î Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough to support all four of the unitâÂÂs feet. Moving the recorder If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if thereâÂÂs one loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press î STANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby, checking that the POWER OFF indication in the display goes off. Wait at least two minutes. Lastly, disconnect the power cord. Never lift or move the unit during playback or recordingâÂÂdiscs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged. Glossary Analog audio An electrical signal that directly represents sound. Compare this to digital audio which can be an electrical signal, but is an indirect representation of sound. See also Digital audio . Aspect ratio The width of a TV screen relative to its height. Conventional TVs are 4:3 (in other words, the screen is almost square); widescreen models are 16:9 (the screen is almost twice as wide as it is high). Chapter Just as a book is split up into several chapters, a title on the HDD/a DVD disc is usually divided into chapters. See also Title . Digital audio An indirect representation of sound by numbers. During recording, the sound is measured at discrete intervals (44,100 times a second for CD audio) by an analog-to- digital converter, generating a stream of numbers. On playback, a digital-to-analog converter generates an analog signal based on these numbers. See also Sampling frequency and Analog audio . Dolby Digital 1 With multichannel audio, this high quality surround system is used in many movie theaters around the world. Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolbyâ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 122 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 123 En DRM (Digital Rights Management) DRM (Digital Rights Management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by restricting playback, etc. of material on devices other the PC (or other WMA recording equipment) used to record it. For detailed information, please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC (or other WMA recording equipment) and/or software. DTS DTS stands for Digital Theater System. DTS is a surround system different from Dolby Digital that has become a popular surround sound format for movies. âÂÂDTSâ and âÂÂDTS Digital Outâ are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Dynamic range The difference between the quietest and loudest sounds possible in an audio signal (without distorting or getting lost in noise). Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks are capable of a wide dynamic range, delivering dramatic cinema-like effects. EXIF (Exchangeable Image File) A file format developed by Fuji Photo Film for digital still cameras. Digital cameras from various manufacturers use this compressed file format which carries date, time and thumbnail information, as well as the picture data. File extension A tag added to the end of a filename to indicate the type of file. For example, âÂÂ.mp3â indicates an MP3 file. ISO 9660 format International standard for the volume and file structure of CD-ROM discs. JPEG A file format used for still images, such as photographs and illustrations. JPEG files are identified by the file extension âÂÂ.jpgâ or âÂÂ.JPGâÂÂ. Most digital cameras use this format. MP3 MP3 (MPEG1 audio layer 3) is a compressed audio file format. Files are recognized by their file extension âÂÂ.mp3â or âÂÂ.MP3âÂÂ. MPEG audio An audio format used on Video CDs and some DVD discs. This unit can convert MPEG audio to PCM format for wider compatibility with digital recorders and AV amp/receivers. See also PCM . MPEG video The video format used for Video CDs and DVDs. Video CD uses the older MPEG-1 standard, while DVD uses the newer and much better quality MPEG-2 standard. Optical digital output A jack that outputs digital audio in the form of light pulses. Connect components with optical digital jacks using a special optical cord, available from specialist audio dealers. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) The most common system of encoding digital audio, found on CDs and DAT. Excellent quality, but requires a lot of data compared to formats such as Dolby Digital and MPEG audio. For compatibility with digital audio recorders (CD, MD and DAT) and AV amp/receivers with digital inputs, this unit can convert Dolby Digital and MPEG audio to PCM. See also Digital audio . PBC (PlayBack Control) (Video CD/Super VCD only) A system of navigating a Video CD/Super VCD through on-screen menus recorded onto the disc. Especially good for discs that you would normally not watch from beginning to end all at onceâÂÂkaraoke discs, for example. Regions (DVD only) (example region code marks) Regions associate discs and players with particular areas of the world. This unit will only play discs that have compatible region codes. You can find the region code of your unit by looking on the rear panel. Some discs are compatible with more than one region (or all regions). Sampling frequency The rate at which sound is measured to be turned into digital audio data. The higher the rate, the better the sound quality, but the more digital information is generated. Standard CD audio has a sampling frequency of 44.1kHz, which means 44,100 samples (measurements) per second. See also Digital audio . 2 ALL DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 123 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 124 En Title A collection of chapters on a the HDD/DVD disc. See also Chapter . Track Audio CDs and Video CDs use tracks to divide up the content of a disc. The DVD equivalent is called a chapter. See also Chapter . WMA WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 9 or Windows Media Player for Windows XP. Files are recognized by their file extension âÂÂ.wmaâ or âÂÂ.WMAâÂÂ. Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 124 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 125 En Specifications General System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDD, DVD-Video, DVD-R/RW, Video-CD, Super VCD, CD, CD-R/RW (WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA) Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220âÂÂ240 V, 50/60 Hz Power consumption DVR-420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 W DVR-520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 W DVR-720 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 W Power consumption in standby mode 0.68 W (Front panel display: off /Power Save Mode2) Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 kg Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 (W) x 59 (H) x 339 (D) mm Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5ðC to 35ðC Operating humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5% to 85% (no condensation) TV system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAL/SECAM/ NTSC (external input only) Recording Recording format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD Video Recording DVD-VIDEO Recordable discs DVD-RW (DVD Re-recordable disc) DVD-R (DVD Recordable disc) Video recording format Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5MHz Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPEG Audio recording format Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48kHz Compression format . . . . . . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM (uncompressed) Recording time HDDâÂÂDVR-720H Fine (FINE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 hours Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 hours Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 136 hours Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 204 hours Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34âÂÂ204 hours HDDâÂÂDVR-420H/520H Fine (FINE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17 hours Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 hours Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 hours Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 102 hours Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17âÂÂ102 hours DVD-R/DVD-RW Fine (FINE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 hour Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 hours Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 hours Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 hours Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1âÂÂ6 hours Tuner Receivable channels Timer Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programs Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (24-hour digital display) Power off memory . . . . Approx. 5 years (after manufacture) Input/Output VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal . . . . VHF/UHF set 75 ⦠(IEC connector) Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1 (rear), 2 (front) Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1), RCA jack (Input 2) Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1 Output Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1) RCA jack (Output) S-Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1 (rear), 2 (front) Y (luminance) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) C (colour) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1), 4 pin mini DIN (Input 2) S-Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1 / Output Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) C (colour) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1), 4 pin mini DIN (Output) RGB input Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1) RGB output Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1) VHF (low) VHF (high) Hyper UHF VHF (low) VHF (high) Hyper UHF STEREO B/G - A2 I - NICAM L - NICAM B/G - NICAM D/K - NICAM Channel E2 - E4 X - Z E5 - E12 S1 - S20 M1 - M10 U1 - U10 S21 - S41 E21 - E69 Frequency 47 - 89 MHz 104 - 300 MHz 302 - 470 MHz 470 - 862 MHz Channel A - C X - Z D - J 11, 13 S1 - S20 S21 - S41 E21 - E69 Frequency 44 - 89 MHz 104 - 300 MHz 302 - 470 MHz 470 - 862 MHz P AL B/G P AL I Channel 2 - 4 5 - 10 B - Q S21 - S41 21 - 69 Frequency 49 - 65 MHz 104 - 300 MHz 300 - 470 MHz 470 - 862 MHz Channel R1 - R5 R6 - R12 S1 - S20 S21 - S41 E21 - E69 Frequency 49 - 94 MHz 104 - 300 MHz 302 - 470 MHz 470 - 862 MHz SECAM L SECAM D/K DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 125 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 126 En Audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1 (rear), 2 (front) L/R Input level During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2V rms (Input impedance: more than 22 k ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1), RCA jacks (Input 2) Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1 Output During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2V rms (Output impedance: less than 1.5 k ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1), RCA jacks (Output) Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack DV input/output (DVR-520H/720H only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin (i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard) AV Connectors (21-pin connector assignment) AV connector input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-pin connector This connector provides the video and audio signals for connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor. PIN no. AV1(RGB)-TV / AV2(INPUT 1) 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 2/R out / Audio 2/R out 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . â / Audio 2/R in 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G out / G in 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 1/L out / Audio 1/L out 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . â / Audio 1/L in 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R or C out / R or C in 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B out / B in 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video out or Y out / Video out 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . â / Video in or Y in 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND Supplied accessories Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Audio / Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 RF antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Operating Instructions Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice, due to improvement. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 126 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Index 15 127 En English Index A Adjusting the picture quality 94âÂÂ96 Audio DRC 96 Audio language 23, 43, 105 Audio settings 103âÂÂ105 Auto language 105, 106 Auto Scan - see Automatic channel setup Automatic channel setup 25, 99 AV amplifier (connecting to) 19, 27 AV connector 12, 14âÂÂ18, 98, 100, 102, 126 B Bilingual audio 22, 29, 44, 46, 48, 103, 104, 116 C Camcorder - see DV camcorder Changing TV channels 29, 112 Chase play - see Simultaneous recording and playback Copy List 63âÂÂ74, 108, 116 CPRM 46, 120 D Disc and file formats 9, 113 Disc compatibility - see Disc and file formats Disc Navigator 36âÂÂ37, 76âÂÂ88, 108 Dolby Digital 6, 27, 43, 44, 46, 96, 104, 122 Downloading channel presets from the TV 13, 25, 100 DV camcorder 7, 20, 57, 58, 117 E Easy Timer Recording 6, 50 Editing recordings 76âÂÂ88 F Finalizing discs 34, 59, 93 I Initializing discs 45, 60, 93, 108 Input colour system 98, 102 Input line system 98, 102, 103 J JPEG picture files 7, 10, 35, 90âÂÂ91, 123 M Manual channel setup 100 Manual recording mode (MN) 22, 47, 107, 118 MP3 audio 7, 9, 32, 123 MPEG audio 12, 105, 123 N NICAM audio 29, 103 NTSC 22, 45, 46, 95, 96, 98, 102, 103 O One Touch Copy 6, 21, 23, 61, 62âÂÂ63, 116 One Touch Recording 7, 48 On-screen display (OSD) 33, 105 Optimized recording 7, 52, 65, 107, 116 Original content 7, 11, 23, 34, 76, 78, 79âÂÂ83, 87 OSD - see On-screen display (OSD) P PAL 45, 46, 98, 99, 102, 103 PBC (PlayBack Control for Video CD) 32, 36, 123 PhotoViewer 90âÂÂ91 Picture quality - see Adjusting the picture quality and Recording quality Play List 7, 11, 22, 23, 34, 76, 79, 84âÂÂ88 Play Mode menu 23, 40âÂÂ42 Program play 41, 41âÂÂ42 R Recording 6âÂÂ7, 28, 35, 45âÂÂ60 Recording quality 46, 47, 94 Recovery recording 7, 49 Remote control 8, 23, 99 Repeat play 41, 42 Rotating (a JPEG picture) 91 S Scanning 24, 38 SCART - see AV connector SECAM 45, 46, 98, 99, 102 Setting up 25âÂÂ27, 112 Simultaneous recording and playback 6, 35, 55 Slow motion playback 39 Subtitle langauge 23, 43, 106 T Timer recording 6, 13, 17, 22, 24, 35, 49âÂÂ55, 56 TV aspect ratio 108, 113 TV audio channel 29, 48, 103, 104 TV system - see Input line system and Input colour system V Video mode 7, 9, 10, 22, 35, 45, 59, 60, 62, 93, 108, 116, 118 VIDEO Plus 6, 23, 52âÂÂ53, 101 Video settings 94âÂÂ96, 102âÂÂ103 VPS/PDC 6, 22, 49, 51, 52, 55 VR mode 10, 22, 45, 48, 59, 60, 62, 79, 84, 93, 108, 109, 117, 118 W WMA audio 7, 9, 32, 124 Z Zooming (a JPEG picture) 91 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 127 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Pu blished by P ioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2004 P ioneer Corporation. All rights reser ved. <VRB1340-A> P rinted in the UK PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F . 1 1000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_A_En DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 128 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT W ARNING: The apparatus is not waterproofs, to prevent fir e or shocks hazard, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture and do not put any water source near this apparatus, such as vase, flower pot, cosmetics container and medicine bottle etc. D3-4-2-1-3_En CAUTION This product contains a laser diode of higher class than 1. T o ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. The following caution label appears on your unit. D3-4-2-1-8_En The ST ANDBY/ON switch is secondar y connected and therefore, does not separate the unit from mains power in ST ANDBY position. Therefore install the unit suitable places easy to disconnect the MAINS plug in case of the accident. The MAINS plug of unit should be unplugged from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time. D3-4-2-2-2a_En W ARNING: BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION CAREFULL Y . The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or r egion. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area wher e this unit will be used meets the requir ed voltage (e.g., 230V or 120V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_En This product complies with the Low V oltage Directive (73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC), EMC Directives (89/336/EEC, amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC). D3-4-2-1-9a_En DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Do not connect either wire to the earth terminal of a three pin plug. NOTE After replacing or changing a fuse, the fuse cover in the plug must be replaced with a fuse cover which corresponds to the colour of the insert in the base of the plug or the word that is embossed on the base of the plug, and the appliance must not be used without a fuse cover . If lost replacement fuse covers can be obtained from your dealer . Only 5 A fuses approved by B.S.I or A.S.T .A to B.S.1362 should be used. D3-4-2-1-2-2_En The wires in this mains lead are colour ed in accordance with the following code: Blue : Neutral Br own : Live If the plug provided is unsuitable for your socket outlets, the plug must be cut off and a suitable plug fitted. IMPOR T ANT FOR USE IN THE UNITED KINGDOM The cut-off plug should be disposed of and must not be inserted into any 13 amp socket as this can result in electric shock. The plug or adaptor or the distribution panel should be provided with 5 A fuse. As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows ; The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured black. The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured red. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified ser vice personnel. W ARNING: No naked flame sources, such as lighted candle, should be placed on the apparatus. If naked flame sources accidentally fall down, fir e spread over the apparatus then may cause fir e. D3-4-2-1-7a_En VENTILA TION: When installing this unit, make sure to leave space ar ound the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear , and 10 cm at each side). W ARNING: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensur e reliable operation of the product and to pr otect it from overheating, to prevent fir e hazard, the openings should never be blocked and covered with items, such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains, etc. Also do not put the apparatus on the thick carpet, bed, sofa, or fabric having a thick pile. D3-4-2-1-7b_En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 úC â 35 úC ( 41 úF â 95 úF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install in the following locations ⢠Location exposed to direct sunlight or strong artificial light ⢠Location exposed to high humidity , or poorly ventilated location D3-4-2-1-7c_En This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long- term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period. K041_En This pr oduct includes F ontAv enue î fonts licenced b y NEC corpor ation. F ontAvenue is a r egist er ed tr ademark of NEC Corpor ation. POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized ser vice center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
4 En Contents 01 Before you start Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 WhatâÂÂs in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . . 8 Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Disc / content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . 9 About the internal hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 02 Connecting up Rear panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Front panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Extra features for use with compatible TVs . . . . . . . . 13 Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Using other types of audio/video output . . . . . . . . . . 15 Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver . . . . . 16 Connecting an external decoder box (1) . . . . . . . . . . 17 Connecting an external decoder box (2) . . . . . . . . . . 18 Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver . . . . . . . . . . 19 Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Plugging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 03 Controls and displays Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 04 Getting started Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Selecting the hard disk or DVD for playback and recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Making your first recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Using the built-in TV tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Basic playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Using the Home Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Displaying disc information on-screen . . . . . . . . . . . 33 05 Playback Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Navigating discs and the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Switching DVD soundtracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 06 Recording About DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 About HDD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Recording time and picture quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Setting the picture quality/recording time . . . . . . . . 47 Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Setting a timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Timer recording FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Simultaneous recording and playback . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Recording from an external component . . . . . . . . . . 56 Automatic recording from a satellite tuner . . . . . . . . 56 Recording from a DV camcorder (DVR-520H/720H only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Recording from the DV output (DVR-520H/720H only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Playing your recordings on other DVD players . . . . . 59 Initializing a DVD-RW disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 07 Copying and back-up Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 One Touch Copy (HDD to DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 One Touch Copy (DVD to HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Copying from HDD to DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 HDD to DVD Copy List menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Recording the Copy List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 HDD to DVD Copy List commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Copying from DVD to HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 DVD to HDD Copy List menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Recording the Copy List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 DVD to HDD Copy List commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Using disc back-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 08 Editing The Disc Navigator screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Disc Navigator menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Editing VR mode Original, Video mode and HDD content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Editing HDD groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Creating and editing a VR mode Play List . . . . . . . . . 84 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
5 En 09 Disc History Using the Disc History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 10 The PhotoViewer Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 11 The Disc Setup menu Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Initialize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 HDD Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Finalize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 12 The Video/Audio Adjust menu Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Setting the picture quality for disc playback . . . . . . 95 Audio DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 13 The Initial Setup menu Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Tuner settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Video In / Out settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Audio In settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Audio Out settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Recording settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Playback settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 14 Additional information Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . 112 Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 About DV (DVR-520H/720H only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Manual recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Country code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 On-screen displays and recorder displays . . . . . . . 120 Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Storing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Damaged discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Moving the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 15 Index DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 6 En Chapter 1 Before you start Features ⢠HDD recording You can record up to 102 hours of video (in EP mode) on the internal 80GB (gigabyte) hard disk (HDD) on the DVR- 420H/520H, or up to 204 hours on the 160GB DVR-720H. With both recordable DVD and a high-capacity HDD in the same recorder, you have the flexibility to keep recordings on the HDD for quick access anytime, or record to DVD for archiving or playing on other DVD players. ⢠Copy between HDD and DVD You can copy recordings from the HDD to recordable DVD, or from DVD to the HDD. Usually you can use the high-speed copy feature, which can copy an hour of video in under two minutes (when recorded in EP mode using a DVD-R Ver. 2.0 / 8x disc). You can also choose to copy material at a different recording quality from the original. For example, you might want to copy a FINE mode (highest quality) recording on the HDD to SP (standard play) quality on a DVD so that you can fit other recordings on the same disc. ⢠One Touch Copy One Touch Copy makes copying the currently playing title from HDD to DVD, or DVD to HDD as simple as pressing a button. ⢠Chase play Using chase play you can start watching a recording before the recording has finished. For example, you could set a timer recording for a program that youâÂÂre going to miss the first 15 minutes of, then start watching while the recorder is still recording the program 15 minutes ahead of you. ⢠Simultaneous recording and playback Playback and recording for both DVDs and the built-in hard disk drive (HDD) are completely independent. For example you can record a broadcast program to either a recordable DVD or the HDD, while watching another recording you already made on the same DVD or on the HDD. ⢠Disc Navigator The on-screen Disc Navigator makes finding your way around the contents of a disc or the HDD easy. For recordable DVD and HDD content, moving thumbnail images are displayed for ease of use. The Disc Navigator is also where you can edit HDD and recordable DVD content. ⢠Disc History The Disc History screen shows disc information, including how much free space remains for recording, for the last 30 recordable discs loaded in the recorder. Every time you load a recordable disc, the Disc History is automatically updated with the latest information. ⢠Home Menu The Home Menu gives you on-screen access to all the recorderâÂÂs features in one convenient place, from setting up the recorder, to programming a timer recording and editing a recording. ⢠Cinema surround sound in your home Connect this recorder to a Dolby Digital and/or DTS- compatible AV amp/receiver to enjoy full surround sound effects from Dolby Digital and DTS DVD discs. ⢠Easy Timer Recording Setting the recorder to record a program is simple from the Easy Timer Recording screen. Set the channel to record and the recording quality, then graphically set the start and end times of the recording. ThatâÂÂs it! ⢠Program up to 32 timer recordings You can program the recorder to record up to 32 programs, up to a month in advance, using the VIDEO Plus î system * for easy programming if you want. As well as single programs, you can specify daily or weekly recordings, too. This recorder is also compatible with VPS/PDC systems, which ensure you donâÂÂt miss a timer recording, even if the broadcast is not running to schedule. *1 is a registered trademark of Gemstar Development Corporation. The VIDEO Plus system is manufactured under license from Gemstar Development Corporation. ⢠One Touch Recording Use One Touch Recording to start recording immediately in 30 minute blocks. Each time you press the î REC button, the recording time is extended by another 30 minutes. HDD VR mode HDD VR mode HDD î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 7 En ⢠Optimized recording Optimized recording adjusts the recording quality automatically if a timer recording will not fit onto a disc with the settings that you made. ⢠Auto Start Recording from satellite receiver or other set top box With a satellite receiver or other set top box connected to the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) inputs of this recorder, you can start and stop recording automatically according to the timer settings of the set top box. ⢠High quality 16-bit Linear PCM audio When recording using one of the high quality record settings ( FINE or MN32 ), the audio is recorded in uncompressed 16-bit Linear PCM format. This delivers great sounding audio to accompany the high picture quality. ⢠Picture quality adjustment features During playback, you can adjust various picture quality settings to improve the picture. You can also adjust the recording picture quality. For example, if you want to make a DVD copy of an old video tape, you can optimize the picture quality before transferring it to disc. ⢠Find what you want to watch quickly and easily Unlike video tape that needs to be wound to the correct place, you can jump right to the part of a DVD disc or the HDD that you want to watch. Search for a point on a disc by title, chapter or time. ⢠Manual recording In addition to the four preset recording quality modes ( FINE , SP , LP and EP ), the manual recording mode allows you to access 32 different recording quality/time settings, giving you precise control over the recording. ⢠Record to and from a DV camcorder (DVR-520H/ 720H only) This recorder has a built-in DV (Digital Video) input/ output jack for connection to a DV camcorder. This makes it ideal for transferring camcorder footage to DVD or HDD for editing. You can also transfer DVD or HDD content back to the camcorder if you need to. ⢠Safe, non-destructive editing When you edit a DVD-RW, the actual content of the disc (the Original content) is not touched. The edited version (the Play List content) just points to various parts of the Original content. ⢠Chapter marking You can easily add chapter markers anywhere in your recordings for easy editing. ⢠Play Video mode recordings on a regular DVD player Discs recorded using the Video mode can be played back on regular DVD players, including computer DVD drives compatible with DVD-Video playback * . * âÂÂDVD-Video formatâ recording: The use of the DVD- Video format for recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs is referred to as recording in âÂÂVideo modeâ on PioneerâÂÂs DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-R / DVD- RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD playback equipment, and there is DVD playback equipment that does not play DVD-R or DVD-RW discs recorded in the DVD-Video format. Note: âÂÂFinalizationâ is required. ⢠WMA, MP3 and JPEG file playback This recorder can play WMA and MP3 audio files and JPEG picture files on CD-R, CD-RW or CD-ROM discs. ⢠Disc Back-up The disc back-up feature gives you a convenient way to back-up important material on DVD to another recordable DVD disc. The material is first copied to the HDD, then on to a second DVD disc. ⢠Recovery Recording When a timer recording is set to use DVD but the disc loaded at the time of the recording is unrecordable, the program will automatically be recorded to the HDD. ⢠Auto Replace Recording This feature is useful for regular timer recordings of a TV program which you donâÂÂt want to keep after watching. Each time the program is recorded, it replaces the one currently on the HDD. ThereâÂÂs no need to manually delete it later. VR mode VR mode HDD Note on copying: Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners. Video mode HDD HDD DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 8 En WhatâÂÂs in the box Please confirm that the following accessories are in the box when you open it. ⢠Remote control ⢠AA/R6P dry cell batteries x2 ⢠Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow) ⢠RF antenna cable ⢠Power cable ⢠These operating instructions ⢠Warranty card Putting the batteries in the remote control 1 Open the battery compartment cover on the back of the remote control. 2 Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the battery compartment following the indications ( î , î ) inside the compartment. 3 Close the cover. Note Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting. Please observe the following: ⢠DonâÂÂt mix new and old batteries together. ⢠DonâÂÂt use different kinds of batteries togetherâ although they may look similar, different batteries may have different voltages. ⢠Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartment. ⢠Remove batteries from equipment that isnâÂÂt going to be used for a month or more. ⢠When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instructionâÂÂs rules that apply in your country or area. Using the remote control Please keep in mind the following when using the remote control: ⢠Make sure that there are no obstacles between the remote and the remote sensor on the unit. ⢠Remote operation may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unitâÂÂs remote sensor. ⢠Remote controllers for different devices can interfere with each other. Avoid using remotes for other equipment located close to this unit. ⢠Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the operating range of the remote. ⢠When the batteries run down or you change the batteries, the remote control mode and TV preset codes are automatically reset. See Remote Control Set on page 99 and Setting up the remote to control your TV on page 112 to reset them. ⢠Use within the operating range and angle, as shown. ⢠You can control this recorder using the remote sensor of another Pioneer component using the CONTROL IN jack on the rear panel. See Rear panel connections on page 12 for more information. 30 30 7m DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 9 En Disc / content format playback compatibility General disc compatibility This recorder is compatible with a wide range of disc types (media) and formats. Playable discs will generally feature one of the following logos on the disc and/or disc packaging. Note however that some disc types, such as recordable CD and DVD, may be in an unplayable formatâÂÂsee below for further compatibility information. ⢠Also compatible with KODAK Picture CD ⢠is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation. ⢠is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd. This recorder also supports the IECâÂÂs Super VCD standard. Compared to the Video CD standard, Super VCD offers superior picture quality, and allows two soundtracks to be recorded. Super VCD also supports the widescreen size. DVD-R/RW compatibility This recorder will play and record DVD-R/RW discs. Compatible media: ⢠DVD-RW Ver. 1.1, Ver. 1.1 / 2x and Ver. 1.2 / 4x ⢠DVD-R Ver. 2.0 and Ver. 2.0 / 4x / 8x Recording formats: ⢠DVD-R: DVD-Video format (Video mode) ⢠DVD-RW: Video Recording (VR) format and DVD- Video format (Video mode) Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD writers may reject DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 / 4x discs. If you want to share DVD-RW discs between this recorder and an older recorder/writer, we recommend using Ver. 1.1 discs. The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recorder compatibility with DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 / 4x discs. 1 Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized VR mode and Video mode discs may not play. 2 Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback. 3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play. CD-R/RW compatibility This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs. ⢠Compatible formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/Super VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA or JPEG files * ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this recorder. ⢠Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD-Audio and Video CD/Super VCD) ⢠Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio only Compressed audio compatibility ⢠Compatible media: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW ⢠Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio (WMA) ⢠Sampling rates: 44.1 or 48kHz ⢠Bit-rates: Any (128Kbps or higher recommended) ⢠Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback: Yes ⢠VBR WMA playback: No ⢠WMA encoder compatibility: Windows Media Codec 8 (files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR) ⢠DRM (Digital Rights Management) file playback: No (see also DRM in the Glossary on page 122) ⢠File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files â do not use for other file types) ⢠File structure: Up to 99 folders / 999 files (if these limits are exceeded, only files and folders up to these limits are playable) DVD-Video DVD-R DVD-RW Video CD Fujicolor CD Audio CD CD-R CD-RW VIDEO CD Su per Video CD (Super VCD) Model Playable Recordable DVR-7000 Yes 1,2,3 No DVR-3100/ DVR-5100H Yes 1 No DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 10 En WMA (Windows Media Audio) compatibility The Windows Media î logo printed on the box indicates that this recorder can playback Windows Media Audio content. WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by using Windows Media î Player version 7, 7.1, Windows Media î Player for Windows î XP, or Windows Media î Player 9 Series. Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. JPEG file compatibility ⢠Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2* still image files * File format used by digital still cameras ⢠Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:4:2, 4:2:0 ⢠Horizontal resolution: 160 â 5120 pixels ⢠Vertical resolution: 120 â 3840 pixels ⢠Progressive JPEG compatible: No ⢠File extensions: .jpg, jpeg, jif, jfif (must be used for the recorder to recognize JPEG files â do not use for other file types) ⢠File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders / 999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders that this on the disc then more can be reloaded) PC-created disc compatibility Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be playable in this unit due to the setting of the application software used to create the disc. In these particular instances, check with the software publisher for more detailed information. Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are not compatible with this recorder. Check the DVD-R/RW or CD-R/RW software disc boxes for additional compatibility information. Frequently asked questions ⢠WhatâÂÂs the difference between DVD-R and DVD-RW? The most important difference between DVD-R and DVD-RW is that DVD-R is a record-once medium, while DVD-RW is a re-recordable/erasable medium. You can re-record/erase a DVD-RW disc approximately 1,000 times. For more information, see About DVD recording on page 45. ⢠WhatâÂÂs VR mode? VR (Video Recording) mode is a special mode designed for home DVD recording. It allows flexible editing of recorded material compared to âÂÂVideo modeâÂÂ. On the other hand, Video mode discs are more compatible with other DVD players. ⢠Can I play my recordable discs in a regular DVD player? Generally, DVD-R discs and DVD-RW discs recorded in Video mode * are playable in a regular DVD player, but they must be âÂÂfinalizedâ first. This process fixes the contents of the disc to make them readable to other DVD players as DVD-Video discs. DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode are playable in some players. This label indicates playback compatibility with DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode (Video Recording format). However, for discs recorded with a record-only-once encrypted program, playback can only be achieved using the CPRM compatible device. Note that Pioneer cannot guarantee that discs recorded using this recorder will play on other players. * âÂÂDVD-Video formatâ recording: The use of the DVD- Video format for recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs is referred to as recording in âÂÂVideo modeâ on PioneerâÂÂs DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-R / DVD- RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD playback equipment, and there is DVD playback equipment that does not play DVD-R or DVD-RW discs recorded in the DVD-Video format. Note: âÂÂFinalizationâ is required. This recorder supports the recording of âÂÂcopy-onceâ broadcast programs using the CPRM copy protection system (see CPRM on page 46) on CPRM-compliant DVD-RW discs in VR mode. CPRM recordings can only be played on players that are specifically compatible with CPRM. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 11 En ⢠Do I need two DVD recorders for editing? What kind of editing can I do? Unlike editing video tape, you only need one DVD recorder to edit discs. With DVD, you edit by making a âÂÂPlay Listâ of what to play and when to play it. On playback, the recorder plays the disc according to the Play List. Throughout this manual, you will often see the words Original and Play List to refer to the actual content and the edited version. ⢠Original content refers to whatâÂÂs actually recorded on the disc. ⢠Play List content refers to the edited version of the discâÂÂhow the Original content is to be played. About the internal hard disk drive The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile piece of equipment. Please use the recorder following the guidelines below to protect against possible HDD failure. We recommend that you back up your important recordings onto DVD-R/RW discs in order to protect against accidental loss. ⢠Do not move the recorder while it is on. ⢠Install and use the recorder on a stable, level surface. ⢠Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan. ⢠Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid places, or in places that may be subject to sudden changes in temperature. Sudden changes in temperature can cause condensation to form inside the recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure. ⢠While the recorder is switched on, do not unplug from the wall socket or switch the electricity off from the breaker switch. ⢠Do not move the recorder immediately after switching it off. If you need to move the recorder, please follow the steps below: 1 After the message POWER OFF is shown in the display, wait at least two minutes. 2 Unplug from the wall socket. 3 Move the recorder. ⢠If thereâÂÂs a power failure while the recorder is on there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be lost. ⢠The HDD is very delicate. If used improperly or in an unsuitable environment, it is possible that the HDD will fail after a few years of use. Signs of problems include playback unexpectedly freezing and noticeable block noise (mosaic) in the picture. However, sometimes there will be no warning signs of HDD failure. If the HDD fails, no playback of recorded material will be possible. In this case it will be necessary to replace the HDD unit. Original Title 1 Play List Title 2 Title 1 Title 3 Title 2 Chapt er 1 C hapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 2 Chapt er 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 1 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 12 En Chapter 2 Connecting up Rear panel connections 1 ANTENNA IN/OUT Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA IN jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA OUT jack for connection to your TV. 2 OUTPUT jacks Stereo analog audio, video and S-video outputs for connection to a TV or AV amplifier/receiver. 3 AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector Audio/video output SCART-type AV connector for connecting to a TV or other equipment with a SCART connector. The video output is switchable between video, S-video and RGB. See page AV1 Out on page 102 for how to set this up. 4 AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector Audio/video input/output SCART-type AV connector for connecting to a VCR, or other equipment with a SCART connector. The input accepts video, S-video and RGB. See AV2/L1 In on page 102 for how to set this up. 5 CONTROL IN Use to control this recorder from the remote sensor of another Pioneer component with a CONTROL OUT terminal and bearing the Pioneer î mark. Connect the CONTROL OUT of the other component to the CONTROL IN of this recorder using a mini-plug cord. 6 DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL For connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver, Dolby Digital/ DTS/MPEG decoder or other equipment with optical digital input. 7 AC IN â Power inlet Front panel connections On the left side of the front panel a flip-down cover hides a second audio/video input, consisting of an S-video and standard (composite) video jack, and stereo analog audio jacks. DV-520H/720H only: On the right side is the DV input/ output i.LINK connector. This is for connection to a DV camcorder. DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CONTROL IN IN OUT ANTENNA RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV 1 (RGB) - TV 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 PULL-OPEN STANDBY/ON DVD HDD OPEN/CLOSE REC ONE TOUCH COPY î DV IN/OUT VIDEO S-VIDEO DV IN/OUT DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 13 En Extra features for use with compatible TVs When this recorder is connected to a TV that features T-V Link, EasyLink, MegaLogic, SMARTLINK, Q-Link, DATA LOGIC or NexTView Link using a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable (not supplied), the following functions are available: ⢠Direct TV recording ⢠Channel preset download ⢠Electronic Program Guide (EPG) download ⢠TV auto power on ⢠System configuration Direct TV recording Direct TV recording allows you to record the TV program that youâÂÂre watching, without having to worry about whether this recorder is set to the same channel. See Direct recording from TV on page 48 for more on this feature. Channel preset download This feature allows you to set up the channel presets of this recorder very simply using the channel presets and preset names already in your TV. See Switching on and setting up on page 25 and Auto Channel Setting : Download from TV on page 100 for more on this feature. EPG download EPG download allows you to program a timer recording directly from the electronic program guide displayed on your TV. See the manual that came with your TV for more information on how to use this feature. Note that the SP and LP options displayed on your TV correspond to the SP and LP recording modes on this recorder. TV auto power on When you play a disc in this recorder, the TV automatically turns on and switches to the correct video input. See the manual that came with your TV for how to use this feature. System configuration Basic settings, including language, country and TV screen size (aspect ratio), can be downloaded from your TV to help set up this recorder for use. Note ⢠For further details and compatibility information, see also the manual that came with your TV. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 14 En Easy connections The setup described below is a basic setup that allows you to watch and record TV programs, and play discs. Other types of connections are explained starting on the following page. Important ⢠These connections use SCART cables (not supplied). If your TV (or VCR) does not have a SCART connection, see the following page for connecting up using the supplied audio/video cable. ⢠The AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector can output ordinary (composite), S-video or RGB video, plus stereo analog audio. The AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) connector accepts ordinary, S-video and RGB video input, as well as stereo analog audio. See AV1 Out on page 102 and AV2/L1 In on page 102 for how to set them up. ⢠Before making or changing any rear panel connections, make sure that all components are switched off and unplugged from the wall outlet. 1 Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV outlet to the antenna input on your VCR. ⢠If you are not connecting a VCR in the chain, connect it to the ANTENNA IN jack on this recorder and skip the next step. 2 Use an RF antenna cable (one is supplied) to connect the antenna output of your VCR to the ANTENNA IN of this recorder. 3 Use another RF antenna cable to connect the ANTENNA OUT of this recorder to the antenna input on your TV. 4 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector on this recorder to the SCART AV connector on your TV. 5 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2/ AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your VCR. Note ⢠See the following page if you want to use one of the other kinds of audio/video connection. Tip ⢠This recorder has a âÂÂthroughâ function which allows you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner in this recorder while watching a video playing on your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in standby, Power Save must be set to Off âÂÂsee Power Save on page 98). TV VCR Antenna/cable TV wa ll outlet DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CONTROL IN IN OUT ANTENNA RL AU DIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV 1 (RGB) - TV SCART AV CONNECTOR SCART AV CONNECTOR ANTENNA IN ANTENNA OUT ANTENNA IN 1 2 4 5 3 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 15 En Using other types of audio/video output If you canâÂÂt use the SCART AV connector to connect your TV to this recorder, there are standard audio/video output jacks, as well as an S-video output. Using the supplied audio/video cable 1 Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT jack to a video input on your TV. Use the yellow jack of the supplied audio/video cable for the video connection. 2 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the corresponding audio inputs on your TV. Use the red and white jacks of the supplied audio/video cable for the audio connection. Make sure you match up the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound. Using the S-video output 1 Use an S-video cable (not supplied) to connect the S-VIDEO OUTPUT to an S-video input on your TV, monitor (or other equipment). 2 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the corresponding audio inputs on your TV. You can use the supplied audio/video cable, leaving the yellow video plug disconnected. Make sure you match up the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound. TV DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CONTROL IN IN OUT ANTENNA RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV 1 (RGB) - TV VIDEO INPUT AUDIO INPUT 1 2 TV DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CONTROL IN IN OUT ANTENNA RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV 1 (RGB) - TV S-VIDEO INPUT AUDIO INPUT 1 2 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 16 En Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver If you have a cable or satellite receiver with a built-in decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this page. If you are using a separate decoder box for your cable/satellite TV, set up following the instructions on the next page. Using the setup on this page you can: ⢠Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box/satellite tuner. Important ⢠Do not connect this recorder âÂÂthroughâ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver. 1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown. This enables you to watch and record TV channels. 2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your TV. This enables you to watch discs. 3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2/ AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your satellite/cable box. This enables you to record scrambled TV channels. Note ⢠The diagram shows SCART video connections, but you can alternatively use any of the other audio/video connections. Tip ⢠This recorder has a âÂÂthroughâ function which allows you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner in this recorder while watching a video playing on your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in standby, Power Save must be set to Off âÂÂsee Power Save on page 98). TV Antenna/cable TV wa ll outlet DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CONTROL IN IN OUT ANTENNA RL AU DIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV 1 (RGB) - TV Cable/Satellite box SCART AV CONNECTOR SCART AV CONNECTOR ANTENNA IN ANTENNA OUT ANTENNA IN 1 1 2 3 1 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 17 En Connecting an external decoder box (1) If you have an external, dedicated decoder box for your satellite or cable TV system, use the setup described on this page. Important ⢠Do not connect your decoder box directly to this recorder. ⢠Information from the decoder (for example, relating to pay TV services), is only viewable when this recorder is off (in standby). ⢠For timer recording to work properly on this recorder, the VCR/satellite receiver/cable box must also be switched on during recording. ⢠It is not possible to watch one TV program and record another using this setup. 1 Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV outlet to the antenna input on your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box. 2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect your decoder to your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box. See the manual for your decoder box for more detailed instructions. 3 Use a SCART cable to connect your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box to the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector on this recorder. 4 Use a SCART cable to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to your TV. TV Antenna/cable TV wa ll outlet VCR/Satellite receiver /Cable box Decoder DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CONTROL IN IN OUT ANTENNA RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV 1 (RGB) - TV SCART AV CONNECTOR SCART AV CONNECTOR SCART AV CONNECTOR ANTENNA IN 1 4 2 3 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 18 En Connecting an external decoder box (2) If you only have a decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this page. Using the setup on this page you can: ⢠Record scrambled channels received using the recorderâÂÂs built-in TV tuner. Important ⢠Do not connect this recorder âÂÂthroughâ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver. 1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown. This enables you to watch and record TV channels. 2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your TV. This enables you to watch discs. 3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2/ AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your decoder box. This enables you to record scrambled TV channels. Note ⢠In order to use this setup, you will need to make the following settings from the Initial Setup menu: â Set the AV2/L1 In setting to Decoder from the Initial Setup menu (see AV2/L1 In on page 102). â From the Manual CH Setting screen, set the Decoder setting for the scrambled channels to On (see Manual CH Setting on page 100). TV Antenna/cable TV wa ll outlet Decoder DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CONTROL IN IN OUT ANTENNA RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV 1 (RGB) - TV SCART AV CONNECTOR SCART AV CO NNECTOR ANTENNA IN 1 2 3 1 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 19 En Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver To enjoy multichannel surround sound you need to connect this recorder to an AV amplifier/receiver using the digital optical output. In addition to a digital connection, we recommend also connecting using the stereo analog connection for compatibility with all discs and sources. YouâÂÂll probably also want to connect a video output to your AV amplifier/receiver. Use the ordinary video output (as shown here), or the S-video output. Important ⢠Noise may be output from your speakers if the recorder is not set up to work with your AV amplifier/receiver properly (see Audio Out settings on page 104). 1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown. This enables you to watch and record TV channels. 2 Connect one of the DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL jack on this recorder to an optical digital input on your AV amplifier/receiver. This enables you to listen to multichannel surround sound. 3 Connect the analog AUDIO OUTPUT and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks on this recorder to an analog audio and video input on your AV amplifier/receiver. 4 Connect the AV amplifier/receiverâÂÂs video output to a video input on your TV. Note ⢠The diagram shows ordinary video connections, but you can alternatively use an AV connector or S-video connections, if theyâÂÂre available. Important ⢠Do not connect this recorder to your TV âÂÂthroughâ your VCR using A/V cables. Always connect it directly to your TV. TV AV amp/ receiver Antenna/cable TV wall outlet DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CONTROL IN IN OUT ANTENNA RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV 1 (RGB) - TV ANTENNA IN VIDEO IN DIGITAL IN OPTICAL A/V IN 1 VIDEO OUT 1 3 2 1 4 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 20 En Connecting other AV sources Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder 1 Connect a set of audio and video outputs on your VCR or camcorder to a set of inputs on this recorder. This enables you to record tapes from your VCR or camcorder. ⢠You can use ordinary video or S-video cables for the video connection. ⢠The front panel connections make convenient connections for a camcorder. 2 Connect a set of audio and video inputs on your VCR or camcorder to a set of outputs on this recorder. This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR or camcorder. ⢠You can use ordinary video or S-video cables for the video connection. ⢠Alternatively, you can use the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART connector for audio/video input and output with just one SCART cable. Connecting a DV camcorder (DVR-520H/720H only) Using the front panel DV IN/OUT jack, it is possible to connect a DV camcorder or video deck, or DVD-R/RW recorder and digitally transfer DV tapes or DVD-R/RW discs to DVD-R/RW. Important ⢠This jack is for connection to DV equipment only. It is not compatible with digital satellite tuners or D-VHS video decks. 1 Use a DV cable (not supplied) to connect the DV in/out jack on your DV camcorder/deck to the front panel DV IN/OUT jack of this recorder. Plugging in Before plugging in for the first time, make sure that everything is connected properly. 1 Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC IN inlet and the other end into a standard household power outlet. Analog camcorder VCR AUDIO/VIDEO OUTPUT AUDIO/VIDEO INPUT 1 2 AUDIO/VIDEO INPUT AUDIO/VIDEO OUTPUT DV IN/OUT DV camcorder DV IN/OUT DV IN/OUT DV IN/OUT AC IN DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 21 En Chapter 3 Controls and displays Front panel 1 î STANDBY/ON Press to switch the recorder on/into standby. 2 HDD Press to switch to the hard disk drive (HDD) for recording and playback. The button lights when HDD is selected. 3 DVD Press to switch to DVD for recording and playback. The button lights when DVD is selected. 4 IR remote sensor (page 8) 5 Disc tray 6 Front panel display See Display on page 22 for details. 7 DV IN/OUT jack (DVR-520H/720H only) (page 12, 20, 56, 57, 59, 104, 117) Digital input/output jack for use with a DV camcorder. 8 /â (page 29, 31, 48) Use to change TV channels, skip chapters/tracks, etc. 9 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 62) Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing title to DVD or the HDD. 10 î REC Press to start recording. 11 î Press to stop recording. 12 î Press to start or restart playback. 13 î Press to stop playback. 14 î OPEN/CLOSE Press to open/close the disc tray. 15 Front panel inputs (page 12) Pull the cover down where indicated to access the front panel input jacks. Especially convenient for connecting camcorders and other portable equipment. PULL-OPEN STANDBY/ON DVD HDD OPEN/CLOSE REC ONE TOUCH COPY î DV IN/OUT 1 2 3 4 6 5 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 9 10 Illustration shows DVR-520H DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 22 En Display 1 î / î Arrows indicate the copy direction between the HDD () and DVD ( ). 2 î PLAY / î REC indicators Lights during playback / recording; blinks when playback / recording is paused. 3 î î (page 28) The â î â and â î â indicators light to indicate that the HDD or DVD is selected for recording/playback. 4 PL (page 78, 84) Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the recorder is in Play List mode. 52 3 (page 99) Shows the remote control mode (if nothing is displayed, the remote control mode is 1). 6 REM Lights when the character display is showing the remaining available recording time. 7V Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is loaded. 8R / RW Indicates the type of recordable DVD loaded: DVD-R or DVD-RW. 9 (page 49) Lights when a timer recording has been set. (Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but there isnâÂÂt a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has been set to HDD but the HDD is not recordable.) AUTO (page 56) Lights when Auto Start Recording has been set, and during Auto Start Recording. 10 Recording quality indicators (page 46) FINE Lights when the recording mode is set to FINE (best quality). SP Lights when the recording mode is set to SP (standard play). LP Lights when the recording mode is set to LP (long play). EP Lights when the recording mode is set to EP (extended play). MN Lights when the recording mode is set to MN (manual recording level) mode. 11 Character display 12 (page 104) Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast are recorded. 13 VPS / PDC (page 49) Lights when receiving a VPS/PDC broadcast during a VPS/PDC-enabled timer recording. 14 NTSC Lights when playing NTSC format video. 15 OVER (page 104) Lights when the analog audio input level is too high. 13 12 14 15 11 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 2 1 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 23 En Remote control 1 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 62) Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing title to DVD or the HDD. 2 Remote control indicator Lights when setting up the remote control for use with a TV (page 112) and when setting the remote control mode (page 99). 3 î STANDBY/ON Press to switch the recorder on/into standby. 4 î OPEN/CLOSE Press to open/close the disc tray. 5 HDD (page 28) Press to select the hard disk (HDD) for recording or playback. 6 DVD (page 28) Press to select the DVD for recording or playback. 7 DVD playback functions AUDIO (page 29, 43, 44) Changes the audio language or channel. (When the recorder is stopped, press to change the tuner audio.) SUBTITLE (page 43) Displays/changes the subtitles included in multilingual DVD-Video discs. ANGLE (page 44) Switches camera angles on discs with multi-angle scenes. 8 PLAY MODE (page 40) Press to display the Play Mode menu (for features such as search, repeat and program play). 9 TV/DVD (page 29) Press to switch between âÂÂTV modeâÂÂ, in which you get the picture and sound from the TVâÂÂs tuner, and âÂÂDVD modeâÂÂ, in which you get picture and sound from the recorderâÂÂs tuner (or an external input). 10 Alphanumeric buttons and CLEAR Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title selection; channel selection, and so on. The same buttons can also be used to enter names for titles, discs and so on. Use CLEAR to clear an entry and start again. 11 INPUT SELECT (page 56) Press to change the input to use for recording. 12 CHANNEL /â (page 29) Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner. 13 VIDEO Plus (page 52) Press, then use the number buttons to enter a PlusCode î programming number for timer recording. 14 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 36, 76) / TOP MENU (page 31) Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top menu if a DVD-Video disc is loaded. 15 PLAY LIST (page 78, 84) / MENU (page 31) Press to switch between Original and Play List content on VR mode discs, or display the disc menu if a DVD-Video disc is loaded. 16 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) and ENTER Used to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to select the currently highlighted option. 17 HOME MENU (page 33) Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can navigate all the functions of the recorder. 18 RETURN Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or display. DVD RECORDER STANDBY/ON ONE TOUCH COPY OPEN/CLOSE TOP MENU MENU RETURN DISC NAVIGAT OR PLAY LIST HOME MENU DISC HISTORY NAVI MARK CASE SELECTION CHP MARK EASY TIMER INPUT SELECT INPUT SELECT TV/DVD ABC AUDIO HDD DVD SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR TV DIRECT REC DISPLAY ENTER CLEAR TV CONTROL CHANNEL CHANNEL VOLUME REC PREV PA USE STOP OK CM SKIP REV SCAN PLAY FWD SCAN NEXT STEP/SLOW STOP REC REC MODE TIMER REC î î î î î î VIDEO Plus 1 2 4 8 12 15 18 3 5 13 14 16 17 19 20 23 7 21 6 11 9 22 24 10 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 24 En 19 Playback controls (page 30) î REV SCAN / FWD SCAN î (page 38) Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press again to change the speed. î PLAY Press to start playback. î PAUSE Press to pause playback or recording. î STOP Press to stop playback. CM BACK (commercial back) Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward through the audio or video playing. CM SKIP (commercial skip) Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward through the audio or video playing. î PREV / NEXT î Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/ track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu page. î STEP/SLOW î (page 39) During playback, press to start slow-motion playback; while paused, press to show the previous or next video frame. 20 Recording controls (page 28) î REC Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the recording time in blocks of 30 mins. î STOP REC Press to stop recording. REC MODE (page 47) Press repeatedly to change the recording mode (picture quality). TIMER REC (page 51) Press to set a timer recording from the standard Timer Recording screen. EASY TIMER (page 50) Press to set a timer recording from the Easy Timer Recording screen. 21 DISC HISTORY (page 89) Press to display summary information (disc name, recording time left, etc.) from the last 30 recordable discs loaded. NAVI MARK (page 37) Press to select a thumbnail picture for the current title for use in the Disc Navigator screen. CHP MARK (page 81) Press to insert a chapter marker when playing/ recording a VR mode DVD-RW disc or the HDD. 22 DISPLAY (page 33) Displays/changes the on-screen information displays. 23 TV CONTROL (page 112) After setting up, use these controls to control your TV. 24 TV DIRECT REC (page 48) Press to start recording whatever channel your TV is set to. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 25 En Chapter 4 Getting started Switching on and setting up When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you can make several basic settings using the Setup Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the clock, the internal TV tuner and the video and audio output settings. If youâÂÂre using the recorder for the first time, we strongly recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting to use the recorder. 1 Switch on your TV and set the video input to this recorder. 2 Press the î STANDBY/ON button on the remote control or the front panel to switch on. When you switch on for the first time, your TV should display the Setup Navigator screen. (If the Setup Navigator doesnâÂÂt appear, you can also access it from the Initial Setup menu; see page 99). ⢠If this recorder is connected to a compatible TV using a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable, the recorder will take a few seconds to download country, TV screen size and language information. (Check the manual that came with your TV for compatibility information.) 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to choose a language, then press ENTER . 4 Press ENTER to start setting up using the Setup Navigator. ⢠If you donâÂÂt want to use the Setup Navigator, press î (cursor down) to select Cancel , then press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator. 5 Select the Auto Channel Setting (â Auto Scanâ or âÂÂDownload from TVâÂÂ), or âÂÂDo not setâÂÂ, then press ENTER. DVD RECORDER STANDBY/ON ENTER î Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Language English français Deutsch Italiano Español Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Start Cancel Complete this setup before you start using your recorder . Please use the Initial Setup if you want to make more detailed settings. Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Auto Channel Setting Auto Scan Download from TV Do not set Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 26 En ⢠Select Do not set if you want to skip setting up the channels (because they have already been set up, for example). ⢠You can only use the Download from TV feature if you connected this recorder to your TV using a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable connected to the AV1(RGB)-TV connector, and if your TV supports this function (check your TVâÂÂs instruction manual for more details). ⢠Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to choose your country, then press ENTER. ⢠Auto-tuning channels The Auto Scan option automatically scans and sets the channel presets. ⢠Downloading channels from your TV Use the Download from TV option to download all the channels that your TV is tuned to. 6 Select âÂÂAutoâ for automatic time setting, or âÂÂManualâ to set the clock manually, then press ENTER. ⢠Auto clock setting Some TV channels broadcast time signals together with the program. This recorder can use these signals to set the clock automatically. Set âÂÂClock Set CHâ to the channel preset number that broadcasts a time signal, then move the cursor down to âÂÂStartâ and press ENTER. The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After you see that the time has been set, select Next to proceed. If the time could not be set automatically, press RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select Manual . ⢠Manual clock setting If no stations in your area are broadcasting time signals, you can set the clock manually. Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to set your time zone. You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative to GMT. Press î (cursor down) then use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂOnâ or âÂÂOffâ for summer time, then press ENTER . Select On if you are currently using summer time. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Country Selection Country UK Initial Setup T uning 11/107 Cancel Downloading Cancel Pr 5 Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Clock Setting Auto Manual Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Auto Clock Setting Date T ime Clock Set CH Pr 1 Start Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Auto Clock Setting Date T ime Clock Set CH Pr 1 Start Next Initial Setup 01 01 2004 THU 11 20 Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Manual Clock Setting T ime Zone Summer Time Off 1/ 2 England London Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator On England London Manual Clock Setting T ime Zone Summer Time 1/ 2 Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 27 En Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then press ENTER to make all the settings. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to change the value in the highlighted field. Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to move from one field to another. ⢠You can go back to the previous screen at anytime in the Setup Navigator by pressing RETURN . 7 Select the TV screen type, âÂÂStandard (4:3)â or âÂÂWide (16:9)âÂÂ. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select, then press ENTER . 8 Is this recorder connected to an AV amplifier/ receiver for digital audio? Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select Connected , or Not Connected , then press ENTER . ⢠If you select Not Connected , that completes the setup. Press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator, or select Go Back if you want to go back and start again. ⢠Select the digital audio formats your AV amplifier/ receiver is compatible with. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select Dolby Digital , Dolby Digital, DTS or PCM only , then press ENTER . ⢠Check the operating instructions that came with your AV amplifier/receiver if youâÂÂre not sure what itâÂÂs compatible with. 9 Is your AV amplifier/receiver compatible with 96 kHz PCM digital audio? Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select Compatible , Not Compatible , or DonâÂÂt Know , then press ENTER . ⢠Check the operating instructions that came with your AV amplifier/receiver if youâÂÂre not sure. 10 Press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator, or select âÂÂGo Backâ if you want to start again. That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator. Other settings you can make After setting up using the Setup Navigator, you should be ready to start enjoying your DVD recorder. ItâÂÂs possible, however, that you may want to make a couple of additional settings, depending on how the recorder is set up for terrestrial TV broadcasts. ⢠Manual channel setting â This setting lets you skip channels where there is no station, as well as manually tune to stations. See Manual CH Setting on page 100. ⢠VIDEO Plus channel setting â This setting lets you assign guide channels to ensure that the VIDEO Plus programming system works correctly. See Set VIDEO Plus CH on page 101. ⢠Setting up the remote to control your TV â You can set up the supplied remote control to control many brands of TV. See Setting up the remote to control your TV on page 112. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Manual Clock Setting 2/2 Date T ime T ime Zone Summer Time 01 01 2004 THU 00 00 England London On Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control SetSetup Navigator Setup Navigator TV Screen Size Wide (16:9) Standard (4:3) Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator AV Amp Digital Connect Connected Not Connected Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator AV Amp Compatibility Dolby Digital Dolby Digital , DTS PCM only Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator 96kHz PCM Compatible Compatible Not Compatible Don't Know Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Setup is complete! Enjoy using your DVD recorder! Finish Setup Go Back Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 28 En Selecting the hard disk or DVD for playback and recording The HDD and DVD buttons (remote control and front panel) are used to select the hard disk (HDD) or DVD for playback and recording. The indicator in the front panel display shows which is currently selected. Making your first recording This quick guide shows you how to make a basic recording of a TV program on either the HDD, or to a recordable DVD. Recording is covered in much more detail in chapter 6 ( Recording ). 1 If they arenâÂÂt already on, switch on your TV and this recorder. Press î STANDBY/ON to switch on. ⢠Make sure that the video input on your TV is set to this recorder. 2 Press HDD to record to the HDD, or DVD to record to a recordable DVD. If you choose to record to the HDD, skip to step 5 now. 3 Press î OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray. 4 Load a blank DVD-R or DVD-RW disc with the label side face-up, using the disc guide to align the disc. ⢠When you load a new, blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder will take a moment to initialize it for recording. 5 Use the CHANNEL /â buttons to select the TV channel you want to record from. ⢠You can also use the /â buttons on the front panel if the recorder is stopped. ⢠Channel presets are numbered 1âÂÂ99. ⢠If the recorder is connected to your TV using a SCART cable and your TV supports Direct Recording, itâÂÂs possible to quickly start recording whatever channel your TV is tuned to. See Direct recording from TV on page 48 for detailed instructions. 6 Press î REC to start recording. ⢠By default, the recording will be in SP (standard play) mode, which will give you around two hours of recording from a blank DVD disc. ⢠You can pause recording by pressing î PAUSE . Press î REC or î PAUSE again to restart recording. 7 When you want to stop recording, press î STOP REC. Playing back your recording The TV program you just recorded should be on the HDD or DVD disc as a single title with one or more chapters. ⢠Press î PLAY to start playback. If you want to stop playback before the end of the recording, press î STOP . HDD DVD î î DVD RECORDER STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE HDD DVD CHANNEL REC STOP PLAY STOP REC î î î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 29 En Using the built-in TV tuner Changing TV channels There are three different ways to select TV channels. Note that you canâÂÂt change the TV channel during playback, recording or during recording standby. ⢠CHANNEL /â buttons on the remote ⢠Number buttons on the remote â For example, to select channel 4, press 4 then ENTER ; for channel 34, press 3 , 4 , ENTER . ⢠/â buttons on the front panel Note ⢠Channel presets are numbered 1âÂÂ99. ⢠You canâÂÂt change TV channels during playback or recording, or while in recording standby. Changing audio channels You can change the audio channel of the broadcast or external input signal. ⢠Press AUDIO to change the audio. The current audio channel is displayed on-screen. ⢠If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM Select on page 103) is set to NICAM and you are watching a NICAM broadcast, you can switch between NICAM and Regular (non-NICAM) audio. ⢠If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also select the language. ⢠You can also select the language for a non-NICAM bilingual broadcast. ⢠When watching a recording made from an external input with Bilingual recording selected (see External Audio on page 103), you can switch the audio channel between left ( L ), right ( R ) or both ( L R ). Note ⢠When recording to the HDD, or in Video mode, or in VR mode using the FINE / MN32 setting, only one channel of a bilingual broadcast is recorded. In this case, decide which language you want to record before recording by setting the Bilingual Recording setting (see Bilingual Recording on page 104). Switching between TV and DVD When the recorder is stopped or recording you can choose whether to have the audio/video from the built-in TV tuner (or external input) play on your TV (âÂÂDVD modeâÂÂ), or watch the channel that the TV is currently set to (âÂÂTV modeâÂÂ). During playback or when a menu is being displayed on- screen, the sound and video is always routed to your TV and is unaffected by the TV/DVD mode setting. Note that the recorder must be connected to your TV using a SCART cable to be able to use this feature. ⢠Press TV/DVD to switch between TV mode and DVD mode. ENTER CHANNEL AUDIO NICAM Regular NICAM A NICAM B Regular NICAM A B A (L) B (R) A B (L R) LR L R TV/DVD DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 30 En Basic playback This section shows you how to use your recorder for playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of video from the HDD. More playback features, such as repeat and program play, are covered in the next chapter. Important ⢠Throughout this manual, the term âÂÂDVDâ means playback-only DVD-Video discs and DVD-R/RW. If a function is specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it is specified. ⢠Some DVD-Video discs donâÂÂt allow certain playback controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This is not a malfunction. 1 Press î STANDBY/ON to switch on. Also turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the correct video input. 2 Press HDD to playback from the HDD, or DVD to play a DVD. If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 5 below. 3 Press î OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray. 4 Load a disc. Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if youâÂÂre loading a double- sided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to play face down). ⢠If you want to play a DTS audio CD, please first read the note on page 32. 5 Press î PLAY to start playback. ⢠If youâÂÂre playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc menu may appear when you start playback. Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor) buttons and ENTER to navigate DVD disc menus, and the number buttons and ENTER for Video CD menus. ⢠When playing video from the HDD, playback will automatically stop after the end of a title is reached. ⢠See the following sections for more details on playing specific kinds of discs. 6 To stop playback, press î STOP. 7 When youâÂÂve finished using the recorder, eject the disc and switch the recorder back into standby. ⢠To open/close the disc tray, press î OPEN/CLOSE . Remove the disc before putting the recorder into standby. ⢠Press î STANDBY/ON to switch the recorder into standby. DVD RECORDER STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE ENTER STOP PLAY î î î î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 31 En Playing DVD discs The table below shows the basic playback controls for DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs. Playing from the HDD The table below shows the basic playback controls when playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD). P ress to start playback. If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play- back starts from the place last stopped. P ress to stop playback. Y ou can resume playback from the same point by pressing î PLAY . (P ress î STOP again to cancel the resume function.) P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. P ress to start scanning. P ress repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. P ress to skip to previous/next chapter/title. (Y ou can also use the front panel / â but- tons to do this during playback.) Except VR mode: During playback, enter a chapter number then press ENTER to skip directly to that chapter within the currently playing title. On some discs, you can also use the num- ber buttons to select numbered items in the disc menu. VR mode only: During playback, enter a title number then press ENTER . All: P ress CLEAR to clear a number entr y and start again. (Commercial back/skip) Each press skips backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of 10 minutes forward or three minutes back. During playback, press to start slow- motion playback. P ress repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. P ress to display the âÂÂtopâ menu or menu of a DVD-V ideo disc (these are often the same). Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVD- Video disc menus; press ENTER to select items. P ress to return to the previous level of a DVD-V ideo disc menu. PLAY STOP PA USE REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT CLEAR ENTER SKIP CM BACK STEP/SLOW î î TO P MENU MENU ENTER RETURN P ress to start playback. If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play- back starts from the place last stopped. Playback automatically stops after the end of a title is reached. P ress to stop playback. Y ou can resume playback from the same point by pressing î PLAY . (P ress î STOP again to cancel the resume function.) P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. P ress to start scanning. P ress repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. P ress to skip to previous/next chapter/title. (Y ou can also use the front panel / â but- tons to do this during playback.) During playback, enter a title number then press ENTER to skip directly to that title. P ress CLEAR to clear a number entr y and start again. (Commercial back/skip) Each press skips backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of 10 minutes forward or three minutes back. During playback, press to start slow- motion playback. P ress repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. PLAY STOP PA USE REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT CLEAR ENTER SKIP CM BACK STEP/SLOW î î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 32 En Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs The table below shows the basic playback controls for audio CDs, and WMA/MP3 files. Note ⢠If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/ receiver with a digital connection. Noise will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is selected using the AUDIO button (see Switching audio channels on page 44). ⢠Scanning doesnâÂÂt work with WMA tracks. Playing Video CD/Super VCDs The table below shows the basic playback controls for Video CD/Super VCDs. Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short) menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you load them and display a menu on-screen from where you can select what to watch. P ress to start playback. P ress to stop playback. P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. CD and MP3 only: P ress to start scanning. P ress again to increase the scanning speed. (There are two scan speeds; the current scan speed is shown on-screen.) P ress to skip to previous/next track (or folder for WMA/MP3 disc). (Y ou can also use the front panel / â buttons to do this during playback.) During playback, enter a track number then press ENTER to skip directly to that track. P ress CLEAR to clear a number entr y and start again. PLAY STOP PA USE REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT CLEAR ENTER P ress to start playback. Video CD only: If RESUME is displayed on- screen, playback starts from the place last stopped. P ress to stop playback. Video CD only: Y ou can resume playback from the same point by pressing î PLAY . (P ress î STOP again to cancel the resume function.) P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. P ress to start scanning. P ress repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. P ress to skip to previous/next track. (Y ou can also use the front panel / â buttons to do this during playback.) When a PBC menu is displayed, press to display the previous/next page. During playback, enter a track number then press ENTER to skip directly to that track. P ress CLEAR to clear a number entr y and start again. While a PBC menu screen is displayed, use to select numbered menu items. Video CD only: Each press skips backward/ forward progressively up to a maximum of 10 minutes forward or three minutes back. Note that this function doesnâÂÂt work when playing in PBC mode. During playback, press to start slow- motion playback. P ress repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame (forward direction only). P ress to display the disc menu of a Video CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode. PLAY STOP PA USE REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT CLEAR ENTER SKIP CM BACK STEP/SLOW î î RETURN DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 32 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 33 En Note ⢠When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and program play are not available. You can play a PBC Video CD /Super VCD in non-PBC mode by pressing î to start playback instead of î PLAY . Using the Home Menu From the Home Menu screen you can access all the features of the recorder. Press HOME MENU to display the Home Menu screen: Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor) buttons followed by ENTER to select the option you want. To exit the Home Menu, press HOME MENU . Note ⢠Some options in the Home Menu may be grayed out sometimes, indicating that they are not available at the present time. For example, the Photoviewer option is grayed out unless there is a disc loaded that contains JPEG image files. Displaying disc information on- screen You can display various on-screen information about the disc loaded or the HDD. 1 Press DISPLAY repeatedly to display/change the on-screen information. ⢠Press once to show the HDD and removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the status of just the currently selected playback/ recording device (HDD or removable disc). ⢠The on-screen display automatically disappears after 150 minutes. 2 To hide the information display, press DISPLAY repeatedly until it disappears. The example displays below are a guide only; actual displays vary according to the disc loaded, etc. Home menu options Timer Recording (page 49) Disc Setup (page 92) Disc Navigator (page 36, page 76) Initial Setup (page 97) Copy (page 61) Video/Audio Adjust (page 94) Disc History (page 89) Play Mode (page 40) PhotoViewer (page 90) DV Record (DVR-520H/ 720H only) (page 57) Timer Recording Disc Navigator Copy Disc History PhotoViewer Disc Setup Initial Setup V ideo/Audio Adjust Play Mode DV Record DVR -520H/720H screen RETURN HOME MENU ENTER HDD DVD DISPLAY î î î î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 33 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 34 En HDD and removable disc activity display Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity. Use the HDD and DVD buttons to switch between the two kinds of display. The example displays below show high-speed copying from HDD to DVD, and HDD chase playback. Stop display 1 1 DVD-RW Original / Play List If a VR mode disc is loaded, this shows whether playback is currently set to Original or Play List . During preview playback of the Copy List, this shows Copy List . 2 Disc type and mode Shows the disc type ( HDD , DVD-R , DVD-RW , CD , etc.), and the disc mode for recordable DVD, if applicable ( VR or Video ). 3 Recording mode and time Shows the current recording mode ( FINE , SP , LP , etc.), and the total recording time of the disc. 4 Resume Shows Resume if playback can be resumed from the last place stopped. 5 Recording time remaining Shows the approximate recording time left on the disc in the current recording mode. 6 Preset name and number Shows the preset name and preset number for the currently selected channel. 7 Audio mode Shows the broadcast audio mode for the current channel preset ( Mono , Stereo , etc.). 8 Copy control information Shows recording restrictions of the current channel program. 9 Disc name Shows the disc name. (For CDs, this area shows playable files other than CD audio tracks; for example, Multi-format: WMA/MP3 .) 10 Finalized Shows Finalized if a recordable DVD is finalized. 11 TV/DVD mode Shows the current mode of the recorder (see Switching between TV and DVD on page 29). Stop display 2 1 Date and time 2 Number of titles/tracks on disc For a VR mode DVD-RW, the number of Original and Play List titles are shown separately. Play display 1 Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD) HDD Remain 10h35m Stop Remain âÂÂhâÂÂâÂÂm Stop Hi-Speed Copy 0h08m left DVD-RW Video Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD) HDD Remain 10h35m Chase Play Rec Remain 0h52m Stop DVD-RW Video Relative pla yback position Recording time î Stop DVD-RW VR Original Disc Name : Comedy shows DVD Mode Finalized Resume FINE (1h00m/DVD) Rem. 0h35m Copy Once St ereo ABC Pr 1 1 2 8 7 10 9 11 3 6 4 5 î Stop DVD-RW VR Original Titles TV Mode : Original 99 Lock Disc : On Play List 15 14:52 MON 15/11/2004 Copy Once Ster eo ABC Pr 1 1 2 î Play DVD-R Video DVD Mode Title T otal Chapters 15 3âÂÂ2 0. 00. 15 0. 11. 52 5 1 2 3 4 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 34 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 35 En 1 Number of chapters in title 2 Current title and chapter number (For CD/Video CD/Super VCD, shows current track; for WMA/MP3, shows current folder and track; for JPEG disc, shows current folder and file.) 3 Elapsed title time (For CD, WMA, MP3, Super VCD, shows elapsed track time; for Video CD, shows elapsed disc time.) 4 Total running time of title 5 Angle indicator Lights during multi-angle scenes. Play display 2 1 Chase playback, simultaneous record/playback , copy, disc back-up Indicates that recording, copying or back-up is in progress. 2 Elapsed chapter time 3 Total running time of chapter 4 Data transfer rate Shows the current data rate being read from the disc. 5 Copy protected material (!) Shows â ! â if the playback material is copy-once protected. Recording display 1 Current title number 2 Elapsed recording time 3 Timer recording start and stop times Shows the start and stop times if the current recording is a timer recording. 4 Remaining recording time available Shows the amount of space left on the disc in the current recording mode. 5 Recording mode Shows the current recording mode ( FINE , SP , LP , etc.), and the total recording time of the disc. Note ⢠When using the simultaneous play and record feature, the display shows information for playback only. ⢠During real-time copy, the copy source playback information is displayed. ⢠Data transfer rate shows the amount of video and audio information recorded on the disc. It is not an indication of picture/audio quality. ⢠The Video mode disc displays become the same as a DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized. ⢠The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis is calculated based on a 12cm/4.7GB disc at the displayed record setting. ⢠Recording and playback times for TV recordings are approximately 0.1% shorter than the actual time. This is because of the slightly different frame rates of TV broadcasts versus DVD. ⢠The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time display when the disc is paused. ⢠Copy Once or CanâÂÂt Record messages may appear in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that the broadcast TV program contains copy control information. î Play DVD-R Video Title Name 21/11 Football match : C hapter T otal îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî C hapter Time 3âÂÂ2 0. 00. 15 ! 0. 00. 21 0. 01. 52 4.32Mbps Hi-Speed Copy 5 2 3 4 1 î Rec DVD-R Video FINE (1h00m/DVD) Rem. 0h35m 21:00 â 22:00 30 . 00. 15 Co py Once DVD Mode St ereo ABC Pr 1 5 1 2 3 4 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 35 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 36 En Chapter 5 Playback Introduction Most of the features described in this chapter make use of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î / î (cursor buttons) and ENTER . To go back one level from any screen, use the RETURN button. Remember also that the button guide at the bottom of every screen shows which buttons do what. Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the HDD, DVD discs, Video CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3 discs and CDs, although the exact operation of some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. The following icons are provided to help you quickly identify which instructions you need for which kind of disc. Any kind of DVD, DVD-R or DVD-RW Commercially produced DVD or finalized Video mode DVD-R/RW Video mode DVD-R/RW (unfinalized) VR mode DVD-RW HDD Audio CD Video CD Super VCD WMA or MP3 files MP3 files ⢠Some DVD-Video discs donâÂÂt allow certain playback controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This is not a malfunction. ⢠When playing Video CDs, some functions, such as making a program list, are not available in PBC mode. Stop the disc first, then start playback by pressing î . ⢠For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see The PhotoViewer on page 90. Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc. Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc and start playback. Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from the on-screen display. Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD or WMA/ MP3 disc, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR , which takes you straight to the Disc Navigator screen. 2 Select what you want to play. Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to highlight items and ENTER to select. DVD DVD-Video Video mode VR mode HDD CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 MP3 DISC NAVIGAT OR HOME MENU HDD DVD ENTER DVD-Video CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 Timer Recording Disc Navigator Copy Disc History PhotoViewer Disc Setup Initial Setup V ideo/Audio Adjust Play Mode DV Record DVR -520H/720H screen DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 36 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 37 En Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc Navigator looks slightly different. The screen for DVD discs shows the titles on the left and the chapters on the right. Select a title, or a chapter within a title. The screen for CDs and Video CDs shows a list of tracks. The screen for WMA/MP3 discs shows a list of folders and tracks. Select a folder or a track within a folder. Playback starts after you press ENTER . ⢠For discs that contain both CD-Audio tracks and WMA/MP3 tracks, you can switch the playback area between CD and WMA/MP3 . This can only be done while the disc is stopped. Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD When used with a recordable disc or the HDD, the Disc Navigator gives you access to all the editing features of this recorder as well as the ability to browse and play titles. See also Editing on page 76 for more on editing recordable discs. 1 Press HDD or DVD to select the hard disk drive or the DVD drive. 2 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from the on-screen display. Alternatively, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR to go straight to the Disc Navigator screen. 3 Select âÂÂPlayâ from the menu options. Press ENTER to move to the thumbnails area of the screen. 4 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select a title to play. 5 Press ENTER to start playback. Note ⢠ItâÂÂs not possible to use the Disc Navigator when playing a Video CD in PBC mode. ⢠Another way to find a particular place on a disc is to use the time search mode. See Search Mode on page 40. Changing the thumbnail picture for a title You can change the thumbnail picture that appears for each title in the Disc Navigator screen using the NAVI MARK button. DVD Title (1-10) Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 Chapter (1-003) Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Disc Navigator CD T rack (1-10) T rack 01 T rack 02 T rack 03 T rack 04 T rack 05 T rack 06 T rack 07 T rack 08 T otal Time 0.58.25 Disc Navigator WMA/MP3 Folder (1-03) 01.Rock 02.Pop 03.Dance T rack (1-004) 001.Intro 002.Escape 003.Everything Y ou Say 004.What I Do Disc Navigator VR mode Video mode HDD 1/1 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Undo DVD 123 456 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Lock Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Video Mode VR mode Video mode HDD NAVI MARK ENTER PA USE PLAY STEP/SLOW î î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 37 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 38 En 1 Start playback of the title you want to change the thumbnail for. 2 Press NAVI MARK anywhere in the title to make the displayed picture the thumbnail for that title. ⢠For greater control over the exact frame you want to use, you can use the î PAUSE and/or slow-motion/ frame advance/reverse controls ( î / î ). Navigating discs and the HDD During playback you can easily jump to another title, chapter or track on a disc using the number buttons on the remote. 1 During playback use the number buttons to enter a chapter number within the current title. For example, for chapter 6, press 6 ; for chapter 24, press 2 , then 4 . ⢠To clear and start again, press CLEAR . 2 Optionally: Press ENTER. ⢠Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback will jump to the new chapter. 1 During playback, use the number buttons to input a title number. For example, for title 6, press 6 ; for title 24, press 2 , then 4 . ⢠To clear and start again, press CLEAR . 2 Optionally: Press ENTER. ⢠Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback will jump to the new title. 1 During playback, use the number buttons to input a track number. For example, for track 6, press 6 ; for track 24, press 2 , then 4 . ⢠To clear and start again, press CLEAR . 2 Optionally: Press ENTER. ⢠Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback will jump to the new track. Scanning discs You can fast scan discs at various speeds, forwards or backward. 1 During playback, press î or î to start reverse or forward scanning. ⢠The scanning speed is shown on-screen. 2 Press the same button repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. ⢠Forward: SCAN 1 î SCAN 2 î SCAN 3 î SCAN 4 ⢠Reverse: Reverse play î SCAN 1 î SCAN 2 î SCAN 3 î SCAN 4 ⢠Forward/Reverse: SCAN 1 î SCAN 2 3 To resume normal playback, press î PLAY. Note ⢠Depending on the disc, reverse playback may not be smooth. ⢠Sound can be heard while scanning audio CDs (analog output only). ⢠Scanning is not possible with WMA files. ALL ENTER CLEAR DVD-Video Video mode VR mode HDD CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 REV SCAN PLAY FWD SCAN DVD HDD CD Video CD S uper VCD MP3 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 38 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 39 En ⢠No subtitles are displayed while scanning DVD-Video discs. ⢠Analog and digital sound is output when scanning DVDs with Dolby Digital or Linear PCM sound on forward SCAN 1 . (Linear PCM is output from the optical digital output.*) No sound is output when using other scan speeds. * Except during chase playback and simultaneous recording/playback. ⢠No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, except on forward SCAN 1 . (Linear PCM is output from the optical digital output during forward SCAN 1 ). ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc. Playing in slow motion You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs and video on the HDD can be played in slow motion in either direction, while Video CD/Super VCDs can only be played forwards in slow motion. 1 Press î or î to start slow motion reverse or forward playback. 2 Press the same button repeatedly to change the slow motion speed. 3 To resume normal playback, press î PLAY. Note ⢠The picture quality during slow motion playback is not as good as during normal playback and depends on the disc being played. ⢠Reverse slow-motion playback may not be as smooth as forward and may be better with some discs than others. ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc. ⢠No sound is output during slow-motion playback. Frame advance/frame reverse You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc or the HDD frame-by-frame. With Video CD/Super VCDs, you can only use frame advance. 1 During playback, press î PAUSE. 2 Press î or î to back up or advance one frame. ⢠Hold down î or î for continuous frame reverse/ frame advance. 3 To resume normal playback, press î PLAY. Note ⢠The picture quality when using frame reverse is not as good as frame advance. ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc. DVD HDD Video CD S uper VCD PLAY STEP/SLOW î î SL OW 1/16 SL OW 1/8 SL OW 1/2 SLOW 1/4 DVD HDD Video CD S uper VCD PA USE PLAY STEP/SLOW î î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 39 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 40 En The Play Mode menu The Play Mode menu gives you access to search functions, repeat and program play functions. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use the Play Mode features with Video CD/ Super VCDs playing in PBC mode, or while a DVD disc menu is being displayed. For other restrictions, see the following sections. 1 Press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode menu screen. ⢠You can also access the Play Mode menu from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU ). 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) and ENTER to navigate. ⢠To exit the Play Mode menu, press HOME MENU or PLAY MODE . Search Mode The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a specified point in a disc by time or by title/chapter/folder/ track number. 1 Select âÂÂSearch Modeâ from the Play Mode menu. 2 Select one of the search options. 3 Use the number buttons to enter a title/chapter/ folder/track number or the search time (in hours, minutes & seconds). Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25 minutes into the current title, press 2, 5, 0, 0 . For 1 hour and 15 minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0 . Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 45 minutes into the disc, press 4, 5, 0, 0 . Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For example, for track 6, press 6 . Alternatively, you can use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/ down) buttons. 4 Press ENTER. Tip ⢠You can often select what you want to watch on a DVD disc from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to display the disc menu. Note ⢠When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input. ⢠Time search doesnâÂÂt work with Super VCDs. A-B Repeat The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points (A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is played over and over. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use A-B Repeat with WMA/MP3 or Super VCD discs. ALL PLAY MODE ENTER CLEAR PLAY Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program Time Search Title Search Chapter Search ALL Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program Time Search Title Search Chapter Search Input Time 0.01.00 Play Mode DVD CD Video CD HDD DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 40 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 41 En 1 During playback, select âÂÂA-B Repeatâ from the Play Mode menu. 2 With âÂÂA (Loop Start)â highlighted, press ENTER at the point you want the loop to start. After setting the loop start point, the highlight will automatically move down to B(Loop End) . 3 With âÂÂB (Loop End)â highlighted, press ENTER at the point you want the loop to end. Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and plays the loop round and round. ⢠When playing a DVD-Video/Video mode DVD, or from the HDD, the start and end points of the loop must be in the same title. 4 To resume normal playback, select âÂÂOffâ from the A-B Repeat menu. ⢠You can also press CLEAR to cancel A-B Repeat play if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed. Note ⢠If you switch camera angles while using A-B Repeat with a DVD-Video disc, A-B repeat is canceled. Repeat play There are various repeat play options, depending on the kind of disc loaded, or if youâÂÂre using the HDD for playback. ItâÂÂs also possible to use repeat play together with program play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the program list (see Program play below). 1 Select âÂÂRepeatâ from the Play Mode menu. 2 Select a repeat play mode. ⢠For VR mode DVD discs, select Repeat Disc , Repeat Title or Repeat Chapter (or Repeat Off ). ⢠For HDD, DVD-Video and Video mode DVD discs, select Repeat Title or Repeat Chapter (or Repeat Off ). ⢠For CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select Repeat Disc or Repeat Track (or Repeat Off ). ⢠For WMA/MP3 discs, select Repeat Disc , Repeat Folder or Repeat Track (or Repeat Off ). 3 To resume normal playback, select âÂÂRepeat Offâ from the Repeat Play menu. ⢠You can also press CLEAR to cancel repeat play if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed. Note ⢠If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is canceled. ⢠If there is a program list, you can also select Repeat Program to repeat the program list. Program play This feature lets you program the play order of titles/ chapters/folders/tracks on a disc. 1 Select âÂÂProgramâ from the Play Mode menu. 2 Select âÂÂInput/Edit Programâ from the list of program options. The Program edit screen that appears depends on the kind of disc loaded. Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program A (Loop Start) B (Loop End) Off Play Mode ALL Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program Repeat Disc Repeat Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Off Play Mode VR mode DVD-Video Video mode HDD CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 DVD-Video CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program Input/Edit Program Start Program Play Cancel Program Play Erase Program List Play Mode DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 41 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 42 En On the left side is the program list, then to the right is a list of titles (DVD), folders (WMA/MP3), or tracks (CD, Video CD/Super VCDs). On the far right is a list of chapters (DVD) or tracks (WMA/MP3). 3 Select a title, chapter, folder or track for the current step in the program list. For a DVD disc, you can add a whole title, or a chapter within a title to the program list. ⢠To add a title, select the title. ⢠To add a chapter, first highlight the title, then press î (cursor right)and select a chapter from the list. For a CD or Video CD/Super VCD, select a track to add to the program list. For a WMA/MP3 disc, you can add a whole folder, or a track within a folder to the program list. ⢠To add a folder, select the folder. ⢠To add a track, first highlight the folder, then press î (cursor right) and select a track from the list. After pressing ENTER to add the title/chapter/folder/ track, the step number automatically moves down one. ⢠To insert a step into the program list, highlight the step number where you want to insert another step, then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After pressing ENTER , all the subsequent steps move down one. ⢠To delete a step from the program list, highlight the step you want to delete, then press CLEAR . 4 Repeat step 3 to build up a program list. A program list can contain up to 24 titles/chapters/ folders/tracks. 5 To play the program list, press î PLAY. Program play remains active until you turn off program play (see below), erase the program list (see below), eject the disc or switch off the recorder. Tip ⢠To save your program list and exit the program edit screen without starting playback, press HOME MENU or PLAY MODE . ⢠You can change the program list by selecting Input/ Edit Program from the Play Mode Program menu. ⢠During program play, press î to skip to the next program step. ⢠Press CLEAR during playback to switch off program play (if no menu OSD, such as the Disc Navigator, is displayed). Press while stopped to erase the program list. Other Program play functions As well as creating and editing a program list, you can start program play, cancel program play, and erase the program list from the Play Mode menu. 1 Press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂProgramâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Select a program play function. ⢠Input/Edit Program â See above ⢠Start Program Play â Starts playback of a saved program list ⢠Cancel Program Play â Turns off program play, but does not erase the program list ⢠Erase Program List â Erases the program list and turns off program play Note ⢠When playing a program list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the program list may be sometimes be played, depending on the disc. ⢠You can use repeat play with program play. Start playback of the program list then select Program Repeat from the Repeat Play Mode menu (see Repeat play on page 41). Step 01. 01-003 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Title (1-38) Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 Chapter (1-004) Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Chapter 004 Program Step 01. 04 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. T rack (1-12) T rack 01 T rack 02 T rack 03 T rack 04 T rack 05 T rack 06 T rack 07 T rack 08 To tal Time 0.00.00 Program Step 01. 01-003 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Folder (1-06) 01. Pop 02. Electronic 03. Jazz 04. Indie 05. Rock 06. Classic T rack (1-010) 001. T rack 01 002. T rack 02 003. T rack 03 004. T rack 04 005. T rack 05 006. T rack 06 007. T rack 07 008. T rack 08 Program DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 42 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 43 En Displaying and switching subtitles Some DVD discs have subtitles in one or more languages; the disc box will usually tell you which subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle language during playback. Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle options. 1 Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a subtitle option. The current subtitle language is shown on-screen and in the front panel display. 2 To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE then CLEAR. Note ⢠Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to access. ⢠To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 106. Switching DVD soundtracks When playing a DVD disc recorded with two or more soundtracks (often in different languages), you can switch the soundtrack during playback. Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack options. ⢠Press AUDIO repeatedly to select an audio soundtrack. Note ⢠The sound may drop out for a few seconds when switching soundtracks. ⢠Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to access. ⢠To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 105. ⢠Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS soundtrack, connect this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV amp/ receiver with built-in DTS decoder via the digital output. See Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver on page 19 for connection details. DVD-Video SUBTITLE CLEAR Subtitle: 1/2 English The toucan lives in tropical forests DVD-Video AUDIO Audio : 1/2 Dolby Digital 2/0CH DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 43 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 44 En Switching audio channels For VR mode content recorded with bilingual audio, you can switch between left ( L ) channel, right ( R ) channel, or both ( L R ). When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you can switch between stereo, just the left channel or just the right channel. Some Super VCD discs have two soundtracks. With these discs you can switch between the two soundtracks as well as individual channels in each. 1 To display/switch the audio channel, press AUDIO repeatedly. The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated on- screen. ⢠L R â Both channels (default) ⢠L â Left channel only ⢠R â Right channel only ⢠Stereo â Stereo (default) ⢠1/L â Left channel only ⢠2/R â Right channel only ⢠1 Stereo â Soundtrack 1 / Stereo (default) ⢠1 L â Soundtrack 1 / Left channel ⢠1 R â Soundtrack 1 / Right channel ⢠2 Stereo â Soundtrack 2 / Stereo ⢠2 L â Soundtrack 2 / Left channel ⢠2 R â Soundtrack 2 / Right channel Note ⢠When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital î PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 104) or listen via the analog outputs if you need to switch the audio channel. Switching camera angles Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or more anglesâÂÂcheck the disc box for details: it should be marked with a icon if it contains multi-angle scenes. When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same icon appears on screen to let you know that other angles are available (this can be switched off if you preferâÂÂsee Angle Indicator on page 111). ⢠To switch the camera angle, press ANGLE. ⢠The angle number is displayed on-screen. ⢠If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the new angle. ⢠Repeat play is canceled if you change the angle while repeat playback is active. Note ⢠You can also change the angle from some DVD-Video disc menus. Press TOP MENU to access. VR mode CD V ideo CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 AUDIO VR mode CD Video CD WMA/MP3 S uper VCD DVD-Video ANGLE DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 44 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 45 En Chapter 6 Recording About DVD recording This recorder can record on both DVD-R and DVD-RW media. The main difference between the two is that DVD- R discs can only be recorded once, while DVD-RW can be recorded, erased and re-recorded many times. A further difference between the two disc types is that only DVD-RW can be initialized for VR mode recording, which offers much more comprehensive editing functions compared to Video mode recording. The big advantage, however, of Video mode is its compatibility with standard DVD players, most of which will not play VR mode DVD-RW discs (see also the notes below). While DVD-R discs can only be recorded using the Video mode, you can initialize a DVD-RW disc for Video or VR mode recordings. Once initialized (any previous content is erased in this operation), all recordings on that disc will be in the chosen recording mode. Important ⢠You cannot play, edit or record on unfinalized DVD-R/ RW discs recorded in Video mode on other DVD recorders. (Likewise, unfinalized Video mode discs recorded on this recorder are not playable on other players/recorders.) ⢠This recorder cannot record onto CD-R or CD-RW discs. ⢠Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the recorder. ⢠Fingerprints and small scratches on a disc can affect playback and/or recording performance. Please take proper care of your discs. ⢠Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM, NTSC and PAL-60, you canâÂÂt mix multiple TV line systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also Input Line System on page 98. Note ⢠Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode DVD-RW discs. Check the operating instructions for your player for VR mode compatibility information. ⢠The maximum number of titles that can be recorded on a DVD-R/RW disc is 99. ⢠The maximum number of chapters recordable on a DVD-R/RW disc is 999. ⢠No more recording is possible on a disc that already contains the maximum number of chapters/titles. About HDD recording Recording to the internal hard disk drive (HDD) is basically similar to recording to a VR mode DVD-RW disc. You have the full choice of recording quality options, including the manual mode, and of course you can record, erase and re-record as many times as you like. The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can store many hours of video on it, even in the higher quality recording modes. To help you organize the contents, the HDD is divided into four groups. You can name and use these groups as you likeâÂÂfor example, you might have a group for movies, another for TV shows, and one for camcorder recordings. Important ⢠It is possible to record both PAL and NTSC titles on the HDD. Before recording, you need to make sure that the Input Line System setting (page 98) matches the TV line system of the source youâÂÂre recording. Note ⢠The maximum number of titles that can be recorded on the HDD is 250. ⢠You can record up to 102 hours of video (in EP mode) on the internal 80GB (gigabyte) hard disk (HDD) on the DVR-420H/ 520H, or up to 204 hours on the 160GB DVR-720H. ⢠The maximum number of chapters per title recordable on the HDD is 99. ⢠No more recording is possible on the HDD after the maximum number of titles has been reached. ⢠The maximum continuous recording time is six hours. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 45 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 46 En Recording time and picture quality There are four preset recording quality modes: ⢠FINE â Highest quality setting, gives about one hour of recording time on a DVD disc. ⢠SP (Standard Play) â Default quality, sufficient for most applications, gives about two hours of recording time on a DVD. ⢠LP (Long Play) â Slightly lower video quality, but doubles the recording time on a DVD to around four hours. ⢠EP (Extended Play) â Use when maximum recording time is most important; EP gives you around six hours of recording time on a DVD disc. In addition to these settings, you can access 32 different recording quality/time settings when manual recording mode is on (see Manual Recording on page 107), giving you precise control over the recording. When setting a timer recording there is a further option, AUTO , which maximizes the recording quality for the space available on the disc loaded at the time of recording. (If recording to the HDD, the recording quality is maximized to fit on to a DVD disc.) In all except the FINE / MN32 modes, sound is recorded in two channel Dolby Digital format. When set to FINE / MN32 , sound is recorded in high quality, uncompressed Linear PCM format. If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording in Video mode or to the HDD, or in VR mode on the FINE / MN32 setting, use the Bilingual Recording setting (page 104) to select the A/L or B/R audio channel to record before recording starts. ⢠Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM, NTSC and PAL-60, you canâÂÂt mix multiple TV line systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also Input Line System on page 98. Note ⢠Note that all recording times (both here and those shown by the recorder) are only approximate. This is because of the way that the video is recorded; you may get slightly more or slightly less, depending on what youâÂÂre recording. Restrictions on video recording ⢠You cannot record copy-protected video using this recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video discs and some satellite broadcasts. If copy- protected material is encountered during a recording, recording will pause automatically and an error message will be displayed on-screen. ⢠Video that is âÂÂcopy-once onlyâ can only be recorded on the HDD or a DVD-RW disc in VR mode (see below). ⢠When recording a TV broadcast or through an external input, you can display copy control information on screen. (see Displaying disc information on-screen on page 33). CPRM CPRM is a copy protection system with scramble system regarding the recording of âÂÂcopy onceâ broadcast programs. CPRM stands for Content Protection for Recordable Media . This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that you can record copy-once broadcast programs, but you cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM recordings can only be made on CPRM-compatible DVD- RW (ver. 1.1 or higher) discs formatted in VR mode or on the HDD. DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that are specifically compatible with CPRM. Recording equipment and copyright Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners. ⢠This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U. S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 46 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 47 En Setting the picture quality/recording time Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set the picture quality/recording time. There are four standard settings available, which allow you to choose a balance between picture quality and recording time. ItâÂÂs also possible to create a fifth, âÂÂmanualâ setting for picture quality/recording time. Before you can select this, however, you will need to set the Manual Recording option in the Initial Settings menu (see Manual Recording on page 107). ⢠Press REC MODE repeatedly to select a recording setting. ⢠FINE â Fine picture quality ⢠SP â Standard play ⢠LP â Long play ⢠EP â Extended play ⢠MN â Manual (available only when manual recording is on) The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and shown on-screen together with the recording time for a blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the approximate remaining recording time for that disc is also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting (see On Screen Display on page 98) is Off then this information is not displayed.) Basic recording from the TV Follow the instructions below to record a TV program. Recording starts immediately and continues until the disc is full or you stop the recording. 1 Press HDD or DVD to record to the hard disk drive or a recordable DVD respectively. ⢠If youâÂÂre recording to DVD, load a recordable disc (if you load a new blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder takes a short while to initialize the disc). 2 Use the CHANNEL /â buttons to select the TV channel to record. The front panel display shows the channel number: ⢠While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the number buttons on the remote to select the channel. (For channel 6, press 6 then ENTER ; for channel 24, press 2, 4 then ENTER ) VR mode Video mode HDD REC MODE VR mode Video mode HDD DVD RECORDER AUDIO HDD DVD ENTER CHANNEL REC PA USE STOP REC REC MODE î 23 30 7 Channel preset PR DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 47 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 48 En ⢠If the recorder is stopped, you can also use the /â buttons on the front panel to select the channel number. 3 Use the REC MODE button to set the picture quality/recording time. ⢠See Setting the picture quality/recording time above for detailed instructions. 4 Use the AUDIO button to select the audio channel to record. See Changing audio channels on page 29 for more on this. ⢠When recording in VR mode, if a broadcast is bilingual, both audio channels are recorded, allowing you to switch the audio channel on playback. The only exception to this is when the picture quality is set to FINE / MN32 , in which case you do need to select the audio channel before recording. 5 Press î REC to start recording. If you want to set a recording end time, press the î REC button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30 minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the front panel display. When the recording ends, the recorder automatically switches into standby if no other operation is being performed. ⢠To cancel the set recording time, press î REC . ⢠If you want to pause recording at any time, press î PAUSE . Press again to restart the recording. (If recording to the HDD or in VR mode, a new chapter is started after recording restarts) 6 To stop the recording, press î STOP REC. ⢠If you set the recording time in the previous step, you can still stop the recording anytime by pressing î STOP REC . ⢠Recording will stop automatically when there is no more space on the HDD/DVD, or after six hours of HDD recording (whichever is sooner). Tip ⢠During recording you can turn on/off the SCART loop through function. During recording, press the front panel button to switch to SCART THRU (loop through on), or â to switch to SCART NORM (loop though off). Note that you canâÂÂt switch loop through on if recording from the AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER) or AV1(RGB)-TV connectors. Also, loop through is automatically reset to off after recording has finished. Direct recording from TV If you connected this recorder to your TV using a SCART cable, and your TV supports Direct Recording, you can record whatever is currently being shown on the TV without having to worry about what channel preset the recorder is on. Check the instructions that came with your TV if youâÂÂre not sure whether your TV supports this feature. 1 If necessary, load a recordable disc. 2 Set the picture quality/recording time using the REC MODE button. 3 Press TV DIRECT REC to start recording. If you want to set a recording time, press the î REC button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30 minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. You can see the recording time on-screen and in the front panel display. When the recording ends, the recorder automatically switches into standby if no other operation is being performed. ⢠To cancel the set recording time, press î REC . ⢠If you want to pause recording at any time, press î PAUSE . Press again to restart the recording. (If recording to the HDD or in VR mode, a new chapter is started after recording restarts) 4 To stop the recording, press î STOP REC. ⢠If you set the recording time in step 3 , you can still stop the recording anytime by pressing î STOP REC . ⢠Recording will stop automatically when there is no more space on the HDD/DVD, or after six hours of HDD recording (whichever is sooner). Tip ⢠You can press TV DIRECT REC while the recorder is in standby to switch on and immediately start recording. ⢠Please note that you canâÂÂt record from another component (VCR, etc.) that is connected by a SCART cable to the AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER) connector using the TV Direct Recording feature. TV DIRECT REC REC PA USE STOP REC REC MODE î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 48 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 49 En Setting a timer recording Using the timer recording features you can program up to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer recording programs can be set to record just once, every day, or every week. You can set the recording quality for your timer recording in the same way as for a regular recording, but with the added option of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the recording quality for the space available on the disc (if recording to DVD), or to fit on to a blank DVD disc (if recording to HDD). You can set timer recordings to record to a recordable DVD or to the hard disk drive. For regular (daily or weekly) HDD timer recordings that you donâÂÂt need to keep, you can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to automatically replace the previous timer recording with the new one. Note that when you use this feature, the previous recording made on that timer program will be replaced by the next one, regardless of whether you have watched it yet or not. You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set (see Optimized Rec on page 108 for more on this). Finally, if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but there isnâÂÂt a recordable DVD loaded at the time of the recording, the Recovery Recording feature will automatically record the program to the HDD for you. This recorder is compatible with VPS (Video Programming System) and PDC (Program Delivery Control) systems used by many TV stations to ensure that a timer recording catches the whole program even when the program is not running to schedule. Up to eight timer programs can be set with VPS/PDC on. Important â¢A timer recording canâÂÂt be set if: â Auto Start Recording is in progress. â There are already 32 timer programs waiting to be recorded. ⢠Timer recording will not start if: â The recorder is already recording. â A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized. ⢠Timer recording will start when the operation preventing timer recording has finished. ⢠If a recordable DVD that doesnâÂÂt support simultaneous playback and recording (see Simultaneous recording and playback on page 55) is playing when a DVD timer recording is due to start, playback will automatically stop to allow the recording to start. ⢠The timer indicator ( ) lights in the front panel display when the timer is active. If the indicator is blinking it means that (for a DVD timer recording) there is no disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not recordable (for an HDD timer recording it means that the HDD is not recordable). ⢠Timer recordings have higher priority than the Auto Start Recording function (see Automatic recording from a satellite tuner on page 56). A timer recording will interrupt an Auto Start Recording. (Auto Start Recording will resume after the timer recording has finished.) ⢠Approximately two minutes before a timer recording is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording standby. In timer recording standby you cannot use some functions. ⢠The maximum length for timer recordings made to the HDD is 24 hours. However, because one title is limited to six hours, recordings over six hours will be spread over two or more titles. Note that there will be a break in the recording of a few seconds between titles. ⢠VPS/PDC may not work with all broadcast stations in your country/area. Check with the stations for compatibility. VR mode Video mode HDD DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 49 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 50 En Easy Timer Recording As the name suggests, Easy Timer Recording makes setting up a timer recording as simple as possible. 1 Press EASY TIMER. Alternatively, you can also access from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU and select Timer Recording then Easy Timer Recording ). 2 Set the TV channel and recording quality. ⢠Use the CHANNEL /â buttons to set the channel you want to record. ⢠Use the REC MODE button to set the recording quality. Press repeatedly to switch between FINE , SP , LP , EP and AUTO (and MN if manual recording mode is on). ⢠DVD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets the best recording quality for the space available on the disc loaded at the time of recording. ⢠HDD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets the best recording quality that would fit on to a blank DVD disc. ⢠Press DVD to record to DVD disc, or HDD if you want to record to the hard disk drive. 3 Use îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to move the cursor to the recording start date and time on the grid. ⢠You can move the cursor forward or back an hour at a time using the î and î buttons. Each row of the grid is one day (you can set the timer recording for up to a month in advance). Each column is a 15 minute interval. The darker area represents time that has already passed and canâÂÂt therefore be selected. The lighter area is time thatâÂÂs available. 4 Press ENTER to set the start time. The start date and time is displayed in the middle of the screen. ⢠You can go back and reset the start time if you need to by pressing RETURN . 5 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) to move the cursor to the recording end time on the grid. As you move the cursor around the grid, an arrow stretches from the start time to the current cursor position, representing the length of the recording. A recording of up to six hours can be set. DVD RECORDER RETURN HOME MENU EASY TIMER HDD DVD ENTER CHANNEL REC MODE îÂÂî 8: 00 9: 00 10: 00 11: 00 12: 00 13: 00 14: 00 13/12 14/12 15/12 Easy Timer Recording FINE Pr 7 13/12 MON --:-- 9:30 HDD CHANNEL / â REC MODE HDD/DVD Easy Timer Recording 8: 00 9: 00 10: 00 11: 00 12: 00 13: 00 14: 00 13/12 14/12 15/12 11:45 FINE Pr 7 13/12 MON HDD - - : - - Current time Recording start time CHANNEL / â REC MODE HDD/DVD 13/12 14/12 15/12 Easy Timer Recording FINE Pr 7 HDD 11:45 13:45 13/12 MON Recording start time Recording end time 11: 00 12: 00 13: 00 14: 00 15: 00 16: 00 17: 00 CHANNEL / â REC MODE HDD/DVD DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 50 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 51 En 6 Press ENTER to set the end time. 7 Select âÂÂYesâ to set the timer recording and exit, or âÂÂNoâ to go back to the timer recording screen. ⢠You can check the timer recording details you just set from the main timer recording screen (see Standard timer recording below). Note ⢠You canâÂÂt use VPS/PDC with Easy Timer Recording. Use the standard or VIDEO Plus timer recording methods if you want to use VPS/PDC. Standard timer recording The timer recording screen you can see all the timer programs already set, clear programs and set up new ones. 1 Press TIMER REC to display the Timer Recording screen. You can also access the Timer Recording screen from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU , select Timer Recording , then Timer Recording (View) ). This screen shows all the timer programs currently set. ⢠Each row is for one timer recording program, with the date and time information, channel, recording mode, DVD or HDD and the VPS/PDC setting. ⢠The amount of free space available on the HDD and the currently loaded recordable DVD is shown towards the bottom of the screen. ⢠In the lower-right corner, the number of timer programs already set and the number that use VPS/ PDC, is shown next to Tmr Pgms . ⢠If there are more than eight timer programs already set, press NEXT î to switch page (go back using the PREV î button). ⢠You can also clear a timer program before itâÂÂs started (before the recorder enters timer recording standby) by highlighting it and pressing CLEAR . 2 Select âÂÂNew Inputâ to set a new timer program, then press ENTER. 3 Enter the timer recording settings. Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a field; use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to change the value. ⢠Date â Choose a date up to one month in advance, or select a daily or weekly program. ⢠Start â Set the recording start time. ⢠Stop â Set the recording end time (maximum length of a timer recording is 24 hours for HDD recording or six hours for DVD). ⢠CH â Choose a channel (1âÂÂ99, excluding skip channels), or one of the external inputs from which to record. ⢠Mode â Select FINE , SP , LP , EP or AUTO (See Recording time and picture quality on page 46). If Manual Recording is on, then you can also select the MN setting. ⢠Rec to â Select HDD for hard disk recording or DVD for DVD recording. Select HDD for Auto Replace Recording (daily or weekly timer recording only). ⢠Group â Select a record group (for HDD recording only). ⢠VPS/PDC â The VPS/PDC system automatically adjusts the recording time so that even if a program is not running to schedule you wonâÂÂt miss it. For VPS/ PDC to work properly, you must input the correct announced time and date of the program you want to record. Up to eight timer recordings can be set with HOME MENU ENTER CLEAR PREV NEXT TIMER REC îÂÂî MON 13/12 7:00 8:00 Pr 3 FINE HDD Off EVERY TUE 9 :00 10:00 Pr 5 FINE HDD On New Input Date Start Stop CH Mode Rec to VPS/PDC 1/1 Timer Recording HDD Remain 10h20m(FINE) DVD Remain 0h43m(FINE) VPS/PDC Date Start Stop CH Rec Mode 12/12 SUN 10 00 -- -- Pr 7 SP OFF Timer Recording Program Set Ttl Name Input Rec to Group HDD GROUP 1 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 51 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 52 En VPS/PDC on. Note that VPS/PDC may not work with every station and that Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/ PDC is on. ⢠Ttl Name Input â Optionally, you can enter a name for the recording up to 32 characters. (Highlight Program Set then press î (cursor down) to access this option.) 4 After entering all the timer recording information, highlight âÂÂProgram setâ and press ENTER. The timer recording list screen is displayed again. The timer program you just input appears in the list. The rightmost column shows various timer recording status messages: ⢠Standby is displayed when the recorder is in timer recording standby. ⢠Recording is displayed when a timer recording is in progress. 5 To exit the timer recording screen, press HOME MENU. Note ⢠For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 108) is set to On (and VPS/ PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality then the Recovery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead. ⢠If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully. ⢠If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start, the new timer recording will not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of the older two programs will be erased. ⢠If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer recording is due to start for it to work correctly. For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch the recorder into standby. Tip ⢠Stations that use VPS/PDC typically include VPS/ PDC information in the teletext TV guide pages. Please refer to these when setting your timer recording. Timer recording using the VIDEO Plus î programming system This system makes programming timer recordings very simple. Most TV guides publish PlusCode programming numbers with their program details. If you want to make a timer recording of a program, you just input the corresponding code. The date, start, stop and channel settings are made automatically. All you have to do is tell the recorder the recording mode, and whether itâÂÂs a once-only recording or a regular recording. 1 Press âÂÂVIDEO Plus â to display the VIDEO Plus program screen. You can also access this screen from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU , select Timer Recording , then VIDEO Plus ). ⢠Use the number buttons to enter the PlusCode programming number. (To clear the last digit entered, press CLEAR .) HOME MENU HDD DVD VIDEO Plus ENTER CLEAR REC MODE îÂÂî to input 3 9 9 2 4 09 PlusCode# Rec Mode Rec Times VIDEO Plus MN21 Once Daily Weekly REC MODE to change to change level to change VPS/PDC Off îÂÂî to change HDD DVD Rec to HDD to change DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 52 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 53 En ⢠Press REC MODE to select FINE , SP , LP , EP or AUTO (See Recording time and picture quality on page 46). If Manual Recording is on, then you can also select the MN setting. ⢠Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select the Once , Daily or Weekly recording option. ⢠Press HDD to record to the hard disk drive, or DVD to record to a DVD. ⢠Use the î and î buttons to switch VPS/PDC On or Off . 2 After making the settings, press ENTER. The program details are shown at the bottom of the screen for a few seconds then the screen is automatically exited. ⢠If you havenâÂÂt set up the guide channels (or at least the guide channel for the PlusCode programming number that you entered), the recorder will prompt you to enter the channel number that the TV program is showing on. Tip ⢠You can check the timer program settings by pressing TIMER REC to display the timer recording screen. VIDEO Plus programming with the power off You can enter a PlusCode programming number when the recorder is in standby. Note that the recording is always made to the HDD. If you want to record to a DVD disc, youâÂÂll need to switch on the power and use the full VIDEO Plus program screen. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use this feature until you have set up the guide channels. See Set VIDEO Plus CH on page 101. ⢠You canâÂÂt change the recording mode. ⢠You canâÂÂt program daily or weekly timer recordings. 1 Press âÂÂVIDEO Plus âÂÂ. The front panel display shows the current recording mode and prompts you to enter the PlusCode programming number. 2 Use the number buttons to enter the PlusCode programming number. ⢠To clear the last digit entered, press CLEAR . ⢠Use the PREV î / NEXT î button to switch VPS/ PDC on/off. With VPS/PDC on, the front panel VPS/ PDC indicator lights. (Note that a maximum of 8 timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC on.) 3 Press ENTER. The display shows the timer settings: Date î Start time î End time î HDD and Recording channel. ⢠If CODE ERROR appears in the display, check that the PlusCode programming number is correct and that the guide channel is set (see Set VIDEO Plus CH on page 101), then set the timer recording again. ⢠If CANâÂÂT SET appears in the display, it means that although you entered a valid PlusCode programming number, the program has already finished. ENTER CLEAR PREV NEXT îÂÂî VIDEO Plus PL U SC O D E 29 3 24 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 53 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 54 En Extending a timer recording in progress You can extend a timer recording beyond the programmed end time in two different ways. This can be useful if a broadcast program overruns, for example. Moving the end time by 30-minute blocks 1 During timer recording, press and hold î REC for three seconds. The timer indicator disappears from the front panel display. 2 Press î REC repeatedly to extend recording in 30 minute increments. Programming a new end time Note that it is only possible to program a new end time for a timer recording when VPS/PDC is off. 1 During timer recording, press TIMER REC to display the Timer Recording screen. You can also access the Timer Recording screen from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU , select Timer Recording , then Timer Recording (View) ). 2 Use the î (cursor up) button to highlight the current timer recording (âÂÂRecordingâ is shown in the âÂÂVPS/PDCâ column), then press ENTER. A screen showing details of the timer recording appears. From this screen, only the recording stop time can be changed. 3 Set a new Stop time for the timer recording. Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select the hour or minute field, then use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to change the time. 4 Press ENTER to set the new time and exit the screen. Recording will continue until the new stop time is reached. Canceling and stopping a timer recording in progress After a timer recording has started, you can cancel the program (but continue recording), or stop recording completely if you need to. 1 During timer recording, press and hold î REC for three seconds. Only the program is canceled (the timer indicator disappears); recording continues so that you can manually stop recording whenever you like. 2 When you want to stop recording completely, press î STOP REC. HOME MENU ENTER CLEAR REC PREV NEXT STOP REC TIMER REC î New Input Date Start Stop CH Mode Rec to VPS/PDC 12/13 MON EVERY TUE 7:00 9:00 8:00 10:00 Pr 3 Pr 5 FINE FINE HDD HDD Recording On 1/1 Timer Recording HDD Remain --h--m(FINE) DVD Remain 0h43m(FINE) VPS/PDC Date Start Stop CH Rec Mode 13/12 SA T 7 00 8 00 Pr 3 FINE OFF Timer Recording Program Set Ttl Name Input Rec to Group HDD GROUP1 REC ST OP REC î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 54 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 55 En Preventing use of the recorder before a timer recording (child lock) You can make all the front panel and remote control buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is useful when you set a timer recording and want to make sure that the timer settings are not changed before recording has finished. 1 If the recorder is on, switch it into standby. 2 Press and hold î STOP on the front panel for three seconds to lock the controls. The front panel display briefly shows LOCK . If any buttons are pressed on the remote or front panel, LOCK is briefly displayed again. ⢠To unlock the recorder, press and hold î STOP on the front panel for three seconds until the display shows UNLOCK . ⢠To cancel a timer recording when the recorder is locked, first unlock the recorder (see above), then press and hold î REC for three seconds. Timer recording FAQ Frequently Asked Questions ⢠Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesnâÂÂt start recording! Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable, not locked (see Lock Disc on page 92), and that there are fewer than 99/250 titles already on the DVD/HDD. ⢠The recorder wonâÂÂt let me enter a timer program! Why not? You canâÂÂt enter a timer program if the clock isnâÂÂt set. ⢠What happens when two or more timer programs overlap? Basically, the program with the earlier recording start time has priority. However, the recorder will start recording the program with the later start time after the earlier program is finished. If two programs have the same times (but different channels, for example), the program set most recently takes priority. If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programs that are programmed to start at the same time, then the program that actually starts first takes priority. Simultaneous recording and playback A feature called Chase Play makes it possible to watch a recording in progress (DVD or HDD) from the start of the recording (as in, playback is âÂÂchasingâ the recording). For example, perhaps you have to miss the first 30 minutes of a movie on TV; you can start recording, then start watching the movie, from the beginning, while the recorder is still recording 30 minutes ahead of you. In fact, youâÂÂre not just limited to watching the recording in progress; you can watch anything else already on the DVD or HDD by selecting it from the Disc Navigator screen (see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD on page 37). Important ⢠Note that you must use a DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 / 2x or Ver. 1.2 / 4x disc to be able to use this feature. ⢠You may not be able to use this feature with a DVD-RW disc that was first initialized on another recorder. ⢠During recording, press î PLAY to start playback from the beginning of the current recording, or press DISC NAVIGATOR and select another title to play from there. You can use all the usual playback controls, such as pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip. ⢠To stop playback, press î STOP (recording will continue). ⢠To stop recording, press î STOP REC (playback will continue). Note ⢠You canâÂÂt start playback immediately after recording starts. ⢠When scanning a DVD, no sound is output if the recorder is also recording the DVD (see Scanning discs on page 38). ⢠You canâÂÂt use this feature during Auto Start Recording, or in Auto Start Recording standby (the AUTO indicator is lit in the front panel display). ⢠You canâÂÂt use simultaneous playback and recording while copying or backing up. ⢠During recording or in timer recording standby, you canâÂÂt play an HDD title, DVD or Video CD/Super VCD disc if the Input Line System setting doesnâÂÂt match the TV line system of the disc/HDD title (see also VR mode HDD DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 55 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 56 En Input Line System on page 98). Also, during simultaneous recording and playback, if the TV line system of the playback track/title changes then playback will automatically stop. Recording from an external component You can record from an external component, such as a camcorder or VCR, connected to one of the recorderâÂÂs external inputs. 1 Make sure that the component you want to record from is connected properly to the DVD recorder. See Chapter 2 ( Connecting up ) for connection options. 2 Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly to select one of the external inputs to record from. There are two analog inputs and a DV digital input (DVR- 520H/720H only). The current input is shown on-screen and in the front panel display: ⢠AV2/L1 â Input 1/Auto Start Rec ⢠L2 â Input 2 (front panel) ⢠DV â DV input/output (front panel) (DVR-520H/720H only) Check that the Audio In settings for External Audio , Bilingual Recording and DV Input are as you want them (see Audio In settings on page 103). ⢠If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or stretched), adjust on the source component or your TV before recording. 3 Set up the recorder. ⢠Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 47 for detailed information. ⢠Press HDD to record to the hard disk drive, or DVD to record to a DVD. 4 Press î REC when youâÂÂre ready to start recording. ⢠DVR-520H/720H only: The recorder will only start recording from the DV IN/OUT jack if there is a valid signal. Recording will also pause if the signal is interrupted during recording. Note ⢠If your source is copy-protected using CopyGuard, you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on video recording on page 46 for more details. Automatic recording from a satellite tuner If you have a satellite tuner or some other kind of set top box connected to the AV2/L1 input, you can have the recorder start and stop recording automatically with the timer settings of the connected component. (If the other component doesnâÂÂt have a built-in timer, youâÂÂll need to use it with an external timer unit.) After setting up for Auto Start Recording, this recorder starts recording when it detects a signal from the other component. When the signal ceases, the recorder stops recording. Important ⢠It takes a little while for this recorder to switch on and start recording after detecting a signal. Please bear this in mind when setting the timer. ⢠If Auto Start Recording is set, it will not start if another timer recording is in progress. ⢠Timer recordings take precedence over Auto Start Recording. Auto Start Recording will stop if a timer recording is due to start. After the timer recording has finished, Auto Start Recording will resume. VR mode Video mode HDD INPUT SELECT HDD DVD ENTER CLEAR REC REC MODE î î î îÂÂî HDD DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 56 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 57 En 1 Set the timer for the satellite receiver (or other component), then switch it into standby (if necessary). Check the manual that came with the receiver if youâÂÂre not sure how to do this. 2 Check that the âÂÂAudio Inâ settings for âÂÂExternal Audioâ and âÂÂBilingual Recordingâ are as you want them. See Audio In settings on page 103 for more on these settings. 3 Set up the recorder. ⢠Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 47 for detailed information. 4 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂTimer RecordingâÂÂ, then âÂÂAuto Start RecordingâÂÂ. 5 Select âÂÂYesâ to switch Auto Start Recording on, or âÂÂNoâ to switch off. 6 Switch the recorder into standby. The AUTO indicator in the front panel display lights. The recorder will automatically switch on and start recording when the other component comes on. Recording stops when the external component switches off. ⢠To cancel Auto Start Recording, press î STANDBY/ ON while the recorder is in standby. The AUTO indicator goes off. ⢠To cancel Auto Start Recording once recording has already started, press î REC for three seconds, then î STOP REC . ⢠When a timer recording is in progress ahead of Auto Start Recording, some functions, such as extending the timer recording and chase play, are not available. Press the front panel button for three seconds to cancel Auto Start Recording without affecting the timer recording. The AUTO indicator goes off. Note ⢠Auto Start Recordings are always on the HDD. Auto Start Recording to DVD is not possible. ⢠You canâÂÂt set Auto Start Recording when: ⢠the recorder is recording or in timer recording standby. ⢠the HDD is not recordable. ⢠the HDD already contains the maximum number of titles (250). ⢠AV2/L1 In is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1 In on page 102). Recording from a DV camcorder (DVR-520H/720H only) You can record from a DV camcorder connected to the DV IN/OUT jack on the front panel of this recorder. Using the recorderâÂÂs remote, you can control both the camcorder and this recorder. Before recording, make sure that the audio input for the DV IN/OUT jack is setup (see DV Input (DVR-520H/720H only) on page 104). Important ⢠The source signal must be DVC-SD format ⢠Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this recorderâÂÂs remote. ⢠If you connect a second recorder using a DV cable, you cannot control the second unit from this one. ⢠You canâÂÂt control this unit remotely from a component connected to the DV IN/OUT jack. ⢠You canâÂÂt record date and time information from DV cassette. VR mode Video mode HDD RETURN HOME MENU HDD DVD ENTER CLEAR PA USE STOP REV SCAN PLAY FWD SCAN STEP/SLOW REC MODE î î î îÂÂî DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 57 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 58 En ⢠During DV recording, if a part of the tape is blank, or has copy-protected material on it, this recorder will pause recording. Recording will restart automatically when there is a recordable signal. However, if there is more than 10 seconds of blank tape, the recorder will stop recording and the camcorder should stop (depending on the camcorder). ⢠For best results when recording from a DV camcorder to this recorder, we recommend cueing the camcorder to the place you want to start recording from and setting the camcorder to play- pause. 1 Make sure your digital camcorder is connected to the front panel DV IN/OUT jack. Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode. 2 Set up the recorder. ⢠Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 47 for detailed information. ⢠Make sure a recordable disc is loaded if you want to record to DVD. 3 From the Initial Settings menu, check that the DV audio input is setup as you require. See DV Input (DVR-520H/720H only) on page 104 for more on this. ⢠Check also that the Audio In settings for External Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In settings on page 103). 4 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDV Recordâ from the menu. ⢠DV recording only works when the digital camcorder is in VTR mode with a tape loaded. 5 Select âÂÂRecord to HDDâ or âÂÂRecord to DVDâ to record to the hard disk drive or a recordable DVD respectively. 6 Find the place on the camcorder tape that you want to start recording from. For best results, pause playback at the point from which you want to record. ⢠Depending on your camcorder, you can use this recorderâÂÂs remote to control the camcorder using the î , î , î , î , î , î and î buttons. 7 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select âÂÂStart Recâ and press ENTER. ⢠Recording is automatically paused if the recorder detects no signal, or a copy-protected signal. Recording restarts when there is a non-copy- protected signal. ⢠You can pause or stop the recording by selecting Pause Rec or Stop Rec from the on-screen display. You cannot control the camcorder from this remote control during recording. ⢠If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder, the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not be recorded. Use the pause button on your camcorder instead and recording will start immediately. ⢠HDD and DVD-RW (VR Mode) only: A chapter marker is inserted every time there is a break in the timecode on the DV tape. This happens when the recording is stopped or paused then restarted, for example. ⢠While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording screen using the HOME MENU or RETURN button. Note ⢠Depending on the connected camcorder, you may not be able to control it using the remote control supplied with this recorder. ⢠If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You can switch the audio manually from the External Audio setting (page 103). ⢠See also DV-related messages on page 117 if you encounter an error while using the DV IN/OUT jack. Frequently Asked Questions â¢I canâÂÂt get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder! Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also make sure that what youâÂÂre trying to record is not copy-protected. If it still doesnâÂÂt work, try switching off the camcorder then switch back on. ⢠ThereâÂÂs a picture, but no sound! Try switching the DV Input setting (see DV Input (DVR-520H/720H only) on page 104) between Stereo 1 and Stereo 2 . HDD SP (2h00m/DVD) 1h40m Remain î Stop 1.02.22 î Stop Control with these buttons Start Rec Pause Rec Stop Rec DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 58 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 59 En Recording from the DV output (DVR-520H/720H only) You can record non-copy-protected material from the hard disk drive or from a DVD to a camcorder connected to the DV IN/OUT jack. 1 Connect the camcorder to the DV IN/OUT jack of this recorder. 2 Select the HDD or DVD for playback. 3 Find the place you want to start recording from. 4 Start recording on the camcorder. 5 Play the source material. Playing your recordings on other DVD players Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs recorded in Video mode. A number of players (including many Pioneer models) can also play DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode, finalized or not. Check the manual that came with the player to check what kinds of discs it will play. When you finalize a Video mode disc, a title menu is created from which you can select titles when you play the disc. There are a number of different styles of title menu to choose from to suit the content of the disc. All the title menus are navigated in the usual way, pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then using the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) followed by ENTER to select titles and start playback. Finalizing a disc Finalizing âÂÂfixesâ the recordings in place so that the disc can be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive. Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you want it before you finalize the disc as it canâÂÂt be changed afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc Name on page 92 before starting the steps below. Important ⢠Once youâÂÂve finalized a disc recorded in Video mode, you canâÂÂt edit or record anything else on that disc. However, the finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe âÂÂundoneâÂÂ; see Undo Finalize on page 93 for how to do this. â¢A VR mode disc can still be recorded and edited on this recorder even after finalizing. 1 Load the disc you want to finalize. Make sure that the recorder is stopped before proceeding. 2 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc SetupâÂÂ. 3 Select âÂÂFinalizeâÂÂ. 4 Select âÂÂFinalizeâ from the finalize options, then âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. 5 For Video mode discs only, select a title menu style, then select âÂÂYesâ to start finalization or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. The menu you select will be the one that appears when the âÂÂtop menuâ is selected on any DVD player. ⢠Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature. These discs will have only a text title menu when finalized on this recorder. 6 The recorder will now start finalizing the disc. During finalization: ⢠If the finalization process is going to take more than around four minutes, you can press ENTER to cancel. Around four minutes before completion, the option to cancel disappears. VR mode Video mode HDD VR mode Video mode VR mode Video mode Finalize Undo Finalize Next Screen Start Disc Setup Basic Initialize Finalize T I T L E M E N U TITLE MENU Finalize DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 59 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 60 En ⢠How long finalization takes depends on the type of disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR mode can take up to one hour to finalize. A disc recorded in Video mode can take up to 20 minutes. Note ⢠If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize the disc. See Input Line System on page 98 for how to change the recorderâÂÂs setting. Initializing a DVD-RW disc When you first load a blank disc, the recorder will initialize it automatically for recording. You can also manually initialize DVD-RW discs. You can initialize a disc for either Video mode recording or VR mode recording. Important ⢠Initializing a disc will erase everything recorded on it. Make sure there is nothing on the disc that you want to keep! ⢠You may not be able to re-initialize a disc in a different format if it was originally initialized on an older DVD recorder. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc SetupâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂInitializeâÂÂ. 3 Select âÂÂVideo Modeâ or âÂÂVR Modeâ from the initialize options. 4 Select âÂÂStartâÂÂ. It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc. Note ⢠By default, the recorder initializes blank DVD-RW discs for VR mode recording. See DVD-RW Auto Init. on page 108 if you want to change the default to Video mode. ⢠If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize it for Video mode recording. DVD-RW VR Mode Video Mode Start Start Basic Initialize Finalize Disc Setup Initializing Disc 1 min left Pr 1 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 60 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 61 En Chapter 7 Copying and back-up Introduction Use the copying features of this recorder to: ⢠Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to a DVD ⢠Make a DVD copy of a recording on the HDD to play in another player. ⢠Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing. ⢠Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD. The simplest method of copying is to use the One Touch Copy feature. Using this you can simply copy the title thatâÂÂs currently playing from HDD to DVD, or the other way around. For more complicated copying tasks you can make a Copy List which specifies precisely what needs to be copied. A Copy List is similar to a VR mode Play List in many ways, and youâÂÂll find that the Copy List commands are similar to those available for editing a Play List. A message showing that copying has finished is displayed after copying. If the recorder is inactive and no button is pressed (remote or front panel) then the recorder will automatically go into standby after 20 minutes. High-speed copying Copying between DVD and HDD is a completely digital process and therefore involves no loss of quality in the audio or video. This means that you can transfer back and forth without having to worry about the quality getting worse with each copy âÂÂgenerationâÂÂ. It also means that copying can be carried out at the maximum speed possible. When copying from HDD to DVD, the speed of copying depends on the recording mode and the kind of DVD disc youâÂÂre using. The table at the bottom of the page shows the minimum copying time for one hour of material. Note ⢠Not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying. Check with the disc manufacturer for compatibility. ⢠There may be cases where even 2x/4x/8x compatible discs do not copy at full speed. ⢠High-speed copying is not possible when using discs initialized on another recorder. ⢠The table below shows disc brands that have been tested for 8x speed writing compatibility with this recorder. (As of April, 2004) Maker Sony ThatâÂÂs JVC Fujifilm TDK Maxell Verbatim Ritek Note that all times in the above table are approximate. *1 Compatible with single speed recording only *2 Compatible with 2x speed recording *3 Compatible with 4x speed recording *4 Compatible with 8x speed recording. Note that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being recorded. DVD disc type Rec mode DVD-R V er . 2.0 DVD-R V er . 2.0/4x *3 DVD-R V er . 2.0/8x *4 DVD-RW V er . 1.1 *1 DVD-RW V er . 1.1/2x *2 DVD-RW V er . 1.2/4x *3 EP 10 mins. 5 mins. 2.5 mins. 1.25 mins. LP 15 mins. 7.5 mins. 4 mins. 2 mins. SP 30 mins. 15 mins. 7.5 mins. 4 mins. FINE 60 mins. 30 mins. 15 mins. 8 mins. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 61 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 62 En Real-time copying Real-time copying is also possible, with the advantage that you can manually set a different recording mode from the original. For example, you can record a title originally recorded in FINE mode in SP mode. When real-time copying from the HDD to a Video mode DVD, the chapter markers in the original material are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at intervals, according to the Auto Chapter (Video) setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 108). Frame accuracy and copying The Frame Accurate setting (see Frame Accurate on page 108) does not affect the actual video content on the HDD, but it does affect what can be copied and whether high-speed copying can be used. When Frame Accurate is set to Off , high-speed copying can generally be used to copy titles in the Copy List using a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc in VR or Video mode. However, copy-once protected material (see Restrictions on copying below) canâÂÂt be added to the Copy List, and the divide points in edited titles may be out by as much as 0.5 seconds when compared to the original. When Frame Accurate is On , you can add copy-once protected titles to the Copy List and divide points in edited titles are maintained accurately. However, depending on the content of the Copy List and the disc, it may not be possible to use high-speed copying. Restrictions on copying Some video material is copy-once protected. This means that it can be recorded to HDD, but it canâÂÂt then be freely copied again. If you want to transfer copy-once protected material from HDD to DVD, youâÂÂll need to use a VR mode DVD-RW disc compatible with CPRM Ver. 1.1 or higher (see CPRM on page 46 for more on this). Only one instance of a copy-once protected title can be added to the Copy List, and after itâÂÂs been copied, the title is erased from the HDD (it is therefore not possible to copy a locked title that is copy-once protected). You can identify copy-once protected material during playback by displaying disc information on-screen. If the current title is copy-once protected, an exclamation mark ( ! ) is shown (see Play display 2 on page 35). Copyright Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners. One Touch Copy* (HDD to DVD) The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing title (or currently selected title in the Disc Navigator) from the HDD to DVD. The whole title is copied, regardless of where in the title you start copying. The recorder copies at the maximum speed possible. For One Touch Copy to work, make sure that a recordable DVD-R/RW disc is loaded. * See also Copyright above. ⢠During HDD playback, press ONE TOUCH COPY to copy the current title to DVD. The front panel display indicates that the title is being copied. Playback continues while copying. Note ⢠Title name, chapter markers, as well as thumbnail picture markers (Navimark) for the Disc Navigator, are also copied. However, if you copy to a Video mode DVD-R/RW, only the first 32 characters of a name are copied. ⢠The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same positions as the original when recording on to a Video mode disc. ⢠You canâÂÂt use the One Touch Copy function to copy a title if any part of the title is copy-once protected. â¢A title that contains mixed aspect ratios canâÂÂt be copied to a Video mode disc. Use a VR mode DVD- RW disc for this type of material. ⢠Low resolution ( EP or LP , or MN1 â 18 ) widescreen material canâÂÂt be copied to a Video mode disc. Use a VR mode DVD-RW disc for this type of material. One Touch Copy* (DVD to HDD) One Touch Copy from DVD to HDD copies a single title to the HDD in real time. You can copy the currently playing title or the currently selected title in the Disc Navigator. When you start copying, playback jumps back to the start of the title, then continues through to the end of the title, when recording automatically stops. The copy will be made in the recording mode ( FINE , SP , etc.) that is currently set. * See also Copyright above. ONE TOUCH COPY HDD DVD î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 62 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 63 En ⢠During DVD playback, press ONE TOUCH COPY to copy the current title to HDD. Playback starts again from the beginning of the current title. The front panel display and an on-screen display indicate that the title is being copied. Note ⢠The maximum title length for copying is six hours. ⢠Title name and chapter markers are also copied, except when copying from a finalized Video mode disc. ⢠Thumbnail picture markers (Navimark) and chapter markers for the Disc Navigator are copied, but their position in the copy may be slightly changed from the original. ⢠If some part of the title being copied is copy- protected, copying will start, but the copy-protected portions will not be copied. Canceling One Touch Copy You can cancel a One Touch Copy once itâÂÂs started. ⢠Press and hold ONE TOUCH COPY for more than a second. Copying is canceled and the video already copied is erased. Note ⢠If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R copy, the space available for recording does not return to the pre- copy figure. Copying from HDD to DVD* From the HDD to DVD Copy screen you can build up a Copy List of titles to copy to DVD. From this screen you can also edit chapters so that the titles appear as you want them on your finished DVD. * See also Copyright on page 62. Important ⢠The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time. ⢠The Copy List is erased if the Frame Accurate setting is changed in the Initial Settings menu (see Frame Accurate on page 108), or if the Input Line System setting is changed (see Input Line System on page 98). ONE TOUCH COPY HDD DVD î Conf List HDD HDD to DVD Copy Add Erase Ttl Name Divide Combine DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List All To tal 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Currently selected HDD title Title that cannot be added to Copy List HDD Groups Titles in the selected HDD Group Information f or the selected title Co py List titles Running time of the Co py List Co py List menu options 16:00 Sun 8/11 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 63 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 64 En ⢠Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 112) will also erase the Copy List. 1 Make sure that thereâÂÂs a recordable DVD disc loaded. 2 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂCopyâÂÂ. 3 Select âÂÂHDD î DVDâÂÂ. The HDD to DVD Copy List screen appears. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to highlight the command you want from the menu options on the left, then press ENTER . Most commands require you then to select a title (or chapter) or location from the thumbnail views area of the screen. Use the î / î (cursor left/right) followed by ENTER to do this. ⢠When in the thumbnails area of the screen, use the PREV ( î ) and NEXT ( î ) buttons to display the previous/next page if there are more titles/chapters than will fit on the screen. ⢠As you highlight different thumbnails, information about the title/chapter is shown in the central area of the screen. Press DISPLAY to change the information displayed. ⢠Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on the left from the thumbnail area of the Copy List screen. ⢠When selecting HDD titles, you can display titles from a particular HDD group by pressing î (cursor up), then using the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons and ENTER to select a group. Press î (cursor down) to get back to the HDD title thumbnail area. HDD to DVD Copy List menu options Use the following commands when making an HDD to DVD Copy List: ⢠Add â Add titles from the HDD to the Copy List (see page 65). ⢠Erase â Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see page 66). ⢠Title Name ( Ttl Name ) â Name or rename a title in the Copy List (see page 66). ⢠Divide â Divide a title in the Copy List into two (see page 66). ⢠Combine â Combine two adjacent titles in the Copy List into one (see page 67). ⢠Preview â Check the content of a title in the Copy List (see page 67). ⢠Move â Change the order of titles in the Copy List (see page 67). ⢠Erase All â Erase the Copy List (see page 68). ⢠Chapter Edit ( Chpt Edit ) â Edit chapters within a Copy List title (see page 68): ⢠Erase â Erase a chapter. ⢠Divide â Divide a chapter into two. ⢠Combine â Combine two chapters into one. ⢠Move â Change the chapter order. ⢠Preview â Check the chapter content. ⢠Erase Section (Erase Sec) â Erase a section of a title in the Copy List (see page 70). ⢠Confirm List ( Conf List ) â Confirm the Copy List and go to the recording settings screen (see Recording the Copy List below). RETURN HOME MENU DISPLAY ENTER PREV NEXT Timer Recording Disc Navigator Copy Disc History PhotoViewer Disc Setup Initial Setup V ideo/Audio Adjust Play Mode DV Record DVR -520H/720H screen Conf List HDD HDD to DVD Copy Add Erase Ttl Name Divide Combine DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/1 Copy List All To t a l 0h00m 2 3 4 D VD Copy 1 2 3 4 All DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 64 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 65 En Recording the Copy List After putting together your Copy List, youâÂÂre ready to record it. 1 Select âÂÂConf Listâ to display the Copy List settings screen. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select the Recording Mode. ⢠High-Speed Copy â The Copy List is copied at the same recording quality as the original. (See page 61 for more information on high-speed copying.) ⢠FINE , SP , LP , EP , MN â The Copy List is copied at the specified recording quality in real-time. (Note that if you copy at a higher quality setting than the original, the copy will not be better quality than the original.) ⢠If you select MN above, you can also change the level setting ( MN1 â MN32 ) from the Recording Quality box that appears. ⢠Optimized â The recording quality automatically adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the space available on the disc. Copying is carried out in real- time. When you change the recording mode setting, you can see how much disc space it will require. If this is more than is available, it shows up in red and you wonâÂÂt be able to start copying. In this case, either change the recording quality, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List. 3 Select âÂÂStartâ to begin copying. Note ⢠When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a Video mode DVD, the chapter markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 108). HDD to DVD Copy List commands Add Use this command to add titles to the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂAddâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a title from the HDD to add to the Copy List, then press ENTER. The thumbnail appears in the Copy List section in the lower half of the screen. If there are already titles in the Copy List, the title is added at the end. 3 Repeat step 2 to add more titles to the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options. Note ⢠When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame Accurate on page 108), the following limitations on adding titles to the Copy List apply: â When adding titles that contain copy-once protected material, the copy-once parts will not be added to the Copy List. â When adding titles that contain material of more than one aspect ratio (screen size), each part with a different aspect ratio will be added as a separate title. â Widescreen material recorded in LP , EP or MN1 â 18 will not be added to the Copy List. â Chapter markers on the copy may be up to 0.5 seconds off compared to the original. ⢠Only titles which were recorded in the same TV system as the recorder is currently set to can be added to the Copy List. HDD HDD to DVD Copy Add Erase Ttl Name Divide Combine HDD DVD-RW VIDEO Required 0h08m Recording Mode Copy List T otal Current DVD Remain 1175MB 2830MB / 4700MB Conf List High Speed Start Conf List HDD Add Erase Ttl Name Divide Combine DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List All To t al 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 HDD to DVD Copy 16:00 Sun 11/8 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 65 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 66 En Erase Use this command to erase individual titles from the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂEraseâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a title from the Copy List to erase, then press ENTER. 3 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm that you want to erase the title, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to erase more titles from the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options. Title Name (Ttl Name) Use this command to name or rename titles in the Copy List (the names of the original titles remain unchanged). 1 Select âÂÂTtl Nameâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a title from the Copy List to name or rename, then press ENTER. 3 Input a name for the selected title. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) and ENTER to select characters. â¢A name generated automatically by the recorder will already be in the name input section of the screen. Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to change the cursor position. ⢠Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower- case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons ( îÂÂ/ î ). ⢠You can also use the CLEAR button to delete characters directly (press and hold for two seconds to delete the whole name). For other remote control key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name on page 80. ⢠Press RETURN to go back to the Copy List screen without changing the name. 4 To confirm the name and return to the main Copy List screen, highlight âÂÂOKâ and press ENTER. 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to name other titles in the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options. Divide Use this command to make two titles from a title already in the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂDivideâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a title from the Copy List to divide, then press ENTER. Conf List HDD HDD to DVD Copy Add Erase Ttl Name Divide Combine DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List All To t al 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s Conf List HDD HDD to DVD Copy Add Erase Ttl Name Divide Combine DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List All To t al 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 15:00 T ue 6/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s Input Title Name CAPS small OK Delete Space A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; A A A A A A àç E E E E I I I I # 2 3 ô õ ö ÷ 1 ÿ ` D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y à$ % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & ã \ ç è é ì â î _ àâ / @ [ ÃÂ¥ ] à÷ x ñ { | } ~ á c a â o â << << 1 / 4 1 / 2 3 / 4 ø 1 5:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP Conf List HDD Add Erase Ttl Name Divide Combine DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List All To t al 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 HDD to DVD Copy 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 66 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 67 En 3 Use the playback controls to find the place you want to divide the title. You can use all the usual playback controls, including î PLAY , î PAUSE , scan ( î , î ), and slow-motion ( î , î ). ⢠Press RETURN or highlight Back and press ENTER to go back to the main Copy List screen, leaving the title intact. 4 With âÂÂDivideâ highlighted, press ENTER to divide the title at the current playback position. 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to divide other titles in the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options. Note ⢠When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame Accurate on page 108), the divide points may move by up to half a second after selecting Divide . Combine Use this command to make a single title from two adjacent titles in the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂCombineâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select two adjacent titles from the Copy List to combine, then press ENTER. 3 Repeat step 2 to combine more titles, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options. Note ⢠When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame Accurate on page 108), the following limitations apply when combining titles: â Mixed aspect ratios (16:9, 4:3, 4:3 (letter box)) canâÂÂt be combined. â Mixed recording modes ( EP / MN1 â 6 , LP / MN7 â 18 , SP / MN19 â 31 , FINE / MN32 ) canâÂÂt be combined. Preview Use this command to check the content of a title in the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂPreviewâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a title from the Copy List to preview, then press ENTER. The selected title starts playing. You can return to the Copy List screen by pressing î STOP , otherwise playback will continue until the end of the Copy List. ⢠During preview, you can select a new thumbnail for the Disc Navigator by pressing NAVI MARK . 3 Repeat step 2 to preview other titles, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options. Move Use this command to change the order of titles in the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂMoveâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a title from the Copy List to move, then press ENTER. The thumbnail appears in the Copy List section in the lower half of the screen. HDD Divide Title Divide 2-1 0.08.13.26 î Play Pause Divide Back Title 2 LP 0h32m55s 16:00 Sun 11/08 Pr 5 Recording Time Conf List HDD HDD to DVD Copy Add Erase Ttl Name Divide Combine DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List All To t al 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Conf List HDD HDD to DVD Copy Preview Move Erase All Chpt Edit Erase Sec DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List All To t al 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 67 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 68 En 3 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a new position for the title, then press ENTER. The thumbnails in the Copy List reflect the new order. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to move other titles in the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options. Erase All Use this command to erase the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂErase Allâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) The Chapter Edit option gives you access to several commands that you can use to edit chapters within a Copy List title. Editing chapters in a Copy List title does not change any actual content on the HDD. It affects only how the chapters appear after copying. 1 Select âÂÂChpt Editâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a title from the Copy List to edit, then press ENTER. The chapter editing screen appears with thumbnails of each chapter. 3 Select a command from the chapter edit menu options. The following commands are available: ⢠Erase â Erase individual chapters: Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î / î (cursor buttons) and ENTER to select a chapter to erase. The chapter is erased after confirming. ⢠Divide â Divide a chapter into two or more new chapters: See Chapter Edit: Divide below. ⢠Combine â Combine two chapters into one: See Chapter Edit: Combine below. ⢠Move â Change the order of the chapters: See Chapter Edit: Move below. ⢠Preview â Check the content of a chapter: Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select a chapter, then press ENTER . Once the preview has started, press î STOP to return to the chapter edit screen. 4 Press RETURN to get back to the chapter editing options on the left, or select another chapter 5 Select âÂÂBackâ (or press RETURN ) to go back to the main Copy List screen. Conf List HDD HDD to DVD Copy Preview Move Erase All Chpt Edit Erase Sec DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List All To t al 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Co py List inser tion point Title to mov e 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s Conf List HDD HDD to DVD Copy Preview Move Erase All Chpt Edit Erase Sec DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List All To t al 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Erase all titles ? Ye s N o Conf List HDD Preview Move Erase All Chpt Edit Erase sec DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List All To t al 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 HDD to DVD Copy 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s 1/1 HDD Chapter Edit Erase Divide Combine Move Preview 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Title 2 Chapter - - - h - - m 2 Back Chapter edit menu 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 68 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 69 En Chapter Edit: Divide You can divide a chapter into as many new chapters as necessary. 1 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select the chapter to divide, then press ENTER. 2 Use the playback controls to find the place you want to divide the chapter. You can use all the usual playback controls, including î PLAY , î PAUSE , scan ( î , î ), and slow-motion ( î , î ). 3 With âÂÂDivideâ highlighted, press ENTER to divide the chapter at the current playback position. You can divide the chapter as many times as you want (up to 99 per title). 4 Select âÂÂBackâ (or press RETURN ) to get back to the main Chapter Edit screen. Note ⢠When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame Accurate on page 108), the divide point may move by up to half a second after selecting Divide . Chapter Edit: Combine This command lets you combine two chapters into one. 1 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select the space between the chapters to combine. 2 Press ENTER to combine. Chapter Edit: Move This command lets you rearrange the chapters within a Copy List title. 1 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select the chapter you want to move, then press ENTER. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select a new position for the chapter, then press ENTER. The thumbnails in the chapter list reflect the new order. 1-3 0.00.52.17 î Play Pause Divide Back Title 12:18 Wed 7/10 Recording Time SP Chapter 0h01m24s 0h00m 1 HDD Divide Chapter Divide 1/1 HDD Chapter Edit Erase Divide Combine Move Preview 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Title 2 Chapter ---h--m 2 Back 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s 1/1 HDD Chapter Edit Back Erase Divide Combine Move Preview 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Title 2 Chapter 0h05m 2 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s 1/1 HDD Chapter Edit Erase Divide Combine Move Preview 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Title 2 Chapter ---h--m 2 Back Insertion point Title to mov e 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 69 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 70 En Erase Section (Erase Sec) Using this command you can delete a part of a Copy List title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording made from the TV. 1 Select âÂÂErase Secâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select the title you want to erase a section from, then press ENTER. After selecting a title, a screen appears from which you can mark the start and end points of the section to erase. 3 Use the playback controls to find the start of the section to erase, then (with âÂÂFromâ highlighted) press ENTER. You can use all the usual playback controls, including î PLAY , î PAUSE , scan ( î , î ), and slow-motion ( î , î ). The bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current play position in the title. After pressing ENTER , a marker appears under the bar to show the start of the section. 4 In the same way, find the end of the section to erase, then (with âÂÂToâ highlighted) press ENTER. After pressing ENTER , another marker appears under the bar to show the end of the section, with the section itself marked in red. 5 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of video either side of the marked section to see how the edit will look. 6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 if you want to erase more sections from the same title. 7 Select âÂÂBackâ (or press RETURN ) to get back to the main Copy List screen. Note ⢠When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame Accurate on page 108), the âÂÂFromâ time and length of the erased section may differ by up to 0.5 seconds from that set. HDD Erase Sec Erase Sec 2-1 0.06.52.17 î Play Pause From To Back A B Title 2 LP 0h32m55s 16:00 Sun 11/08 Pr 5 Recording Time î Play Pause 0.02.09.17 From T A A B DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 70 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 71 En Copying from DVD to HDD* Use the DVD to HDD Copy screen to transfer video on DVD to the hard disk. * See also Copyright on page 62. Important ⢠The DVD to HDD Copy screen is not accessible when a finalized Video mode disc is loaded. However, you can still use the One Touch Copy function (see One Touch Copy* (DVD to HDD) on page 62). ⢠The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time. ⢠The copy list will be erased if: â any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or edited. â the disc tray is opened. â playback is switched between Original and Play List. â the DVD disc is re-initialized or finalized. â the recorder is reset to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 112). ⢠It may not be possible to copy from a DVD disc that was recorded on a different DVD recorder or PC. 1 Load the recordable DVD disc that contains the material you want to copy to the HDD. 2 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂCopyâÂÂ. ⢠Note that the Copy option will not be available if the TV system of the recorder and the disc do not match. (See Input Line System on page 98 for how to change the TV system of the recorder.) Original Conf List DVD DVD to HDD Copy Add Erase Move Preview Erase All DVD DVD HD D HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List T otal 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Currently selected DVD title Information for the selected title Co py List titles Running time of the Co py List Co py List menu options 16:00 Sun 8/11 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s RETURN HOME MENU DISPLAY ENTER PREV NEXT Timer Recording Disc Navigator Copy Disc History PhotoViewer Disc Setup Initial Setup V ideo/Audio Adjust Play Mode DV Record DVR -520H/720H screen DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 71 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 72 En 3 Select âÂÂDVD î HDDâÂÂ. The DVD to HDD Copy screen appears. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to highlight the command you want from the menu options on the left, then press ENTER . Most commands require you then to select a title or location from the thumbnail views area of the screen. Use the î /î (cursor left/right) followed by ENTER to do this. ⢠When in the thumbnails area of the screen, use the PREV ( î ) and NEXT ( î ) buttons to display the previous/next page if there are more titles than will fit on the screen. ⢠As you highlight different thumbnails, information about the title is shown in the central area of the screen. Press DISPLAY to change the information displayed. ⢠Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on the left from the thumbnail area of the Copy List screen. DVD to HDD Copy List menu options Use the following commands when making a DVD to HDD Copy List: ⢠Add â Select and add titles to the Copy List (see page 73). ⢠Move â Change the order of titles in the Copy List (see page 73). ⢠Erase All â Erase the Copy List (see page 74). ⢠Preview â Check the content of a title in the Copy List (see page 74). ⢠Erase â Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see page 73). ⢠Confirm List ( Conf List ) â Confirm the Copy List and go to the recording settings screen (see Recording the Copy List below). Recording the Copy List After putting together your Copy List, youâÂÂre ready to record it. 1 Select âÂÂConf Listâ to display the Copy List settings screen. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select the Recording Mode. ⢠High-Speed Copy â Only available when copying Original content from a VR mode disc. The Copy List is copied at the same recording quality as the original. (See page 61 for more information on high- speed copying.) ⢠FINE , SP , LP , EP , MN â The Copy List is copied at the specified recording quality in real-time. (Note that if you copy at a higher quality setting than the original, the copy will not be better quality than the original.) ⢠If you select MN above, you can also change the level setting ( MN1 â MN32 ) from the Recording Quality box that appears. When you change the recording mode setting, you can see how much hard disk space it will require. If this is more than is available, it shows up in red and you wonâÂÂt be able to start copying. In this case, either change the recording quality, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List. 3 Select âÂÂStartâ to begin copying. Original Conf List DVD DVD to HDD Copy Add Erase Move Preview Erase All DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/1 Copy List T otal 0h00m 2 3 4 DVD SP Start DVD HDD Required 1h30m Recording Mode Copy List T otal Current HDD Remain 1h30m 30h00m / 34h00m Conf List Original DVD to HDD Copy Add Erase Move Preview Erase All DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 72 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 73 En DVD to HDD Copy List commands Add Use this command to add titles to the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂAddâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a title from the DVD to add to the Copy List, then press ENTER. The thumbnail appears in the Copy List section in the lower half of the screen. If there are already titles in the Copy List, the title is added at the end. 3 Repeat step 2 to add more titles to the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options. Note ⢠Titles which were recorded directly to a VR mode disc or have already been copied real-time, and which contain bilingual audio or are recorded in recording modes MN12 â MN20 can be added to the Copy List, however if High-Speed Copy is selected they will not actually be copied. ⢠Similarly, a copy-once protected title, recorded from the TV for example, can be added to the Copy List, but it will not be copied if High-Speed Copy is selected. ⢠You may not be able to copy titles when copying a disc that was created using a PC or another recorder. Erase Use this command to erase individual titles from the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂEraseâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a title from the Copy List to erase, then press ENTER. 3 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm that you want to erase the title, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to erase more titles from the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options. Move Use this command to change the order of titles currently in the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂMoveâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a title from the Copy List to move, then press ENTER. Play List Conf List DVD DVD to HDD Copy Add Erase Move Preview Erase All DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List To tal 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 16:00 Sun 8/11 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s Play List Conf List DVD DVD to HDD Copy Add Erase Move Preview Erase All DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List To tal 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s Play List Conf List DVD DVD to HDD Copy Add Erase Move Preview Erase All DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List To tal 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 73 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 74 En 3 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select the insertion point for the title, then press ENTER. The thumbnails in the Copy List are updated to reflect the new order. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to move other titles in the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options. Preview Use this command to check the content of a title in the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂPreviewâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a title from the Copy List to preview, then press ENTER. The selected title starts playing. You can return to the Copy List screen by pressing î STOP , otherwise playback will continue until the end of the Copy List. 3 Repeat step 2 to preview other titles, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options. Erase All Use this command to erase the Copy List. 1 Select âÂÂErase Allâ from the Copy List menu options. 2 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. Using disc back-up* This feature offers a simple way to make a back-up copy of a finalized Video mode disc. The data is copied first to the hard disk drive, then on to another recordable DVD disc. * See also Copyright on page 62. 1 Press HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂCopyâ 3 Select âÂÂDisc Back-upâÂÂ. 4 Select a back-up option. There are three back-up options: ⢠Start new disc back-up â Start making a back-up of a disc. ⢠Resume writing data â Record the back-up data already on the HDD to a recordable DVD. ⢠Erase back-up data â Erase the back-up data on the HDD. Play List Conf List DVD DVD to HDD Copy Add Erase Move Preview Erase All DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List To tal 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Co py List inser tion point Title to mov e 15:00 Wed 7/10 Recording Time Pr 5 LP 0h32m55s Play List Conf List DVD DVD to HDD Copy Add Erase Move Preview Erase All DVD DVD HDD HDD 1 1/3 1/2 Copy List To tal 1h30m 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Erase all titles ? Ye s N o Start new disc back-up Resume writing data Erase back-up data Disc Back-up DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 74 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and back-up 07 75 En 5 Press î OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray and load the disc you want to make a back-up of, then close the disc tray. You can only make back-up copies of finalized Video mode discs. 6 Select âÂÂStartâÂÂ. ⢠To see the progress of the back-up, press DISPLAY . ⢠You can cancel the back-up process by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second. 7 When the data has been copied, press î OPEN/ CLOSE to open the disc tray. Take out the disc and load a blank* recordable DVD. * If youâÂÂre using a DVD-RW, the disc doesnâÂÂt have to be blank, although the previous contents of the disc will be erased in the back-up process. You can use a DVD-R Ver. 2.0 disc, or DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 or Ver. 1.2 / 4x for the back-up. ⢠If you back-up a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW, you cannot undo the finalization later. ⢠Actual recordable capacity of discs vary so there may be cases where the contents of the disc youâÂÂre backing-up will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If this happens, please try another brand of disc. 8 Select âÂÂStartâ to start writing the backed-up data to the blank disc. ⢠To see the progress of the back-up, press DISPLAY . ⢠You can cancel the back-up process by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second. However, this will make the disc unusable (although if you are using a DVD-RW disc you can re-initialize it in order to make it usable againâÂÂsee Initializing a DVD-RW disc on page 60.) 9 After the recorder has finished recording the back-up disc, you can select whether to make another back-up of the same data or exit. ⢠Select Start to make another back-up copy or Cancel to finish. If you want to make another back-up copy, return to step 6 above. 10 If you donâÂÂt need to keep the back-up data on the HDD, you can delete it now. Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD; select No to keep it (you can delete it later if you want to). ⢠If you decide to leave the back-up data on the HDD, you can make back-up copies to recordable DVD discs anytime from the Disc Back-up menu. Note ⢠It is not possible to play material on the HDD that has been backed-up from DVD. No Disc. Please load a disc to be backed-up. Start Cancel Disc Back-up Read from disc and save to HDD. Start reading? Start Cancel Disc Back-up Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive. Please eject the disc and load a recordable disc. Start Cancel Disc Back-up Wr ite back-up data from Hard Disk Drive. The disc contents will be overwritten. OK to start? Start Cancel Disc Back-up Disc back-up finished. To make another back-up copy , please load a recordable disc. Start Cancel Disc Back-up The backed-up data is still on the HDD. Erasing it will increase the free space available. OK to Erase? Disc Back-up Ye s No DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 75 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 76 En Chapter 8 Editing Using the Disc Navigator you can edit video content on unfinalized Video mode and VR mode DVD discs , as well as video content on the internal hard disk drive (HDD). The editing features available in the Disc Navigator depend on whether you are editing video on a Video mode or VR mode DVD , or the HDD, and whether youâÂÂre editing Original content, or a Play List. With unfinalized Video mode DVDs, there are a limited number of editing commands, including naming, locking and erasing titles. Once a Video mode disc has been finalized, further editing is not possible. There are two ways to edit VR mode DVD-RW discs. You can directly edit the Original content of the disc, or you can create and edit a Play List. The Play List doesnâÂÂt actually change any of the content on the disc, but just controls how the content is played back (rather like the program play feature found on CD players). Editing material recorded on the HDD is similar to editing the Original content of a VR mode DVD-RW, with similar commands for erasing, naming and locking titles, as well as fine control over the content of chapters within titles. The Disc Navigator screen DVD Disc Navigator Video Mode 1/1 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Recording Time 0h30m40s Undo DVD 123 456 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Lock Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Edit mode Disc Navigat or menu options Disc recording mode Number of title pages Locked title indicator Information f or selected title Recording time av ailable in the displayed recording mode Currently selected title DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 76 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 77 En HDD Disc Navigator Important ⢠Titles that have been recorded with a Line Input setting different to the current setting of the recorder are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank thumbnail image. See also Input Line System on page 98. ⢠During recording, if you display the Disc Navigator for the HDD, some of the titles may appear with a mark. These titles were recorded with a Line Input setting different to the current setting of the recorder. During recording, these titles cannot be played. HDD All 1/1 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Recording Time 0h30m40s 123 456 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Chpt Edit Erase Sec HDD Remain 6h12m(FINE) All Group1 Gr oup2 Group3 Group4 NEW Auto Replace Recording indicator Disc Navigat or menu options Selec ted Group Number of title pages Locked title indicator Information f or selected title Recording time av ailable in the displayed recording mode New indicator Currently selected title HDD group tabs DVD RECORDER ONE TOUCH COPY RETURN DISC NAVIGAT OR PLAY LIST HOME MENU HDD DVD DISPLAY ENTER CLEAR PREV PLAY NEXT DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 77 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 78 En 1 Press HDD or DVD to select the hard disk drive or the DVD. 2 Press DISC NAVIGATOR to display the Disc Navigator screen. Playback will automatically stop when you do this. ⢠You can also access the Disc Navigator from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU , select Disc Navigator then press ENTER ). ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to highlight the command you want from the menu options on the left, then press ENTER . Most commands require you then to select a title (or chapter) or location from the thumbnail views area of the screen. Use the îÂÂ/ îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) followed by ENTER to do this. ⢠When in the thumbnails area of the screen, use the PREV ( î ) and NEXT ( î ) buttons to display the previous/next page if there are more than six titles/ nine chapters. ⢠As you highlight different thumbnails, information about the title is shown in the central area of the screen. Press DISPLAY to change the information displayed. ⢠If you are editing a VR mode disc, press PLAYLIST to switch between Original and Play List Disc Navigator screens. ⢠Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on the left from the thumbnail area of the Disc Navigator. ⢠You can switch between the HDD and the DVD Disc Navigator screens using the HDD and DVD buttons (front panel or remote). You can copy a selected HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to HDD by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY (see also page 62 for more on One Touch Copy). When editing HDD content, a row of group names appears above the title thumbnails (see Editing HDD groups on page 84 for more details). You can access these by pressing î (cursor up) repeatedly until the All group is highlighted, then using the î /î (cursor left/ right) buttons to select a group. Press ENTER to âÂÂopenâ the highlighted group. Titles on the HDD marked with a icon are timer recordings set to Auto Replace Recording (see Standard timer recording on page 51). Titles on the HDD marked with a icon are recently recorded titles that havenâÂÂt yet been played. 3 To exit the Disc Navigator, press HOME MENU . Remember ⢠You can change the thumbnail pictures used for titles using the NAVI MARK buttonâÂÂsee Changing the thumbnail picture for a title on page 37. Disc Navigator menu options The commands available from the Disc Navigator for the VR mode and Video mode discs and the HDD are shown below. ⢠Play â Play a title (page 79) ⢠Title Name ( Ttl Name ) â Name or rename a title (page 80) ⢠Lock/Unlock â Lock or unlock a title to prevent accidental changes being made (page 82) ⢠Erase â Erase a title (page 79) ⢠Erase All â Erase all titles (page 83) ⢠Undo â Undo the last change (page 83) (Original) ⢠Play â Play a title (page 79) ⢠Title Name ( Ttl Name ) â Name or rename a title (page 80) ⢠Lock/Unlock â Lock or unlock a title to prevent accidental changes being made (page 82) ⢠Erase â Erase a title (page 79) ⢠Erase All â Erase all titles (page 83) Original 1/1 Undo DVD 123 456 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Chpt Edit Erase Sec DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Play List 1/1 Undo DVD 123 456 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Chpt Edit Erase Sec DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Playlist / Original indicator Video mode VR mode DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 78 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 79 En ⢠Undo â Undo the last change (page 83) ⢠Chapter Edit ( Chpt Edit ) â Make detailed changes to chapters in a title (page 81) ⢠Erase Section (Erase Sec) â Erase a part of a title (page 82) ⢠Play â Play a title (page 79) ⢠Title Name ( Ttl Name ) â Name or rename a title (page 80) ⢠Lock/Unlock â Lock or unlock a title to prevent accidental changes being made (page 82) ⢠Erase â Erase a title (page 79) ⢠Erase All â Erase all titles (page 83) ⢠Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) â Make detailed changes to chapters in a title (page 81) ⢠Divide â Divide a title into two (page 83) ⢠Change Group ( Chg Group ) â Assign a title to a group on the HDD (page 84) ⢠Group Name ( Grp Name ) â Name or rename an HDD group (page 84) ⢠Erase Section (Erase Sec) â Erase part of a title (page 82) (Play List) ⢠Create â Make a new Play List title (page 87) ⢠Chapter Edit ( Chpt Edit ) â Make detailed changes to chapters in a Play List title (page 86) ⢠Move â Move the position of a title in the Play List (page 87) ⢠Erase All â Erase all titles in the Play List (page 88) ⢠Undo â Undo the last change (page 88) ⢠Play â Play a title (page 85) ⢠Erase â Erase a title from the Play List (page 85) ⢠Title Name ( Ttl Name ) â Name or rename a title in the Play List (page 85) ⢠Combine â Combine two Play List titles into one (page 88) ⢠Divide â Divide a Play List title into two (page 88) ⢠Erase Section (Erase Sec) â Erase a part of a title (page 86) Editing VR mode Original , Video mode and HDD content These commands affect the actual content stored on the DVD-R/RW or HDD. Remember ⢠If you are editing a VR mode disc, use the PLAYLIST button to switch to the Disc Navigator Original screen. Play Use this function to start playback of a title. 1 Select âÂÂPlayâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select the title you want to play, then press ENTER or î PLAY. Playback of the title you selected starts. Erase The Erase title command does slightly different things depending on what you are currently editing. If you are editing Original content on a VR mode disc or content on the HDD, the title will be erased from the disc and the available recording time will increase accordingly. If you erase titles from a Video mode DVD-R disc, the title will disappear from the list of titles, but the available recording time will not increase. Erasing a title from a Video mode DVD-RW disc increases the available recording time only if it is the last title on the disc. HDD VR mode VR mode Video mode HDD 1/1 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Undo DVD 123 456 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Lock Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Video Mode VR mode Video mode HDD DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 79 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 80 En 1 Select âÂÂEraseâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select the title you want to erase, then press ENTER. 3 Highlight âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. 4 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to erase. Tip ⢠You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing ENTER . (You can also use this method to erase titles when using the Play function, above.) Title Name (Ttl Name) You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long for VR mode and HDD recordings and 32 characters for Video mode recordings. 1 Select âÂÂTtl Nameâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select the title you want to name, then press ENTER to go to the name input screen. 3 Input a name for the selected title. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) and ENTER to select characters. â¢A name generated automatically by the recorder will already be in the name input section of the screen. Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to change the cursor position. ⢠Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower- case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons ( îÂÂ/ î ). ⢠You can also use the CLEAR button to delete characters directly (press and hold for two seconds to delete the whole name). For other remote control key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name below. ⢠For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you will see only a limited character set. 4 Highlight âÂÂOKâ then press ENTER to enter the name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen. ⢠To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without saving changes to the title name, press RETURN . 5 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to name. Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name The table below shows the remote control key shortcuts that you can use to input characters in the name input screen. Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through the characters shown. If you want to enter two characters in succession that are both on the same button (for example a P and an R ), press î to advance the cursor one space manually between inputting the two characters. *1 lower-case: ÿ; upper -case: àOriginal DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) 1/1 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Chpt Edit Erase Sec Erase Title? Ye s N o VR mode Video mode HDD Input Title Name CAPS small OK Clear Space A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; A A A A A A àç E E E E I I I I # 2 3 ô õ ö ÷ 1 ÿ ` D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y à$ % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & ã \ ç è é ì â î _ àâ / @ [ ÃÂ¥ ] à÷ x ñ { | } ~ á c a â o â << << 1 / 4 1 / 2 3 / 4 ø 1 2:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Key Characters Key Characters 1 . , â ? ! â & 1 6 m n o 6 ö ô ò ó ø ñ 2 a b c 2 ä àá â ã æ ç 7 p q r s 7 $ ÿ/à*1 3 d e f 3 è é ë ê 8 t u v 8 ü ù û ú 4 g h i 4 î ï ì àá 9 w x y z 9 5 j k l 5 ã 0 0 î [cursor back] î [cursor forward] îÂÂ/ î [change case] CLEAR [clear character] î <space> î [ï¬Ânish name input] VIDEO Plus ~ ( ) _ / : ; â ` ^ @ # â % ÃÂ¥ | = { } [ ] < > DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 80 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 81 En Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) When editing VR mode DVDs or video on the HDD you can edit individual chapters within a title, with commands for erasing, combining and dividing. You can also play individual chapters to check their content. 1 Select âÂÂChpt Editâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select the title that contains the chapters you want to edit, then press ENTER. After selecting a title, thumbnails of each chapter appear and youâÂÂll see that the Disc Navigator menu items change to the chapter editing commands: ⢠Erase â Erase chapters: Select the chapter you want to erase and press ENTER (see also the note below). ⢠Divide â Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Select the chapter you want to divide. From the following screen use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find the point at which you want to divide the chapter. With Divide highlighted, press ENTER . You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD disc or 99 chapters per HDD title). Highlight Back and press ENTER to return to the Chapter Edit screen. ⢠Combine â Combine two adjacent chapters into one: Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent chapters and press ENTER (see also the note below) ⢠Preview â Preview chapters: Select the chapter you want to play; press î STOP to return to the chapter edit screen. ⢠Undo â Undo the last command (only works with VR mode disc edits). 3 Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on the left side of the screen. 4 To return to the Disc Navigator screen, press RETURN again, or select âÂÂBackâ from the menu options on the left. Note ⢠When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long. ⢠It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been divided into three, then the middle chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into one. Inserting chapter markers into a title You can create new chapters within a title using the CHP MARK button while playing the title or during recording. This is useful not just for navigation of the disc content but also for editing purposes. 1 Start playback of the title you want to create new chapter markers in. You can use the Play command from the Disc Navigator menu to do this. 2 Press CHP MARK at any point where you want a new chapter to begin. A chapter marker icon appears on-screen briefly to confirm a new chapter mark has been inserted: VR mode HDD Original DVD 1/1 Chapter Edit Back Erase Divide Combine Preview Undo 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP Title 1 Chapter 0h03m 2 Original Divide DVD Divide Chapter 1-3 0.00.52.17 î Play Pause Divide Back Title Recording Time LP Chapter 0h01m24s 0h00m 1 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 VR mode HDD CHP MARK PA USE î î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 81 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 82 En ⢠For greater control over the exact position of chapter markers it can be useful to use the î PAUSE button and/or the slow-motion and frame advance/reverse controls ( îÂÂ/î ). Note ⢠You cannot insert chapter markers during Auto Start Recording. ⢠If you pause a recording in VR mode, the recorder automatically starts a new chapter when you restart the recording. ⢠When recording in Video mode, the recorder automatically puts chapter markers in at regular intervals. It is not possible to add extra chapter markers manually after recording (see also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 108). ⢠The Play List and Original content on a disc can each contain up to 999 chapters. ⢠Each HDD title can contain a maximum of 99 chapters. ⢠Similar chapter editing commands are available for HDD content from the HDD to DVD copy screen. See also Copying from HDD to DVD* on page 63. Erase Section (Erase Sec) Using this command you can delete a part of an Original title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording made from the TV. 1 Select âÂÂErase Secâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select a title. After selecting a title, the Erase Sec screen appears from which you can mark the start and end points of the section to erase. 3 Use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find the start of the section to erase, then (with âÂÂFromâ highlighted) press ENTER . The bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current play position in the title. After pressing ENTER , a marker appears under the bar to show the start of the section. 4 In the same way, find the end of the section to erase, then (with âÂÂToâ highlighted) press ENTER. After pressing ENTER , another marker appears under the bar to show the end of the section, with the section itself marked in red. 5 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of video either side of the marked section to see how the edit will look. ⢠When editing VR mode Original content, you may not be able to erase very short sections (less than five seconds). 6 Erase another section from the same title, or press RETURN to get back to the main Disc Navigator screen. Lock / Unlock You can lock a title so that it canâÂÂt be edited or erased accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock it later. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt undo any edits made before changing the lock status. You also canâÂÂt undo a lock/unlock command using the Undo option from the Disc Navigator menu. VR mode HDD Original Erase Sec DVD Erase Sec 1-1 0.00.52.17 î Play Pause From To Back Title 1 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 Recording Time LP 0h01m24s A B î Play Pause 0.02.09.17 From T A A B VR mode Video mode HDD DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 82 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 83 En 1 Select âÂÂLockâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select the title you want to lock (or unlock), then press ENTER. An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator with a padlock icon. 3 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to lock/unlock. Erase All This erases all unlocked titles from the disc (see also Lock / Unlock on page 82). 1 Select âÂÂErase Allâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. Undo If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally undo it. There are three levels of undo (in other words, you can undo the last three edits you made). ⢠Select âÂÂUndoâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. ⢠You canâÂÂt undo anything after ejecting the disc from the recorder or switching the recorder into standby. ⢠You canâÂÂt undo the following operations: initializing, recording or finalizing a disc, locking and unlocking titles. Divide Use this command to divide a title on the HDD into two. Note that once divided, the two new titles cannot be recombined into one again. 1 Select âÂÂDivideâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Select the title that you want to divide, then press ENTER. 3 Use the standard playback controls to find the place you want to divide the title. 4 With âÂÂDivideâ highlighted, press ENTER to divide the title at the current playback position. 5 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm you want to divide the title. Select No if you want to cancel and leave the title intact. 6 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to divide. Original 1/1 12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator Lock Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) VR mode Video mode HDD Original 1/1 Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator Erase all titles? Lock Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Ye s N o VR mode Video mode HDD HDD Divide 2-1 0.00.08.26 î Play Pause Divide Back Title 2 Recording Time LP 0h01m24s Divide Title 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 83 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 84 En Editing HDD groups The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be many hours of video in the recorder. To help you organize your HDD video content there are four âÂÂgroupsâÂÂ. You can move content from group to group, and rename the groups as you want. Change Group (Chg Group) Use this command to assign titles to a particular group. 1 Select âÂÂChg Groupâ from the Disc Navigator menu, then press ENTER. 2 Select the title that you want to put into a different group, then press ENTER . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a group for the title, then press ENTER. ⢠You can select one of the four groups, or choose No Group , in which case it will only appear when All is selected. 4 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to change the group of. Group Name (Grp Name) Use this command to rename a group. 1 Select âÂÂGrp Nameâ from the Disc Navigator menu. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select the group that you want to name or rename, then press ENTER. 3 Input a name for the group. The name can be up to six characters long. 4 To finish entering the name, highlight âÂÂExitâ and press ENTER. 5 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another group to name. Creating and editing a VR mode Play List A Play List is a kind of virtual content based on the actual (Original) content of the disc. The main advantages of this type of editing is that it is non-destructive of the video content on the disc, and it allows greater control over editing, so that you end up with the content exactly as you want it. Remember ⢠Use the PLAYLIST button to switch to the Play List edit screen. ⢠The Play List can contain a maximum of 99 titles. HDD HDD HDD All Title 1 21:00 Fri 6/09 Pr 5 LP Disc Navigator Lock Erase All Grp Name Chg Group Divide GROUP1 GROUP2 GROUP3 GROUP4 No Group HDD Input Group Name CAPS small OK Clear Space A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; A A A A A A àç E E E E I I I I # 2 3 ô õ ö ÷ 1 ÿ ` D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y à$ % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & ã \ ç è é ì â î _ àâ / @ [ ÃÂ¥ ] à÷ x ñ { | } ~ á c a â o â << << 1 / 4 1 / 2 3 / 4 ø G roup 1 VR mode DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 84 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 85 En Play Use this function to start playback of a title. 1 Select âÂÂPlayâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title you want to play, then press ENTER. Playback of the title you selected starts. Erase This command erases a title only from the Play List. The title remains in the Original content and the available recording time does not increase. 1 Select âÂÂEraseâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title you want to erase, then press ENTER. 3 Highlight âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. 4 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to erase. Note ⢠The remaining recording time doesnâÂÂt change when you erase something from the Play List. Title Name (Ttl Name) You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long. 1 Select âÂÂTtl Nameâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title you want to name, then press ENTER. 3 Input a name for the selected title. Press ENTER after selecting each character. â¢A name generated automatically by the recorder will already be in the name input section of the screen. Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to change the cursor position. ⢠Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower- case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons ( îÂÂ/ î ). ⢠You can also use the CLEAR button to delete characters directly (press and hold for two seconds to delete the whole name). For other remote control key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name on page 80. ⢠For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you will see only a limited character set. 4 Highlight âÂÂOKâÂÂ, then press ENTER to fix the name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen. ⢠To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without saving changes to the title name, press RETURN . 5 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to name. VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Chpt Edit Erase Sec DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Play Erase Ttl Name Chpt Edit Erase Sec DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Erase Title? Ye s N o VR mode Input Title Name CAPS small OK Clear Space A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; A A A A A A àç E E E E I I I I # 2 3 ô õ ö ÷ 1 ÿ ` D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y à$ % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & ã \ ç è é ì â î _ àâ / @ [ ÃÂ¥ ] à÷ x ñ { | } ~ á c a â o â << << 1 / 4 1 / 2 3 / 4 ø 1 2:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 85 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 86 En Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) When editing VR mode DVDs you can edit individual chapters within a title, with commands for erasing, moving, combining and dividing. You can also play individual chapters to check their content. 1 Select âÂÂChpt Editâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title that contains the chapters you want to edit, then press ENTER . After selecting a title, thumbnails of each chapter appear and youâÂÂll see that the Disc Navigator menu items change to the chapter editing commands: ⢠Erase â Erase chapters: Select the chapter you want to erase and press ENTER . ⢠Divide â Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Select the chapter you want to divide. From the following screen use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find the point at which you want to divide the chapter. With Divide highlighted, press ENTER . You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as you want (up to 999 chapters per disc). Highlight Back and press ENTER to return to the Chapter Edit screen. ⢠Combine â Combine two adjacent chapters into one: Select the dividing line between two adjacent chapters and press ENTER . ⢠Move â Rearrange chapters: Select the chapter you want to move, press ENTER , then highlight the new location for it, then press ENTER again. ⢠Preview â Preview chapters: Select the chapter you want to play; press î STOP to return to the chapter edit screen. ⢠Undo â Undo the last command. 3 Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on the left side of the screen. 4 To return to the Disc Navigator screen, press RETURN again, or select âÂÂBackâ from the menu options on the left. Erase Section (Erase Sec) Using this command you can delete a part of a Play List title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording made from the TV. 1 Select âÂÂErase Secâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select a title. After selecting a title, the Erase Sec screen appears from which you can mark the start and end points of the section to erase. 3 Use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find the start of the section to erase, then (with âÂÂFromâ highlighted) press ENTER . The bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current play position in the title. After pressing ENTER , a marker appears under the bar to show the start of the section. 4 In the same way, find the end of the section to erase, then (with âÂÂToâ highlighted) press ENTER. After pressing ENTER , another marker appears under the bar to show the end of the section, with the section itself marked in red. VR mode DVD 1/1 Chapter Edit Back Erase Divide Combine Move Undo 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 15:00 Wed11/12 Pr 5 LP Title 1 Chapter 0h03m 2 Play List Play List Divide DVD Divide Chapter 1-3 0.00.52.17 î Play Pause Divide Back Title Recording Time LP Chapter 0h01m24s 0h00m 1 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 VR mode Play List Erase Sec DVD Erase Sec 1-2 0.00.52.17 î Play Pause From To Back Title 1 Recording Time LP 0h01m24s A B 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 î Play Pause 0.02.09.17 From T A A B DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 86 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 87 En 5 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of video either side of the marked section to see how the edit will look. 6 Erase another section from the same title, or press RETURN to get back to the main Disc Navigator screen. Create Use this function to add an Original title to the Play List. When you do this, the whole title is put into the Play List (you can erase bits you donâÂÂt need laterâÂÂsee Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) on page 86). The title appears in the Play List complete with the chapter markers that appear in the Original. However, if you add more chapter markers to the Original later, these are not automatically copied over into the Play List title. You can add up to 99 titles to the Play List. 1 Select âÂÂCreateâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select the insertion point for the new title, then press ENTER. If there are no titles in the Play List yet, this step does not apply. 3 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select an Original title to put into the Play List. 4 Press ENTER to add the title. The new title appears in the updated Play List. 5 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another location for a new title. Move Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play List titles. 1 Select âÂÂMoveâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title you want to move, then press ENTER. 3 Select a new position in the Play List for the title, then press ENTER. After pressing ENTER , the new, updated Play List is displayed. VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) 1 2 Play List 1/1 Undo DVD ORG1 ORG4 ORG2 ORG3 Disc Navigator 12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator 1 Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) 2 3 VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator 12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP 123 4 Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator 123 4 Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 87 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 88 En 4 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to move. Divide Use this command to split a title up into two new titles. 1 Select âÂÂDivideâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title that you want to divide, then press ENTER. 3 Use the playback controls to find the place you want to divide the title. You can use all the usual playback controls, including î PLAY , î PAUSE , scan ( î , î ), and slow-motion ( î , î ). 4 With âÂÂDivideâ highlighted, press ENTER to divide the title at the current playback position. 5 To return to the Disc Navigator menu options, select âÂÂBackâ and press ENTER . Combine Use this function to combine two adjacent Play List titles into one. 1 Select âÂÂCombineâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Highlight the bar divider between the two titles you want to combine, then press ENTER. After pressing ENTER , the new, updated Play List is displayed. 3 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or continue combining more titles. Erase All This command erases all the titles from the Play List. 1 Select âÂÂErase Allâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. Undo If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally undo it. There are three levels of undo (in other words, you can undo the last three edits you made). ⢠Select âÂÂUndoâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. ⢠You canâÂÂt undo anything after ejecting the disc from the recorder or switching the recorder into standby. ⢠You canâÂÂt undo the following operations: initializing, recording or finalizing a disc, locking and unlocking titles. VR mode Play List Divide DVD Divide Chapter 1-1 0.00.08.26 î Play Pause Divide Back Title 1 Recording Time LP 0h01m24s 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator 123 4 Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator 123 Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator Erase all titles? Ye s N o Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) VR mode DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 88 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Disc History 09 89 En Chapter 9 Disc History The Disc History screen lets you see how much recording space remains on the last 30 recordable DVD discs loaded. It also displays information such as disc name, the first three title names, number of titles recorded, recording mode and the lock status of the disc. Using the Disc History 1 Press DISC HISTORY to display the Disc History screen. The most recently loaded disc appears at the top of the list, with previously loaded discs below it. If there is a disc loaded, it is shown in the list with a âÂÂdisc inâ icon. ⢠The Disc History screen is also accessible from the Home Menu. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to see title information for other discs in the list. ⢠To remove a disc from the list, press CLEAR (you canâÂÂt remove the currently loaded disc). ⢠You can see the available recording time for different recording modes by pressing the REC MODE button. 3 To exit the Disc History screen, press HOME MENU or DISC HISTORY. Note ⢠When you initialize a DVD-RW disc or record a DVD-R disc for the first time, the recorder automatically names the disc DISC ** (where ** is a number from 1 to 99). You can rename the disc if you want to (see Input Disc Name on page 92). ⢠When you change the display for the available recording time using the REC MODE button, only the display is changed; the actual recording mode is not affected. ⢠The following discs appear in the Disc History list in gray: â Discs with no available recording space left â Locked discs â Discs that contain the maximum 99 titles and/or 999 chapters â Discs recorded with a Line Input setting different to the recorderâÂÂs current setting. ⢠When a Video mode disc is finalized, the information for that disc disappears from the Disc History. VR mode Video mode Disc History LP DVD Remain Disc Name Title 1 Title 2 Title 3 T oday's Football Enjoy Golf! Social dance Lesson Titles : 8 DVD-RW VR 625 System News Sport T ravel Movie Music 1h54m 2h35m 1h22m 0h30m 1h38m 1/2 Disc name Disc lock indicator Recorded Line Sy stem of disc Av ailable recording space Recording time av ailable Recording mode Number of titles on disc Disc type and recording mode Title information for the selected disc Disc loaded Other discs Selec ted disc DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 89 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 10 90 En Chapter 10 The PhotoViewer From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and picture files stored on a CD-ROM/R/RW on your TV. Playing a slideshow 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂPhotoViewerâ to display the PhotoViewer screen. ⢠The PhotoViewer is only accessible when a disc containing JPEG files is loaded. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a folder from the folder list. The first nine images from the selected folder are displayed as thumbnails in the main part of the screen. 3 Press ENTER to move to the thumbnail view area. The first thumbnail image is highlighted. ⢠To get back to the folder list, press RETURN . 4 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to select a thumbnail. ⢠Use the î and î buttons to display the previous/ next page of thumbnails. 5 Press ENTER or î PLAY to start playing a slideshow from the selected thumbnail. ⢠Use the î PREV / NEXT î buttons to display the previous/next picture, or the î PAUSE button to pause the slideshow. 6 Press î STOP or RETURN to return to the thumbnail view area. 7 To return to the folder view area, press RETURN. ⢠To exit the PhotoViewer, press HOME MENU . Note ⢠Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc it is still possible to view them all using the Reload function (see below). ⢠The time it takes for the recorder to load a file increases with large file sizes. ⢠Pictures with an aspect ratio different to your TV screen will appear with black bars top and bottom, or either side (depending on the picture). ⢠If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that the disc and file formats are compatible with this recorder (see JPEG file compatibility on page 10). Reloading files from a disc If you have a disc with a large number of files and/or folders, you can still view all the images using the reload function. 1 Use the î (cursor down) button to navigate to the last entry in the folder list (âÂÂRead next: ...âÂÂ). 2 Press ENTER to load the next batch of up to 999 files/99 folders from the disc. It will take a moment (at most a minute) to load in the images. PhotoViewer 1/2 1/3 01. 12/12 TUE 02. 13/12 WED 03. 14/12 THU 04. 15/12 FRI 05. 16/12 SA T 06. 17/12 SUN 07. 18/12 MON 08. 19/12 TUE 1 4 7 2 5 8 3 6 9 File Date/Time Chair No. 2 10:00 12/05/2003 Size 1920 x 1440 Currently selected thumbnail File information Pages in file view Pages in folder list Currently selected folder in folder list DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 90 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 10 91 En Note ⢠You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter the PhotoViewer again, it will resume reloading.) Zooming the screen During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move the area of the picture displayed. 1 During a slideshow, use the CHANNEL button to zoom the picture. Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2x zoom and 4x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) to move the zoomed area within the picture. Rotating the screen You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow so you can always view pictures the right way up, whichever way they were taken. ⢠During a slideshow, press ANGLE to rotate the displayed picture clockwise by 90ú. Press ANGLE repeatedly to continue rotating the picture in increments of 90ú. 2x Zoom î î DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 91 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Disc Setup menu 11 92 En Chapter 11 The Disc Setup menu From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure, initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is accessed from the Home menu: ⢠Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc SetupâÂÂ. Basic settings Input Disc Name When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from DISC 1 to DISC 99 . You can use the Input Disc Name function to change the default disc name to something more descriptive. This name appears when you load the disc and when you display disc information on-screen. 1 Select âÂÂInput Disc Nameâ from the Basic options, then âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. 2 Input a name for the disc up to 64 characters long for a VR mode disc, or 32 for a Video mode disc. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î /î (cursor buttons) and ENTER to select characters. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to change the cursor position. ⢠Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower- case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons ( îÂÂ/ î ). ⢠You can also use the CLEAR button to delete characters directly (press and hold for two seconds to delete the whole name). For other remote control key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name on page 80. ⢠For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you will see only a limited character set. Note ⢠You cannot input a name for a disc if the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder. See Input Line System on page 98 for how to change the recorderâÂÂs setting. Lock Disc ⢠Default setting: Off Set to On to prevent accidental recording, editing or erasing of the disc loaded. If you need to unlock the disc to make edits, select Off . DVR -520H/720H Screen Timer Recording Disc Navigator Copy Disc History PhotoViewer Disc Setup Initial Setup V ideo/Audio Adjust Play Mode DV Record VR mode Video mode Basic Initialize Finalize Input Disc Name Lock Disc Next Screen Disc Setup Input Disc Name CAPS small OK Clear Space A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; A A A A A A àç E E E E I I I I # 2 3 ô õ ö ÷ 1 ÿ ` D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y à$ % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & ã \ ç è é ì â î _ àâ / @ [ ÃÂ¥ ] à÷ x ñ { | } ~ á c a â o â << << 1 / 4 1 / 2 3 / 4 ø D ISC7 VR mode Basic Initialize Finalize Input Disc Name Lock Disc On Off Disc Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 92 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Disc Setup menu 11 93 En Important â¢A locked disc can still be initialized (which will completely erase the disc). Note ⢠You cannot change the lock setting for a disc if the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder. See Input Line System on page 98 for how to change the recorderâÂÂs setting. Initialize settings You can initialize a DVD-RW disc for either VR mode recording or Video mode recording. The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be automatically initialized for recording according to the DVD-RW Auto Init. setting in the Initial Setup menu (see page 108). The initialize menu here lets you reinitialize a disc, for example if you want to change the recording format of the disc. See Initializing a DVD-RW disc on page 60 for detailed instructions. HDD Initialize When your DVD recorder is working without a problem this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu. However, if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for some reason, you initialize the HDD to fix the problem. Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the data on it. ⢠Select âÂÂInitialize HDDâ from the disc Setup menu. ⢠Select âÂÂStartâ to initialize. Finalize settings Finalize Finalizing âÂÂfixesâ the recordings in place so that the disc can be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive. See Playing your recordings on other DVD players on page 59 for detailed instructions. Undo Finalize You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you want to record more material or edit material already on the disc. You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the finalization is displayed, use this command to be able to record on the disc using this recorder. 1 From the Disc Setup menu, select âÂÂFinalizeâÂÂ, then âÂÂUndo Finalizeâ from the finalize options. 2 Select âÂÂStartâÂÂ. Note ⢠You cannot finalize a disc or use the Undo Finalize command if the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder. See Input Line System on page 98 for how to change the recorderâÂÂs setting. DVD-RW HDD Initialize Start Basic Initialize Finalize Initialize HDD Disc Setup DVD-R DVD-RW DVD-RW DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 93 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Video/Audio Adjust menu 12 94 En Chapter 12 The Video/Audio Adjust menu Using the Video/Audio Adjust menu you can set up the picture quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, for disc playback, and for recording. Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality settings for the built-in TV tuner and for each external input. There are several preset settings that suit various sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets. Choosing a preset 1 With the recorder stopped, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂVideo/Audio AdjustâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂVideo AdjustâÂÂ. 3 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to change the preset. ⢠Use the INPUT SELECT button to switch between the built-in TV tuner and the external inputs. ⢠Use the CHANNEL /â buttons to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner. There are six presets available: ⢠Tuner â suitable for general TV broadcasts ⢠VCR â suitable for video cassettes ⢠LDP â suitable for Laserdiscs ⢠Memory1 â user preset 1 ⢠Memory2 â user preset 2 ⢠Memory3 â user preset 3 You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for the current preset ( Tuner , VCR or LDP ). 4 Press ENTER to select the preset. Creating your own set There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of picture quality settings. 1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3). 2 Select âÂÂDetailed SettingsâÂÂ. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select the picture quality setting you want to adjust. You can adjust the following settings: ⢠3-D Y/C â Adjusts the brightness/colour separation (NTSC video only). ⢠VNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction applied to the video signal. ⢠Detail â Adjusts how sharp edges appear. ⢠White AGC â Turn on for automatic white level adjustment. ⢠White Level â Adjusts the intensity of white. ⢠Black Level â Adjusts the intensity of black. ⢠Black Setup â Corrects the standard reference black level (NTSC video only). ⢠Hue â Adjusts overall balance between red and green. ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts how rich the colours appear. Timer Recording Disc Navigator Copy Disc History PhotoViewer Disc Setup Initial Setup Vi deo/Audio Adjust Play Mode DV Record DVR -520H/720H screen T uner Detailed Settings Pr 5 Memory1 Detailed Settings Pr 5 Memory1 Off Max Off Detail White AGC Black Setup Motion Still 3-D Y/C VNR Min Max Min Max White Level Black Level Pr 5 0 IRE Off DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 94 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Video/Audio Adjust menu 12 95 En 4 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to adjust the currently selected picture quality setting. 5 When you have all the settings as you want them, press HOME MENU to exit. You can now use the preset for any other input or the built-in TV tuner. Tip ⢠To see more of the picture as you adjust different settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you want to adjust. Note ⢠DVR-520H/720H only: When the DV input is selected, only VNR and Detail settings can be adjusted. ⢠When White AGC is On , the White Level setting canâÂÂt be adjusted. ⢠The 3-D Y/C and Black Setup settings apply only to NTSC video input. Setting the picture quality for disc playback This setting determines how the picture will look when playing discs. Choosing a preset 1 With a disc playing (or paused), press HOME MENU and select âÂÂVideo/Audio AdjustâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂVideo Adjustâ 3 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to change the setting. There are six presets available: ⢠TV(CRT) â suitable for standard cathode-ray tube TVs ⢠PDP â suitable for plasma display screens ⢠Professional â suitable for professional monitors ⢠Memory1 â user preset 1 ⢠Memory2 â user preset 2 ⢠Memory3 â user preset 3 You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for the current preset ( TV(CRT) , PDP or Professional ). 4 Press ENTER to select the preset. Creating your own set There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of picture quality settings for disc playback. 1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3). 2 Move the cursor down and select âÂÂDetailed SettingsâÂÂ. 3 Select the picture quality setting you want to adjust. You can adjust the following settings: ⢠YNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the Y (brightness) component. ⢠CNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the C (colour) component. ⢠QNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the block noise. ⢠Detail â Adjusts how sharp edges appear. ⢠White Level â Adjusts the intensity of white. ⢠Black Level â Adjusts the intensity of black. ⢠Black Setup â Corrects the standard reference black level (NTSC video only). ⢠Hue â Adjusts overall balance between red and green. ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts how rich the colours appear. 4 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to adjust the currently selected picture quality setting. 5 When you have all the settings as you want them, press HOME MENU to exit. Tip ⢠To see more of the picture as you adjust different settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you want to adjust. TV(CRT) Detailed Settings Memory1 Detailed Settings Off Max Off Max Off Max YNR CNR QNR Off Max Detail Min Max Min Max White Level Black Level Black Setup Memory1 0 IRE DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 95 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Video/Audio Adjust menu 12 96 En Note ⢠The Black Setup setting applies only when playing NTSC discs. Audio DRC ⢠Default setting: Off When watching Dolby Digital material at low volume, itâÂÂs easy to lose low level sounds completelyâÂÂincluding some of the dialog. Switching on Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control) can help by bringing up the low level sounds, while controlling high level peaks. 1 During playback or when paused, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂVideo/Audio AdjustâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂAudio AdjustâÂÂ. 3 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to adjust DRC from âÂÂOffâ to âÂÂMaxâÂÂ. Exactly how much difference you can hear between the settings will depend on the material. Remember ⢠Audio DRC is not effective when listening to a disc via the digital output when Dolby Digital Out is set to Dolby Digital . In this case adjust the dynamic range from your AV amplifier/receiver. Off Max Audio DRC Audio Adjust DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 96 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 97 En Chapter 13 The Initial Setup menu Using the Initial Setup menu The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on. ⢠Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial SetupâÂÂ. ⢠Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback these settings are grayed out in the Initial Setup menu. ⢠Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity. Basic settings Clock Setting The date (day, month, year) and time must be set before you can use any of the timer recording features. The clock can be set automatically if there is a broadcast station transmitting clock signals, or manually. Select Auto to set the clock automatically or Manual to display the clock setting screen. ⢠Auto clock setting Some TV channels broadcast time signals together with the program. This recorder can use these signals to set the clock automatically. Set âÂÂClock Set CHâ to the channel preset number that broadcasts a clock signal, then move the cursor down to âÂÂStartâ and press ENTER. If the time could not be set automatically, press RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select Manual . ⢠Manual clock setting If no stations in your area are broadcasting time signals, you can set the clock manually: Set your time zone. You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative to GMT. Move the cursor down and select âÂÂOnâ for summer time if you are currently on summer time, then press ENTER. Disc Setup Initial Setup Vi deo/Audio Adjust Play Mode DV Record DVR -520H/720H screen Timer Recording Disc Navigator Copy Disc History PhotoViewer Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Auto Manual Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Clock Setting Auto Clock Setting Date T ime Clock Set CH Pr 1 Initial Setup Start Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Clock Setting Manual Clock Setting T ime Zone Summer Time Off 1/ 2 England London Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Clock Setting On England London Manual Clock Setting T ime Zone Summer Time 1/ 2 Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 97 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 98 En Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then press ENTER to make all the settings. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to change the value in the highlighted field. Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to move from one field to another. Input Line System ⢠Default setting: 625System For standard PAL or SECAM recording, leave the input line system to 625System . When recording an NTSC or PALâÂÂ60 signal through an external input, change to 525System . Note ⢠When the current input is a built-in tuner channel preset, changing the input line system will usually also affect the input line system of the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) input. However if the AV2/L1 In setting is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1 In on page 102), then the L2 input is affected instead. ⢠If when this setting is changed, the screen goes blank (due to incompatibility with your TV), you can switch back by pressing and holding the front panel button then pressing DVD (also front panel) while the recorder is stopped. ⢠When you switch the Line Input System setting the Copy List is erased. If you switch the setting using the button and DVD buttons as described above, there is no confirmation, so please use with care. ⢠You canâÂÂt mix recordings of different TV line systems on the same disc. ⢠When you change this setting, the Input Colour System setting also changes (see Input Colour System on page 102). On Screen Display ⢠Default setting: On On the default setting, the recorder shows on-screen operation displays ( Play, Stop and so on). Change to Off to hide these displays. Front Panel Display ⢠Default setting: On On the default setting, the time is shown in the front panel display when the recorder is in standby. Switch to Off to have the front panel display switch off completely when in standby. Note ⢠When set to Off , the display still lights dimly in standby when setting a timer recording, or during Auto Start Recording. Power Save ⢠Default setting: Off When set to Off , signals arriving at the ANTENNA IN terminal and at the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/ DECODER) AV connector are passed through to the ANTENNA OUT terminal and to the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector, respectively, when the recorder is in standby. You can cut the standby power consumption of the recorder by turning off the through function for one or both terminals: Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Clock Setting Manual Clock Setting 2/2 Date T ime T ime Zone Summer Time 01 01 2004 THU 00 00 England London On Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator 525System 625System Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator On Off Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator On Off Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Mode1 Mode2 Off Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 98 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 99 En ⢠Mode1 â Through function only for the antenna terminal ⢠Mode2 â No through function ⢠Off â Through function for both antenna terminal and AV connector Note ⢠When a timer recording is set with VPS/PDC on, SCART through is always active. Remote Control Set ⢠Default setting: Recorder1 You only need to set this if you are using more than one Pioneer DVD recorder in the same room. So that each remote control operates only its own recorder, make this setting different for each recorder and remote in the room. There are three different recorder IDs. When set to Recorder2 or Recorder3 , the remote control mode is shown in the front panel display. After selecting a new recorder ID, you have to confirm the change by selecting Yes or No (use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons), then pressing ENTER . Note that as soon as you change the recorder ID, the remote becomes inoperative until you change the remote to the same ID. To set the remote, press and hold RETURN and a number button ( 1 , 2 or 3 ) until the indicator on the remote lights. Setup Navigator ⢠Default setting: n/a The Setup Navigator appears automatically when you switch on the recorder for the first time (or after resetting the recorder). It is also available from the Initial Settings menu should you need it at any other time. See also Switching on and setting up on page 25. Tuner settings Auto Channel Setting : Auto Scan This recorder has a built-in TV tuner for recording PAL B/ G, PAL I, SECAM L and SECAM D/K TV programs off the air or from analog cable TV. We recommend that you first use the Auto Channel Setting described here to tune into the channels in your area, then if there are any unwanted channels, you can disable them using Channel Skip (described below). 1 Choose âÂÂTunerâ from the Initial Setup menu, then âÂÂAuto Channel SettingâÂÂ, then âÂÂAuto ScanâÂÂ. 2 Select your country then press ENTER to start tuning. ⢠You can cancel before auto tuning has finished by pressing ENTER again. After auto scanning has finished, the channel mapping screen appears showing which channels have been assigned to which program numbers. Use the PREV/NEXT buttons to display the previous/next page. 3 Press HOME MENU to exit this screen. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Recorder1 Recorder2 Recorder3 Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Start Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping Set VIDEO Plus CH Auto Scan Download from TV Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping Set VIDEO Plus CH Auto Channel Setting Auto Channel Setting Country UK Initial Setup Pr System CH Name 1 I 26 2 I 33 3 I 23 4 I 30 5 I 37 6 I 35 7 I 39 8 I 26 Pr System CH Name 9 I 9 10 I 25 11 I 11 12 I 12 13 I 13 14 I 14 15 I 15 16 I 16 Initial Setup 1/7 Channel Mapping DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 99 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 100 En Note ⢠You can fine-tune individual stations using the Manual CH Setting feature. See Manual CH Setting below for how to use this. Auto Channel Setting : Download from TV If you connected this recorder to your TV using the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector, and if your TV supports this function, you can download all the channels that your TV is tuned to. Check your TVâÂÂs instruction manual for more details. 1 Choose âÂÂDownload from TVâÂÂ. 2 Select your country. 3 Press ENTER to start downloading. After downloading has finished, the channel mapping screen appears showing which channels have been assigned to which program numbers. Tip ⢠If the channel tuning information is updated in the TV, the recorder will automatically download the new information. Manual CH Setting The channel skip function lets you skip channels where there is no station so that as you change channels using the CHANNEL /â buttons or the number buttons, you only change to channels that have a station. The manual tuning function allows you to manually tune to stations, should you need to. 1 Select âÂÂManual CH SettingâÂÂ, then âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. Press ENTER to go to the country setting screen. 2 Select your country. 3 Press ENTER to go to the manual channel setting screen. ⢠Use the CHANNEL /â buttons or the number buttons to change channels. From this screen there are eight parameters you can set: ⢠Skip â If you want to skip the displayed channel (because there is no station assigned to that channel), change the Skip setting to On . ⢠CH System â Set the channel system used in your area or region. ⢠Channel â Change the channel number assigned to the current preset. ⢠AFT (Auto Fine Tune) â When set to On , the station is automatically tuned; set to Off to manually fine tune (see below). ⢠Level â Set the AFT level (see above). ⢠Sound System â Set the sound system used for the current channel. ⢠Name â Move the cursor right then input a name for the current station, (up to five characters) then press ENTER . ⢠Decoder â If the current channel is scrambled, requiring a decoder connected to the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) connector, set this to On . (See also AV2/L1 In on page 102.) Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping Set VIDEO Plus CH Auto Scan Download from TV Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping Set VIDEO Plus CH Auto Channel Setting Auto Channel Setting Country UK Initial Setup Downloading Cancel Pr 5 Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping Set VIDEO Plus CH Next Screen Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping Set VIDEO Plus CH Manual Channel Setting Manual Channel Setting Country UK Initial Setup Off Skip CH System Channel AFT Level Sound System Name Decoder UK & IE 2 On I Off Pr 1 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 100 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 101 En Channel Swapping The preset swap feature lets you swap the channel assignments of different programs. This is so that you can group together station presets which naturally go together. 1 Select âÂÂChannel SwappingâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂNext Screenâ to go to the swap presets screen. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a preset station to swap. ⢠Use the PREV/NEXT buttons to display the previous/ next page. 4 Press î (cursor right), then select a preset station to swap with the first preset. 5 Press ENTER to swap the presets. 6 If you want to swap more presets, press î (cursor left), then repeats steps 3 to 5. 7 Press HOME MENU to finish and exit. Set VIDEO Plus CH ⢠Default setting: n/a Guide channels are used by the VIDEO Plus system so that the channel number specified in the PlusCode programming numbers can be guaranteed to correspond to the correct station. 1 Select âÂÂSet VIDEO Plus CHâÂÂ, then âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. 2 Assign channel numbers to the guide channels as necessary. Look in your TV guide to see which channel numbers should be assigned to which guide channels. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to change the guide channel for setting. ⢠Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to change the channel number. ⢠Use the PREV / NEXT button to display the previous/ next 10 guide channels. 3 To return to the Initial Setup menu, press ENTER. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping Set VIDEO Plus CH Next Screen Initial Setup 11 Pr System CH Name 1 I CC40 2 I 2 3 I 3 4 I 4 5 I 5 6 I 6 Pr System CH Name 1 I CC40 2 I 2 3 I 3 4 I 4 5 I 5 6 I 6 [1 ] 1/17 [2] 1/17 Swap Preset Initial Setup 51 Pr System CH Name 1 I CC40 2 I 2 3 I 3 4 I 4 5 I 5 6 I 6 Pr System CH Name 1 I CC40 2 I 2 3 I 3 4 I 4 5 I 5 6 I 6 [1 ] 1/17 [2] 1/17 Swap Preset Initial Setup 53 Pr System CH Name 1 I CC40 2 I 2 3 I 3 4 I 4 5 I 5 6 I 6 Pr System CH Name 1 I CC40 2 I 2 3 I 3 4 I 4 5 I 5 6 I 6 [1 ] 1/17 [2] 1/17 Swap Preset Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping Set VIDEO Plus CH Next Screen Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping Set VIDEO Plus CH Set VIDEO Plus CH Initial Setup Set VIDEO Plus CH Guide Preset Guide Preset 1/26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Pr 4 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 101 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 102 En Video In / Out settings Input Colour System ⢠Default setting: Auto On the default setting, the recorder automatically detects whether the video signal from the built-in tuner or from one of the external inputs is PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or PALâÂÂ60. You may, however, occasionally need to set it manually if the picture is not displayed properly. 1 Select âÂÂInput Colour SystemâÂÂ, then âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. 2 Use the CHANNEL /â buttons or the INPUT SELECT button to switch between the built-in tuner and the external inputs. 3 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to change the input colour system for the current input or built-in tuner. ⢠The available settings depend on the Input Line System setting (see Input Line System on page 98). The table below shows the different options available. AV1 Out ⢠Default setting: Video You only need to make this setting if you connected this recorder to your TV using the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART AV connector. Important ⢠If you make a setting here that is incompatible with your TV, the TV may not display any picture at all. If this happens either switch everything off and reconnect to the TV using either the supplied video cable, or an S-video cable (see Using the S-video output on page 15 for more on this), or reset the recorder (see Resetting the recorder on page 112 for how to do this). ⢠Video â Compatible with all TVs, but lowest quality of the three AV settings. ⢠S-Video â Almost the same quality as RGB, but can give better results if you are using a long SCART cable. ⢠RGB â If your TV is compatible, this setting gives the best picture quality. AV2/L1 In ⢠Default setting: Video You only need to make this setting if you connected this recorder to another component using the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector. The AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) connector input can be set to one of the following settings: ⢠Video â Sets the input signal type to composite video. ⢠S-Video â Sets the input signal type to S-video. ⢠RGB â Sets the input signal type to RGB video. Input Line System Built-in tuner Exter nal input 625 System Auto Auto PAL PAL SECAM SECAM 525 System n/a Auto 3.58 NTSC PALâÂÂ60 Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Input Colour System A V1 Out A V2/L1 In NTSC on P AL TV Next Screen Initial Setup Auto Pr 5 Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Input Colour System A V1 Out A V2/L1 In NTSC on P AL TV Video S-Video RGB Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Input Colour System A V1 Out A V2/L1 In NTSC on P AL TV Video S-Video RGB Decoder Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 102 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 103 En ⢠Decoder â Use this setting if you are using a decoder connected to the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/ DECODER) input. (For scrambled channels, make sure that the manual channel Decoder setting is set to On âÂÂsee also Manual CH Setting on page 100). Note that on this setting, it is not possible to use Auto Start Recording. Note ⢠When the Input Line System setting is set to 525 System , RGB canâÂÂt be selected. ⢠When the Input Line System setting is set to 625 System , RGB can be selected, but if the Input Line System is then changed to 525 System , the AV2/L1 In setting automatically changes to Video . ⢠See also Input Line System on page 98. NTSC on PAL TV ⢠Default setting: On When set to On , NTSC discs (from the U.S., for example) will play correctly on a PAL-only TV. Change to Off if your TV is already NTSC-compatible. Depending on this setting and the Input Line System setting (see Input Line System on page 98), the signal format output when the recorder is stopped varies as shown in the table below. Note ⢠Many recent PAL TVs are capable of correctly displaying NTSC pictures without the need for this setting. Check the manual that came with your TV if youâÂÂre not sure whether yours has this feature. Audio In settings NICAM Select ⢠Default setting: NICAM If you want to record the non-NICAM audio in a TV broadcast, select Regular Audio , otherwise set to NICAM . (When set to NICAM , you can still select Regular Audio using the AUDIO button. See Changing audio channels on page 29.) Tuner Level ⢠Default setting: Normal Set to Compression if the audio level from the built-in tuner is excessively high causing distortion. External Audio ⢠Default setting: Stereo If the external source is standard stereo, leave set to Stereo . If each channel carries a separate soundtrack, change to Bilingual . DVR-520H/720H only: When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here. Input Line System NTSC on P AL TV Output when stopped 625 System Off PAL On PAL 525 System Off NTSC On PALâÂÂ60 Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Input Colour System A V1 Out A V2/L1 In NTSC on P AL TV On Off Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback NICAM Select T uner Level External Audio Bilingual Recording DV Input Input Level (L1) Input Level (L2) NICAM Regular Audio Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback NICAM Select T uner Level External Audio Bilingual Recording DV Input Input Level (L1) Input Level (L2) Normal Compression Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback NICAM Select T uner Level External Audio Bilingual Recording DV Input Input Level (L1) Input Level (L2) Stereo Bilingual Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 103 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 104 En Bilingual Recording ⢠Default setting: A/L When recording a bilingual source from an external input in Video mode or VR mode set to FINE/MN32 , or to the HDD, you can choose to record either the A/L (left), or the B/R (right) audio channel. Note ⢠If youâÂÂre recording in VR mode (except when set to FINE/MN32 ), both channels will be recorded and you can switch them as you like on playback. DV Input (DVR-520H/720H only) ⢠Default setting: Stereo1 You need to set this if you have a camcorder using 32kHz/ 12-bit sound connected to the front panel DV IN/OUT jack. Some digital camcorders have two stereo tracks for audio. One is recorded at the time of shooting; the other is for overdubbing after shooting. On the Stereo1 setting, the sound that was recorded while shooting is used. On the Stereo2 setting, the overdubbed sound is used. You can also choose a Mix setting of 25%, 50% or 75% for the Stereo 1 with a corresponding Stereo 2 setting of 75%, 50% or 25%. Input Level (L1 / L2) ⢠Default setting: 0dB You can adjust the gain of the audio from each external input individually, from âÂÂ6dB to 6dB in steps of 3 dB to optimize the recorded audio level. Audio Out settings Digital Out ⢠Default setting: On If at any time you need to switch off the digital audio output, set this to Off , otherwise leave it On . Note ⢠When set to Off , all the other Audio Out settings are grayed out and canâÂÂt be set. Dolby Digital Out You only need to make this setting if you connected this recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using the digital output. ⢠Default setting: Dolby Digital If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component) is Dolby Digital compatible, set to Dolby Digital , otherwise set to Dolby Digital î PCM . Check the manual that came with the connected component if youâÂÂre unsure whether it is Dolby Digital compatible. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback NICAM Select T uner Level External Audio Bilingual Recording DV Input Input Level (L1) Input Level (L2) A/L B/R Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback NICAM Select T uner Level External Audio Bilingual Recording DV Input Input Level (L1) Input Level (L2) Stereo1 Stereo2 Mix (Stereo1: 75%) Mix (Stereo1: 50%) Mix (Stereo1: 25%) Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback NICAM Select T uner Level External Audio Bilingual Recording DV Input Input Level (L1) Input Level (L2) Initial Setup 6dB 3dB 0dB âÂÂ3 d B âÂÂ6 d B Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Digital Out Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out On Off Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Digital Out Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out Dolby Digital Dolby Digital î PCM Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 104 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 105 En DTS Out You only need to make this setting if you connected this recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using the digital output. ⢠Default setting: On If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component) has a built-in DTS decoder, set to On , otherwise set to Off . Check the manual that came with the connected component if youâÂÂre unsure whether it is DTS compatible. Important ⢠If you set to On with a non-DTS compatible amp/ receiver, noise will be output when you play a DTS disc. ⢠When set to On , there is no analog audio output when playing a DTS DVD-Video disc. ⢠When playing a DTS audio CD (even when DTS Out is Off ), noise is output from the analog outputs. Do not play this through your amplifier and speakers. ⢠When playing a DTS audio CD, make sure that Stereo is selected using the AUDIO button. See Switching audio channels on page 44. 96kHz PCM Out You only need to make this setting if you connected this recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using the digital output. ⢠Default setting: 96kHz î 48kHz If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component) is compatible with high sampling rate audio (88.2 / 96 kHz), set to 96kHz , otherwise set to 96kHz î 48kHz . Check the manual that came with the connected component if youâÂÂre unsure whether it is compatible with high sampling rate audio. MPEG Out You only need to make this setting if you connected this recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using the digital output. ⢠Default setting: MPEG î PCM If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component) is MPEG audio compatible, set to MPEG , otherwise set to MPEG î PCM . Check the manual that came with the connected component if youâÂÂre unsure whether it is MPEG compatible. Language settings OSD Language ⢠Default setting: English This sets the language of the on-screen menus and displays. Audio Language ⢠Default setting: English This setting is your preferred audio language for DVD discs. If the language you specify here is recorded on a disc, the recorder automatically plays the disc in that language (although this depends on the Auto Language settingâÂÂsee Auto Language on page 106). Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Digital Out Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out On Off Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Digital Out Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out 96kHz î 48kHz 96kHz Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Digital Out Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out MPEG MPEG î PCM Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display English Français Deutsch Italiano Español Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display English French German Italian Spanish Other Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 105 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 106 En Choose Other if you want to specify a language other than those listed (see Selecting âÂÂOtherâ languages on page 107). Tip ⢠You can switch between the languages recorded on a DVD disc any time during playback using the AUDIO button. (This does not affect this setting.) Subtitle Language ⢠Default setting: English This setting is your preferred subtitle language for DVD discs. If the language you specify here is recorded on a disc, the recorder automatically plays the disc with those subtitles (although this depends on the Auto Language settingâÂÂsee Auto Language below). Choose Other if you want to specify a language other than those listed (see Selecting âÂÂOtherâ languages on page 107). Tip ⢠You can change or switch off the subtitles on a DVD disc any time during playback using the SUBTITLE button. (This does not affect this setting.) Auto Language ⢠Default setting: On When set to On , the recorder selects the default audio language on a DVD disc (French dialog for a French movie, for example), and displays subtitles in your preferred subtitle language only if that is set to something different. In other words, movies in your native language wonâÂÂt have any subtitles, while foreign language movies will be shown with subtitles. Set to Off to have the recorder play discs strictly according to your Audio Language and Subtitle Language settings. For Auto Language to work, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language settings must be the sameâÂÂsee Audio Language on page 105 and Subtitle Language above. Note ⢠Even when set to On , Auto Language may not work with some discs. In this case, set the audio and subtitle languages using the AUDIO and SUBTITLE buttons. Tip ⢠You can still switch audio and subtitle languages on playback using the AUDIO and SUBTITLE buttons. DVD Menu Language ⢠Default setting: w/Subtitle Language Some multilingual discs have disc menus in several languages. This setting specifies in which language the disc menus should appear. Leave on the default setting for menus to appear in the same language as your Subtitle Language âÂÂsee Subtitle Language above. Choose Other if you want to specify a language other than those listed (see Selecting âÂÂOtherâ languages on page 107). Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display English French German Italian Spanish Other Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display On Off Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display w/Subtitle Language English French German Italian Spanish Other Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 106 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 107 En Subtitle Display ⢠Default setting: On When set to On , the recorder displays subtitles according to the Subtitle Language and Auto Language settings. Set to Off to switch subtitles off altogether (although you may find that some discs override this setting). Set to Assist Subtitle to have the recorder display the extra assistive subtitles recorded on to some DVD discs. Selecting âÂÂOtherâ languages 1 Select âÂÂOtherâ from the language list. This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language. 2 Select the language you want. ⢠Select by language name: Use the î /î (cursor left/ right) buttons to change the language. ⢠Select by code number: Press î (cursor down) then use the number buttons to enter the four-digit language code. See Language code list on page 119 for a list of available languages and corresponding codes. 3 Press ENTER to confirm and exit the screen. Recording settings Manual Recording ⢠Default setting: Off On the default setting there are four different recording time/picture quality settings, FINE , SP , LP and EP . If you want to create a custom setting, switch on Manual Recording and select one of the 32 manual settings. When recording, you can select your Manual Recording setting using the REC MODE button. 1 Select âÂÂOn (go to setup)â to display the manual recording setting screen. 2 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to change the manual recording level. ⢠You can also use the î and î buttons to cycle between levels MN1 , MN9 , MN21 and MN32 . ⢠To preview the recording quality, press î (cursor down) and select Preview . To return to the level adjust screen, press ENTER . 3 Press ENTER to set the manual recording level and return to the menu screen. Note ⢠The preset picture quality settings correspond to the following manual settings: FINE : MN32 , SP : MN21 , LP : MN9 , EP : MN1 . ⢠See Manual recording modes on page 118 for detailed information on the manual recording levels. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display On Off Assist Subtitle Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display DVD Menu Language DVD Menu Language English 0 514 Language Number Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Manual Recording Optimized Rec Navi Mark Auto Chapter (Video) Frame Accurate DVD-RW Auto Init. On (go to setup) Off Initial Setup Pr 5 DVD Remain 2h00m HDD Remain 30h33m MN 9 (4h00m/DVD) 2.60Mbps EP LP SP FINE Preview DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 107 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 108 En Optimized Rec ⢠Default setting: Off On the default setting, if a timer program (standard, easy or VIDEO Plus programming system) is set but there isnâÂÂt enough space on the disc at the recording quality set, the recording will start, but it will be cut off when the disc is full. Set Optimized Rec to On to have the recorder automatically adjust the recording quality to fit the available disc space. Note ⢠You may notice a reduction in picture quality if the recorder has to fit a lot of extra material into the remaining time available on the disc. ⢠If, even on recording level MN 1 , there is insufficient space available on the disc, the recording is made on the HDD at the quality setting you originally specified. ⢠Optimized Recording only compensates for the first (earliest starting) timer program if more than one has been set. ⢠Optimized recording works only with DVD recordings. ⢠Optimized recording canâÂÂt be used together with VPS/PDC. Navi Mark ⢠Default setting: 0 seconds In the Disc Navigator, each title is shown with a still frame picture to remind you what it is. This setting lets you decide the default still frame. The default setting of 0 seconds takes the first frame of the title, but you can also set it to 30 seconds or 3 minutes into the title (if the title is shorter than the setting, then the first frame is used). Auto Chapter (Video) ⢠Default setting: 10 minutes When recording in Video mode, a new chapter is started every 10 minutes on the default setting. You can change this interval to 15 minutes , or switch off automatic chapter marking altogether with the No Separation setting. Frame Accurate ⢠Default setting: Off When Frame Accurate setting is Off , exact frame accuracy is traded for high-speed copying when recording a Copy List. Switch Frame Accurate On to preserve the accuracy of the Copy List. However, copying some edited Video mode titles will be done in real time. Important ⢠When you change this setting the Copy List is erased. Make sure it is set how you want it before you start putting together a Copy List. ⢠The Frame Accurate setting has no effect on the actual video content stored on the HDD. DVD-RW Auto Init. ⢠Default setting: VR Mode When you load a new, blank DVD-RW disc the recorder automatically initializes it for recording. You can set it to initialize the disc for VR mode or Video mode recording. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback On Off Manual Recording Optimized Rec Navi Mark Auto Chapter (Video) Frame Accurate DVD-RW Auto Init. Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback 0 seconds 30 seconds 3 minutes Manual Recording Optimized Rec Navi Mark Auto Chapter (Video) Frame Accurate DVD-RW Auto Init. Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback No Separation 10 minutes 15 minutes Manual Recording Optimized Rec Navi Mark Auto Chapter (Video) Frame Accurate DVD-RW Auto Init. Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback On Off Manual Recording Optimized Rec Navi Mark Auto Chapter (Video) Frame Accurate DVD-RW Auto Init. Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback VR Mode Vi deo Mode Manual Recording Optimized Rec Navi Mark Auto Chapter (Video) Frame Accurate DVD-RW Auto Init. Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 108 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 109 En Playback settings TV Screen Size ⢠Default setting: 4:3 (Letter Box) If you have a widescreen TV, select the 16:9 settingâ widescreen DVD software is then shown using the full screen area. When playing software recorded in conventional (4:3) format, the settings on your TV will determine how the material is presentedâÂÂsee the manual that came with your TV for details on what options are available. If you have a conventional TV, choose either 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) . In Letter Box mode, widescreen software is shown with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. Pan & Scan chops the sides off widescreen material to make it fit the 4:3 screen (so even though the picture looks larger on the screen, youâÂÂre actually seeing less of the movie). See Screen sizes and disc formats on page 113 for more information. Still Picture ⢠Default setting: Auto The recorder uses one of two processes when displaying a still frame from a DVD disc. The default Auto setting automatically chooses the best setting each time. ⢠Field â produces a stable, generally shake-free image. ⢠Frame â produces a sharper image, but more prone to shake than field stills. Seamless Playback ⢠Default setting: Off During playback of a VR mode Play List, you may notice momentary interruption in the picture at edited points. The Seamless Playback feature lets you trade-off accuracy of the edit points for more seamless playback. When switched On , you may notice that the edit points are a few frames earlier or later than you set. Parental Lock ⢠Default level: Off ⢠Default password: none ⢠Default Country code: us (2119) Some DVD-Video discs feature a Parental Lock level. If the recorder is set to a lower level than the disc, it will require you to enter a password before the disc will play. This gives you some control about what your children watch on your DVD recorder. Some discs also support the Country code feature. The recorder does not play certain scenes on these discs depending on the Country code you set. Before you can set the Parental Lock level or the Country code you must set a password. As the password owner you can change the Parental Lock level or Country code whenever you like. You can also change the password. Note ⢠Not all discs that you may consider inappropriate for your children use the Parental Lock feature. These discs will always play without requiring the password first. ⢠If you forget the password, you can reset the recorder to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 112), then set a new password. Parental Lock : Set Password The password you set will enable you to change the Parental Lock level and Country code setting. It is also the password that you will need to enter if you want to play a disc with a parental lock level higher than the recorder. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan & Scan) 16:9 Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Field Frame Auto Initial Setup VR mode HDD Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator On Off Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 109 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 110 En 1 Select âÂÂSet PasswordâÂÂ. 2 Use the number buttons to input a four-digit password. 3 Press ENTER to set the password. Parental Lock : Change Password To change your password, confirm your existing password then enter a new one. 1 Select âÂÂChange PasswordâÂÂ. 2 Use the number buttons to enter your existing password. 3 Press ENTER. 4 Enter a new password. 5 Press ENTER. Parental Lock : Change Level 1 Select âÂÂChange LevelâÂÂ. 2 Use number buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER. 3 Use the î /î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a new parental lock level. 4 Press ENTER to set the new Parental Lock level. Parental Lock : Country Code You may also want to refer to the Country code list on page 119. 1 Select âÂÂCountry CodeâÂÂ. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Set Password Change Level Country Code Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Set Password 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Change Password Change Level Country Code Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Change Password Current Password New Password 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Change Password Current Password New Password 1 2 3 4 5 678 Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Change Password Change Level Country Code Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Parental Lock : Change Level Password Off 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Parental Lock : Change Level Password Off 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Change Password Change Level Country Code Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 110 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 13 111 En 2 Use number buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER. 3 Select a Country code. There are two ways you can do this. ⢠Select by code letter: Use î /î (cursor left/right) to change the country code. ⢠Select by code number: Press î (cursor down) then use the number buttons to enter the four-digit country code (you can find the Country code list on page 119.) 4 Press ENTER to set the new Country code. Note ⢠Changing the country code does not take effect until the next disc is loaded (or the current disc is reloaded). Angle Indicator ⢠Default setting: On On the default setting, when playing a DVD-Video disc that features multi-angle scenes, an icon appears on- screen during the parts of the disc where angle switching is available. Change to Off to hide the on-screen indicator. TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Parental Lock: Country Code Password Code Number us 1 2 3 4 2 1 1 9 Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Parental Lock: Country Code Password Code Number 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup us 2 1 1 9 TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Parental Lock: Country Code Password Code Number 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup us 2 1 1 9 Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator On Off Initial Setup DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 111 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 112 En Chapter 14 Additional information Resetting the recorder If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory settings. 1 Make sure that the recorder is on. 2 Press and hold î STOP and press î STANDBY/ ON. The recorder turns off with all settings reset. Setting up the remote to control your TV You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be able to use this feature you first have to program the remote with a maker code from the table below. 1 Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then enter the maker code for your TV. The LED indicator on the remote controls lights. See the table below for the list of maker codes. If there is more than one code given for your make, input the first one in the list. ⢠If the makerâÂÂs name of your TV doesnâÂÂt appear in the table below, you will not be able to use this remote to control your TV. 2 Press î TV to check that the remote works with your TV. If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch on/ off. If it doesnâÂÂt and there is another code given for your maker, repeat step 1 with a new code. Using the TV remote control buttons The table below shows how to use this remote control with your TV. Button What it does î TV P ress to switch the TV on/off (standby) INPUT SELECT P ress to change the TVâÂÂs video input TV VOLUME Use to adjust the TV volume TV CHANNEL Use to change TV channels Maker Code Alba 66 Bush 76 Finlux 84 Fisher 61, 65 F ujitsu 77 F unai 67 Goldstar 79 Grandiente 87 Grundig 51, 82 Hitachi 56, 60, 83, 86 IT T 70 Mitsubishi 59 Nokia 53, 81 P anasonic 58, 72 Philips 57, 85 P ioneer 50, 80 RCA 68 Salora 71 Samsung 73, 75 Sanyo 74 Sei 78 Sharp 52 Sony 54 T andy 69 T elefunken 64 Thomson 62 T oshiba 55 Victor 63 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 112 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 113 En Screen sizes and disc formats When viewing on a standard TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 16:9 4:3 (Letter Box) The program is shown in widescreen with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The sides of the program are cropped so that the picture ï¬Âlls the whole screen. 4:3 16:9 The program appears squashed. Set to either 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) . 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The program is presented correctly on either setting. When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 16:9 16:9 The program is presented in widescreen. 4:3 16:9 Y our TV will determine how the picture is presentedâÂÂcheck the manual that came with the TV for details. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 113 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 114 En Troubleshooting Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work. General Problem Remedy The disc is automatically ejected after closing the disc tray ⢠Check that the disc is not a DVD-RAM, DVD R/RW or other incompatible format disc (page 9). ⢠Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up). ⢠T ake out the disc and clean it (page 121). ⢠Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder (page 123). No picture ⢠Check that ever ything is connected properly (page 12). ⢠Check that the connected TV and/or the A V amp/receiver is set to the correct input. CanâÂÂt play a disc ⢠Check that the disc is not a DVD-RAM, DVD R/RW or other incompatible format disc (page 9). ⢠T ake out the disc and clean it (page 121). ⢠Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up). ⢠There may be condensation in the recorder . Leave the recorder for an hour or so for the condensation to evaporate. ⢠During HDD recording, you canâÂÂt play discs that are recorded with a Line System different to the current recorder setting. All settings are r eset ⢠If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on, all the settings will be lost. ⢠Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the power cord. Screen goes blank and contr ols are inoperative ⢠P ress î STOP then restart playback. Remote control does not work ⢠If you connected this recorder to another P ioneer product using the CONTROL IN jack, point the remote control at the other component to use (page 12). ⢠Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder (page 99). (When the batteries run down, the remote mode is automatically reset to Recorder1 .) ⢠Use the remote within its operating range (page 8). ⢠Replace the batteries (page 8). No sound or sound is distorted ⢠Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and the volume turned up. ⢠There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow motion play . P ress î PLAY to resume regular playback. ⢠DTS discs can only be played if this recorder is connected to a DTS decoder or DTS compatible amp/receiver . If you have connected a suitable decoder , also make sure that the Initial Setup > Audio Out > DTS Output setting is On . ⢠Some 96kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. In this case, switch the input of your amp/receiver to analog. ⢠Check the audio cable connections (page 12). ⢠If the sound is distorted, tr y cleaning the cable plugs. The picture fr om the external input is distorted ⢠If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot connect via this recorder . Connect the component directly to your TV . DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 114 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 115 En The picture is distorted ⢠Change the Input Line System setting (page 98). (Y ou can also change it by pressing the button and DVD on the front panel simultaneously with the recorder stopped.) Screen is str etched vertically or hori- zontally ⢠Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 109) is correct for the kind of TV you have (see also page 113). ⢠If you have a widescreen TV , check its aspect ratio settings. ⢠This recorder âÂÂs input switches into wide mode automatically according to the input signal. When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1 (widescreen signalling), set the connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio (standard) video. CanâÂÂt play a disc r ecorded using this recor der on another player ⢠If the disc was recorded in Video mode, make sure that itâÂÂs ï¬Ânalized (page 59). â¢Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in Video mode and ï¬Ânalized. ⢠If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be speciï¬Âcally RW compatible in order to play it (page 9). ⢠Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non- CPRM compatible players (page 46). During playback the picture is dark or distorted ⢠When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR , the picture will not display correctly . Connect the recorder directly to your TV . CanâÂÂt contr ol your TV using this remote contr ol ⢠If there is more than one code listed for your make of TV , tr y each one in turn (page 112). ⢠It is possible that none of the codes listed will work with your particular model of TV , even if the maker appears in the remote control code list. CanâÂÂt r ecord or does not r ecord suc- cessfully ⢠Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD. ⢠F or a Video mode disc, check that the disc isn âÂÂt already ï¬Ânalized. ⢠The HDD may contain up to 250 titles; one DVD disc 99 (Original) titles and 999 chapters. Check that these limits have not been reached. ⢠Check that the source you are tr ying to record is not copy protected. ⢠F or a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isnâÂÂt locked (page 92). ⢠Check that you are recording with the same TV system (P AL, NTSC, etc.) as the disc has already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV system. When recording to the HDD, it is also necessar y to set the Input Line System setting to match what you want to record (page 98). ⢠The power may have failed during recording. Timer program doesnâ t recor d suc- cessfully ⢠When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder âÂÂs built-in TV tuner , not the TV âÂÂs built-in tuner . ⢠When recording to a Video mode disc, programs that are copy-once protected cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material (page 46). ⢠T wo timer programs may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will record completely . ⢠The power may have failed during recording. After brieï¬Ây unplugging or after a power failure the fr ont panel dis- play shows âÂÂ--:--â â¢ A backup batter y inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from being reset when there is no power to the recorder . This batter y should last approximately ï¬Âve years from factor y shipping. Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use the recorder again . T o have the batter y replaced, contact your dealer or a P ioneer Ser vice Center . Front panel display shows âÂÂLOCKâ when a button is pressed ⢠The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 55). Problem Remedy DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 115 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 116 En Note ⢠If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions. Frequently asked questions In this section you can find answers to frequently asked questions on how to use your DVD recorder and what it can do. ⢠How do I make a high-quality copy? We recommend that you use the high-speed copy mode. Although the copy is faster than real time, there is no loss of picture or sound quality compared to the original. If there is not enough space on the disc to make a copy at the same picture quality as the original, we recommend that you change the recording mode to âÂÂOptimizedâÂÂ. This will fit the recording on to the available space on the disc. See also Copying and back-up on page 61. ⢠Can I make a DVD copy of, say, a movie that has had the commercials edited out? Yes. There are two ways to do this. You can either edit the video on the HDD then copy the edited version to DVD, or you can assemble a Copy List that cuts out the commercials, then record that to DVD. See also Copying and back-up on page 61. â¢I have a two-hour recording on the HDD made in FINE mode. Can I copy this to DVD in high-speed mode? A standard DVD disc can hold only an hour of FINE mode material, so you wouldnâÂÂt be able to make a high-speed copy of this on to one disc. You could divide up the recording on the HDD into two titles of an hour each and copy these to two DVDs (using high-speed copy). Alternatively, you could copy the material in SP (or Optimized) so as to fit it all on to one disc (note that there will be some loss in picture quality if you do this). See also Copying and back-up on page 61. ⢠Can I record a bilingual broadcast to the HDD, keeping both audio channels and switch them on playback? No. Only the audio channel set in the Bilingual Recording setting in the Initial Settings menu will be recorded. If you need to record both channels of audio, please record using a VR mode DVD-RW disc. See also Bilingual Recording on page 104. ⢠Can I record continuously on the HDD for more than six hours? Yes, timer recordings made to the HDD can by set for up to 24 hours. However, because the maximum length of a title is six hours, the recording will be spread over two or more titles. Note that there will be a short break in the recording between titles. See also Setting a timer recording on page 49. ⢠Can I copy a finalized Video mode disc (DVD-R or DVD- RW) to the HDD? Yes. Start playing the Video mode disc and use the One Touch Copy button to copy the currently playing title to the HDD. Repeat for as many titles on the disc as you want to copy. See also One Touch Copy* (DVD to HDD) on page 62. CanâÂÂt use One T ouch Copy (HDD to DVD) ⢠Make sure that there is a recordable DVD loaded with some free space for recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc. Also make sure that for a Video mode disc, the disc isn âÂÂt ï¬Ânalized. ⢠If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once protected, One T ouch Copy will not work. ⢠One T ouch Copy doesnâÂÂt work if the recorder is already recording to DVD. CanâÂÂt use One T ouch Copy (DVD to HDD) ⢠Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than 250 titles on the HDD. ⢠One T ouch Copy doesnâÂÂt work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD. The picture fr eezes and the front panel and remote contr ol buttons stop working ⢠P ress the front panel î STANDBY/ON button to switch the power off , then switch back on and restart playback. If the power fails to switch off , press and hold î STANDBY/ON for 10 seconds until the power switches off . Problem Remedy DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 116 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 117 En ⢠Can I use high-speed copy to copy from DVD to HDD? You can only use high-speed copy from DVD to HDD when copying Original titles from a VR mode DVD- RW. See also Copying from DVD to HDD* on page 71. ⢠Can I copy a copy-once protected program from a subscription satellite or cable channel to a DVD from the HDD? Yes, you can use high-speed copy to copy to a VR mode DVD-RW disc. You can also divide the recording on the HDD into a number of smaller titles if the whole recording wonâÂÂt fit on to one disc. See also Copying from HDD to DVD* on page 63. ⢠Can I play a DVD I recorded on this recorder on another DVD player? Yes, you can generally play DVD-R discs and Video mode DVD-RW discs recorded on this recorder on any standard DVD player. You may find, however, that some players will not play some recordable media. For VR mode DVD-RW discs, look for the âÂÂRW Compatibleâ mark to see if it will play the disc. About DV (DVR-520H/720H only) Using DV, also known as i.LINK, you can connect a DV- equipped camcorder to this recorder using a single DV cable for input and output of audio, video, data and control signals. The i.LINK interface is also known as IEEE 1394-1995. âÂÂi.LINKâ and the âÂÂi.LINKâ logo are trademarks. ⢠This recorder is only compatible with DV-format (DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite tuners and Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible. ⢠You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at a time to this recorder. ⢠You cannot control this recorder from external equipment connected via the DV IN/OUT jack. ⢠It may not always be possible to control the connected camcorder via the DV IN/OUT jack. ⢠This recorder only outputs HDD/DVD playback video from the DV IN/OUT jack; signals from the built-in TV tuner, CD, Video CD and other inputs are not output. ⢠Copy-protected or copy-once video is not output from the DV IN/OUT jack. ⢠Digital camcorders can usually record audio as stereo 16-bit/48kHz, or twin stereo tracks of 12-bit/ 32kHz. This recorder can only record one stereo audio track. Set the DV Input setting as required (see DV Input (DVR-520H/720H only) on page 104). ⢠Audio output from the DV IN/OUT jack is 16-bit only. ⢠Audio input to the DV IN/OUT jack should be 32 or 48kHz (not 44.1kHz). ⢠Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the source component pauses playback or plays an unrecorded section of tape, or if the power fails in the source component, or the DV cable becomes disconnected. DV-related messages You may see the following messages appear on your TV screen when using the DV IN/OUT jack. ⢠No DV camcorder connected. â The camcorder is not connected properly, or the camcorder is switched off. ⢠The DV camcorder is recording. â The camcorder is recording, so you cannot start recording from the camcorder to this recorder. ⢠You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at the same time. â The DV jack on this recorder supports connection to just one camcorder. ⢠No tape in the DV camcorder. â There is no cassette loaded into the connected equipment. ⢠The DV camcorder is in record-pause mode. â The camcorder is in record-pause mode. ⢠DV camcorder playback canceled. Recording has been paused. â Recording was paused because the camcorder is not in playback mode. ⢠Cannot operate the DV camcorder. â This recorder cannot control the camcorder. Try switching off the camcorder then switching it back on. ⢠Could not operate the DV camcorder. â This recorder was not able to control the camcorder. ⢠Recording has stopped because the recorded material on the tape finished. â When the recorded part of the DV tape comes to an end, this recorder automatically stops recording. ⢠Recording has stopped because DV camcorder playback stopped. â Recording stopped because DV camcorder playback was stopped or the camcorder was disconnected. ⢠The DV camcorder is not set for playback. Please select playback mode on the DV camcorder. â The camcorder is in camera mode. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 117 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 118 En Manual recording modes The table below shows the approximate recording times for all of the 32 manual recording modes, as well as the standard recording mode equivalents. Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in picture quality. The divisions for HDD recording are the same as those for Video mode. Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2ch format, except for MN32 which is in Linear PCM format. VR mode Video mode / HDD Level Rec. time Level Rec. time MN 1 360 mins. EP MN 1 360 mins. MN 2 345 mins. MN 2 345 mins. MN 3 330 mins. MN 3 330 mins. MN 4 315 mins. MN 4 315 mins. MN 5 300 mins. MN 5 300 mins. MN 6 285 mins. MN 6 285 mins. MN 7 270 mins. MN 7 270 mins. MN 8 255 mins. MN 8 255 mins. MN 9 240 mins. LP MN 9 240 mins. MN 10 230 mins. MN 10 230 mins. MN 11 220 mins. MN 11 220 mins. MN 12 210 mins. MN 12 210 mins. MN 13 200 mins. MN 13 200 mins. MN 14 190 mins. MN 14 190 mins. MN 15 180 mins. MN 15 180 mins. MN 16 170 mins. MN 16 170 mins. MN 17 160 mins. MN 17 160 mins. MN 18 150 mins. MN 18 150 mins. MN 19 140 mins. MN 19 140 mins. MN 20 130 mins. MN 20 130 mins. MN 21 120 mins. SP MN 21 120 mins. MN 22 110 mins. MN 22 110 mins. MN 23 105 mins. MN 23 105 mins. MN 24 100 mins. MN 24 100 mins. MN 25 95 mins. MN 25 95 mins. MN 26 90 mins. MN 26 90 mins. MN 27 85 mins. MN 27 85 mins. MN 28 80 mins. MN 28 80 mins. MN 29 75 mins. MN 29 75 mins. MN 30 70 mins. MN 30 70 mins. MN 31 65 mins. MN 31 65 mins. MN 32 61 mins. FINE MN 32 61 mins. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 118 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 119 En Language code list Language (Language code letter), Language code Country code list Country, Country code , Country code letter Japanese (ja), 1001 English (en), 0514 French (fr), 0618 German (de), 0405 Italian (it), 0920 Spanish (es), 0519 Chinese (zh), 2608 Dutch (nl), 1412 Portuguese (pt), 1620 Swedish (sv), 1922 Russian (ru), 1821 Korean (ko), 1115 Greek (el), 0512 Afar (aa), 0101 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Amharic (am), 0113 Arabic (ar), 0118 Assamese (as), 0119 Aymara (ay), 0125 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Bihari (bh), 0208 Bislama (bi), 0209 Bengali (bn), 0214 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Breton (br), 0218 Catalan (ca), 0301 Corsican (co), 0315 Czech (cs), 0319 Welsh (cy), 0325 Danish (da), 0401 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Estonian (et), 0520 Basque (eu), 0521 Persian (fa), 0601 Finnish (fi), 0609 Fiji (fj), 0610 Faroese (fo), 0615 Frisian (fy), 0625 Irish (ga), 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Galician (gl), 0712 Guarani (gn), 0714 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Hausa (ha), 0801 Hindi (hi), 0809 Croatian (hr), 0818 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Armenian (hy), 0825 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Indonesian (in), 0914 Icelandic (is), 0919 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Javanese (jw), 1023 Georgian (ka), 1101 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Cambodian (km), 1113 Kannada (kn), 1114 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Latin (la), 1201 Lingala (ln), 1214 Laothian (lo), 1215 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Latvian (lv), 1222 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Maori (mi), 1309 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Marathi (mr), 1318 Malay (ms), 1319 Maltese (mt), 1320 Burmese (my), 1325 Nauru (na), 1401 Nepali (ne), 1405 Norwegian (no), 1415 Occitan (oc), 1503 Oromo (om), 1513 Oriya (or), 1518 Panjabi (pa), 1601 Polish (pl), 1612 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Quechua (qu), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Kirundi (rn), 1814 Romanian (ro), 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 Sangho (sg), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Slovak (sk), 1911 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Samoan (sm), 1913 Shona (sn), 1914 Somali (so), 1915 Albanian (sq), 1917 Serbian (sr), 1918 Siswati (ss), 1919 Sesotho (st), 1920 Sundanese (su), 1921 Swahili (sw), 1923 Tamil (ta), 2001 Telugu (te), 2005 Tajik (tg), 2007 Thai (th), 2008 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Turkmen (tk), 2011 Tagalog (tl), 2012 Setswana (tn), 2014 Tonga (to), 2015 Turkish (tr), 2018 Tsonga (ts), 2019 Tatar (tt), 2020 Twi (tw), 2023 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Urdu (ur), 2118 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Volapük (vo), 2215 Wolof (wo), 2315 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Yoruba (yo), 2515 Zulu (zu), 2621 Argentina, 0118, ar Australia, 0121, au Austria, 0120, at Belgium, 0205, be Brazil, 0218, br Canada, 0301, ca Chile, 0312, cl China, 0314, cn Denmark, 0411, dk Finland, 0609, fi France, 0618, fr Germany, 0405, de Hong Kong, 0811, hk India, 0914, in Indonesia, 0904, id Italy, 0920, it Japan, 1016, jp Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr Malaysia, 1325, my Mexico, 1324, mx Netherlands, 1412, nl New Zealand, 1426, nz Norway, 1415, no Pakistan, 1611, pk Philippines, 1608, ph Portugal, 1620, pt Russian Federation, 1821, ru Singapore, 1907, sg Spain, 0519, es Sweden, 1905, se Switzerland, 0308, ch Taiwan, 2023, tw Thailand, 2008, th United Kingdom, 0702, gb USA, 2119, us DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 119 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 120 En On-screen displays and recorder displays The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation of their meaning. Message Explanation/Action ⢠Initializing disc. Please wait a moment. When you load a blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder automatically initializes it. ⢠Incompatible region number . The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the recorder and so will not play . ⢠Cannot recor d any more titles. ⢠No more space for ï¬Âle management data. ⢠Cannot add any more chapter marks. The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/ chapters or combine chapters. ⢠This disc cannot be recor ded. Undo the ï¬Ânal- ization. The disc was ï¬Ânalized on a non-P ioneer DVD recorder . Undo the ï¬Ânalization in order to recording/editing. ⢠Cannot play this disc. ⢠This disc cannot be recor ded. ⢠Cannot read the CPRM information. ⢠Could not recor d the information to the disc. ⢠Cannot edit. ⢠Could not initialize disc. ⢠Could not complete ï¬Ânalization successfully . ⢠Could not undo ï¬Ânalization successfully . ⢠Could not successfully unlock the disc. The disc may be dirty or damaged. T ake out the disc, clean it and retr y . If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even with a new disc, please consult a P ioneer Ser vice Center . ⢠Incompatible or unreadable disc. The disc loaded is a DVD-RAM, DVD R/RW or some other incompatible disc type. This display may also appear if the disc is dirty or damaged. ⢠Cannot recor d to a disc that is not CPRM com- patible. ⢠Cannot recor d this content using Video mode recor ding. The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD -RW disc with CPRM for recording. ⢠This content is copy protected. The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded. ⢠Incorrect CPRM information. The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder may be damagedâÂÂplease consult a P ioneer Ser vice Center . ⢠The audio will conform to the [Bilingual Recording] setting. When recording from an external input in Video mode, or in VR mode set to MN 32, audio is recorded in Linear PCM format. Y ou can only record the left or right channel; not both. ⢠Repairing disc. During recording, the power was cut. This display appears when the power is restored. ⢠Could not repair the disc. The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut. The contents of the recording will be lost. ⢠Overheating has stopped operation. Press DISPLA Y to clear this message. The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the operating limit. If this message reappears, please contact a P ioneer authorized ser vice center . DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 120 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 121 En Handling discs When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge. Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc becoming unusable. Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust, etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly from the center to the outside edge as shown in the diagram below. If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or other cleaning agents, including products designed for cleaning vinyl records. Storing discs Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl records, you should still take care to handle and store discs correctly. When you're not using a disc, return it to its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including under direct sunlight). Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing instrument. These could all damage the disc. For more detailed care information see the instructions that come with discs. Do not load more than one disc into the recorder. Damaged discs Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged, don't risk using it; you could end up damaging the recorder. This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all liability arising in connection with the use of shaped discs. ⢠There is no DV input or the input signal is unr e- cordable. ⢠Cannot preview because ther e is no DV input or the input signal is unrecor dable. No signal was detected at the DV input/output jack. This may appear if a blank section of DV tape is playing in the connected camcorder . (Applicable to DVR-520H/720H only .) ⢠This channelâ s TV system is differ ent from the recor derâ s setting. The TV system (P AL, NTSC, etc.) of the current channel is different from the TV system settings of this recorder . ⢠Recording failed due to a TV system mismatch. Press DISPLA Y to clear message. The timer recording failed because the TV system of the channel set for recording was different from the setting of the recorder . ⢠Playback has stopped because the TV system is differ ent than the recor ding. During recording or timer recording standby , the TV System (P AL, NTSC, etc.) of the playback video changed, causing playback to stop automatically . Message Explanation/Action DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 121 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 122 En Cleaning the pickup lens The DVD recorderâÂÂs lens should not become dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer- authorized service center. Although lens cleaners for CD players are commercially available, we do not re- commend using them since some may damage the lens. Condensation Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is brought into a warm room from outside, or if the temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the condensation wonâÂÂt damage the recorder, it may temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for about an hour before switching on and using. Hints on installation We want you to enjoy using this unit for years to come, so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a suitable location for it: Do... î Use in a well-ventilated room. î Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack. DonâÂÂt... î Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heat- generating appliances. î Place on a window sill or other place where the recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight. î Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke. î Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. î Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interferenceâÂÂespecially if the television uses an indoor antenna. î Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder may be exposed to smoke or steam. î Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with clothâÂÂthis may prevent proper cooling of the unit. î Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough to support all four of the unitâÂÂs feet. Moving the recorder If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if thereâÂÂs one loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press î STANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby, checking that the POWER OFF indication in the display goes off. Wait at least two minutes. Lastly, disconnect the power cord. Never lift or move the unit during playback or recordingâÂÂdiscs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged. Glossary Analog audio An electrical signal that directly represents sound. Compare this to digital audio which can be an electrical signal, but is an indirect representation of sound. See also Digital audio . Aspect ratio The width of a TV screen relative to its height. Conventional TVs are 4:3 (in other words, the screen is almost square); widescreen models are 16:9 (the screen is almost twice as wide as it is high). Chapter Just as a book is split up into several chapters, a title on the HDD/a DVD disc is usually divided into chapters. See also Title . Digital audio An indirect representation of sound by numbers. During recording, the sound is measured at discrete intervals (44,100 times a second for CD audio) by an analog-to- digital converter, generating a stream of numbers. On playback, a digital-to-analog converter generates an analog signal based on these numbers. See also Sampling frequency and Analog audio . Dolby Digital 1 With multichannel audio, this high quality surround system is used in many movie theaters around the world. Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolbyâ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 122 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 123 En DRM (Digital Rights Management) DRM (Digital Rights Management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by restricting playback, etc. of material on devices other the PC (or other WMA recording equipment) used to record it. For detailed information, please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC (or other WMA recording equipment) and/or software. DTS DTS stands for Digital Theater System. DTS is a surround system different from Dolby Digital that has become a popular surround sound format for movies. âÂÂDTSâ and âÂÂDTS Digital Outâ are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Dynamic range The difference between the quietest and loudest sounds possible in an audio signal (without distorting or getting lost in noise). Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks are capable of a wide dynamic range, delivering dramatic cinema-like effects. EXIF (Exchangeable Image File) A file format developed by Fuji Photo Film for digital still cameras. Digital cameras from various manufacturers use this compressed file format which carries date, time and thumbnail information, as well as the picture data. File extension A tag added to the end of a filename to indicate the type of file. For example, âÂÂ.mp3â indicates an MP3 file. ISO 9660 format International standard for the volume and file structure of CD-ROM discs. JPEG A file format used for still images, such as photographs and illustrations. JPEG files are identified by the file extension âÂÂ.jpgâ or âÂÂ.JPGâÂÂ. Most digital cameras use this format. MP3 MP3 (MPEG1 audio layer 3) is a compressed audio file format. Files are recognized by their file extension âÂÂ.mp3â or âÂÂ.MP3âÂÂ. MPEG audio An audio format used on Video CDs and some DVD discs. This unit can convert MPEG audio to PCM format for wider compatibility with digital recorders and AV amp/receivers. See also PCM . MPEG video The video format used for Video CDs and DVDs. Video CD uses the older MPEG-1 standard, while DVD uses the newer and much better quality MPEG-2 standard. Optical digital output A jack that outputs digital audio in the form of light pulses. Connect components with optical digital jacks using a special optical cord, available from specialist audio dealers. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) The most common system of encoding digital audio, found on CDs and DAT. Excellent quality, but requires a lot of data compared to formats such as Dolby Digital and MPEG audio. For compatibility with digital audio recorders (CD, MD and DAT) and AV amp/receivers with digital inputs, this unit can convert Dolby Digital and MPEG audio to PCM. See also Digital audio . PBC (PlayBack Control) (Video CD/Super VCD only) A system of navigating a Video CD/Super VCD through on-screen menus recorded onto the disc. Especially good for discs that you would normally not watch from beginning to end all at onceâÂÂkaraoke discs, for example. Regions (DVD only) (example region code marks) Regions associate discs and players with particular areas of the world. This unit will only play discs that have compatible region codes. You can find the region code of your unit by looking on the rear panel. Some discs are compatible with more than one region (or all regions). Sampling frequency The rate at which sound is measured to be turned into digital audio data. The higher the rate, the better the sound quality, but the more digital information is generated. Standard CD audio has a sampling frequency of 44.1kHz, which means 44,100 samples (measurements) per second. See also Digital audio . 2 ALL DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 123 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 124 En Title A collection of chapters on a the HDD/DVD disc. See also Chapter . Track Audio CDs and Video CDs use tracks to divide up the content of a disc. The DVD equivalent is called a chapter. See also Chapter . WMA WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 9 or Windows Media Player for Windows XP. Files are recognized by their file extension âÂÂ.wmaâ or âÂÂ.WMAâÂÂ. Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 124 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 125 En Specifications General System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDD, DVD-Video, DVD-R/RW, Video-CD, Super VCD, CD, CD-R/RW (WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA) Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220âÂÂ240 V, 50/60 Hz Power consumption DVR-420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 W DVR-520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 W DVR-720 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 W Power consumption in standby mode 0.68 W (Front panel display: off /Power Save Mode2) Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 kg Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 (W) x 59 (H) x 339 (D) mm Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5ðC to 35ðC Operating humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5% to 85% (no condensation) TV system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAL/SECAM/ NTSC (external input only) Recording Recording format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD Video Recording DVD-VIDEO Recordable discs DVD-RW (DVD Re-recordable disc) DVD-R (DVD Recordable disc) Video recording format Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5MHz Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPEG Audio recording format Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48kHz Compression format . . . . . . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM (uncompressed) Recording time HDDâÂÂDVR-720H Fine (FINE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 hours Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 hours Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 136 hours Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 204 hours Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34âÂÂ204 hours HDDâÂÂDVR-420H/520H Fine (FINE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17 hours Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 hours Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 hours Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 102 hours Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17âÂÂ102 hours DVD-R/DVD-RW Fine (FINE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 hour Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 hours Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 hours Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 hours Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1âÂÂ6 hours Tuner Receivable channels Timer Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programs Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (24-hour digital display) Power off memory . . . . Approx. 5 years (after manufacture) Input/Output VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal . . . . VHF/UHF set 75 ⦠(IEC connector) Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1 (rear), 2 (front) Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1), RCA jack (Input 2) Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1 Output Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1) RCA jack (Output) S-Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1 (rear), 2 (front) Y (luminance) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) C (colour) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1), 4 pin mini DIN (Input 2) S-Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1 / Output Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) C (colour) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1), 4 pin mini DIN (Output) RGB input Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1) RGB output Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1) VHF (low) VHF (high) Hyper UHF VHF (low) VHF (high) Hyper UHF STEREO B/G - A2 I - NICAM L - NICAM B/G - NICAM D/K - NICAM Channel E2 - E4 X - Z E5 - E12 S1 - S20 M1 - M10 U1 - U10 S21 - S41 E21 - E69 Frequency 47 - 89 MHz 104 - 300 MHz 302 - 470 MHz 470 - 862 MHz Channel A - C X - Z D - J 11, 13 S1 - S20 S21 - S41 E21 - E69 Frequency 44 - 89 MHz 104 - 300 MHz 302 - 470 MHz 470 - 862 MHz P AL B/G P AL I Channel 2 - 4 5 - 10 B - Q S21 - S41 21 - 69 Frequency 49 - 65 MHz 104 - 300 MHz 300 - 470 MHz 470 - 862 MHz Channel R1 - R5 R6 - R12 S1 - S20 S21 - S41 E21 - E69 Frequency 49 - 94 MHz 104 - 300 MHz 302 - 470 MHz 470 - 862 MHz SECAM L SECAM D/K DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 125 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 14 126 En Audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1 (rear), 2 (front) L/R Input level During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2V rms (Input impedance: more than 22 k ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1), RCA jacks (Input 2) Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1 Output During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2V rms (Output impedance: less than 1.5 k ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1), RCA jacks (Output) Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack DV input/output (DVR-520H/720H only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin (i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard) AV Connectors (21-pin connector assignment) AV connector input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-pin connector This connector provides the video and audio signals for connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor. PIN no. AV1(RGB)-TV / AV2(INPUT 1) 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 2/R out / Audio 2/R out 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . â / Audio 2/R in 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G out / G in 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 1/L out / Audio 1/L out 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . â / Audio 1/L in 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R or C out / R or C in 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B out / B in 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video out or Y out / Video out 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . â / Video in or Y in 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND Supplied accessories Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Audio / Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 RF antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Operating Instructions Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice, due to improvement. DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 126 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Index 15 127 En English Index A Adjusting the picture quality 94âÂÂ96 Audio DRC 96 Audio language 23, 43, 105 Audio settings 103âÂÂ105 Auto language 105, 106 Auto Scan - see Automatic channel setup Automatic channel setup 25, 99 AV amplifier (connecting to) 19, 27 AV connector 12, 14âÂÂ18, 98, 100, 102, 126 B Bilingual audio 22, 29, 44, 46, 48, 103, 104, 116 C Camcorder - see DV camcorder Changing TV channels 29, 112 Chase play - see Simultaneous recording and playback Copy List 63âÂÂ74, 108, 116 CPRM 46, 120 D Disc and file formats 9, 113 Disc compatibility - see Disc and file formats Disc Navigator 36âÂÂ37, 76âÂÂ88, 108 Dolby Digital 6, 27, 43, 44, 46, 96, 104, 122 Downloading channel presets from the TV 13, 25, 100 DV camcorder 7, 20, 57, 58, 117 E Easy Timer Recording 6, 50 Editing recordings 76âÂÂ88 F Finalizing discs 34, 59, 93 I Initializing discs 45, 60, 93, 108 Input colour system 98, 102 Input line system 98, 102, 103 J JPEG picture files 7, 10, 35, 90âÂÂ91, 123 M Manual channel setup 100 Manual recording mode (MN) 22, 47, 107, 118 MP3 audio 7, 9, 32, 123 MPEG audio 12, 105, 123 N NICAM audio 29, 103 NTSC 22, 45, 46, 95, 96, 98, 102, 103 O One Touch Copy 6, 21, 23, 61, 62âÂÂ63, 116 One Touch Recording 7, 48 On-screen display (OSD) 33, 105 Optimized recording 7, 52, 65, 107, 116 Original content 7, 11, 23, 34, 76, 78, 79âÂÂ83, 87 OSD - see On-screen display (OSD) P PAL 45, 46, 98, 99, 102, 103 PBC (PlayBack Control for Video CD) 32, 36, 123 PhotoViewer 90âÂÂ91 Picture quality - see Adjusting the picture quality and Recording quality Play List 7, 11, 22, 23, 34, 76, 79, 84âÂÂ88 Play Mode menu 23, 40âÂÂ42 Program play 41, 41âÂÂ42 R Recording 6âÂÂ7, 28, 35, 45âÂÂ60 Recording quality 46, 47, 94 Recovery recording 7, 49 Remote control 8, 23, 99 Repeat play 41, 42 Rotating (a JPEG picture) 91 S Scanning 24, 38 SCART - see AV connector SECAM 45, 46, 98, 99, 102 Setting up 25âÂÂ27, 112 Simultaneous recording and playback 6, 35, 55 Slow motion playback 39 Subtitle langauge 23, 43, 106 T Timer recording 6, 13, 17, 22, 24, 35, 49âÂÂ55, 56 TV aspect ratio 108, 113 TV audio channel 29, 48, 103, 104 TV system - see Input line system and Input colour system V Video mode 7, 9, 10, 22, 35, 45, 59, 60, 62, 93, 108, 116, 118 VIDEO Plus 6, 23, 52âÂÂ53, 101 Video settings 94âÂÂ96, 102âÂÂ103 VPS/PDC 6, 22, 49, 51, 52, 55 VR mode 10, 22, 45, 48, 59, 60, 62, 79, 84, 93, 108, 109, 117, 118 W WMA audio 7, 9, 32, 124 Z Zooming (a JPEG picture) 91 DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 127 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Pu blished by P ioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2004 P ioneer Corporation. All rights reser ved. <VRB1340-A> P rinted in the UK PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F . 1 1000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_A_En DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 128 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ